.* ^*V •.
♦ aV ^ .
<*-^>* %"-W/>— « 'J
?.."•♦ *c <*'
°v .''saw **o*
^ ^
V ** % '.'
• -**S ••SW?-' V*\
^HA* «^ < ;/»
"ov*
• !••* *>
>\.i^%
.C° V ^^%°o ,/\'^\ *4*k°»
o *©
^ \
r o?
a^ ;^i^^o' ip*
*o • » * ^
r o«"S_^>
<> **TV«* .,0
^
o. *o • » * J\
•• V
' .stf^>«
>•*.
;** . ♦* "^ \« »»* ^?- ^ •:
/ "v^^V^ "\;^^>^ V'^Pv*' ^
THE
MODERN GREEK GRAMMAR
OF
<
FORMERLY ONE OF THE PROFESSORS IN THE GREEK COLLEGE OF
S CIO;
TRANSLATED FROM THE ORIGINAL FRENCH,
BY
THE REV. GPORGE WINNOCK, A.B.
OF MAGDALEN HALL, OXFORD,
CHAPLAIN TO THE FORCES IN THE IONIAN ISLANDS.
Such parts as required, it will be found to have been so modified, as to adapt it pe-
culiarly to the English Student, particularly with respect to Pronunciation, in the
Arrangement of the Declensions, and in treating of the equivalent expression of
Time in the conjugation of Verbs.
The local situation of the Translator has afforded him manifest advantages ; and
he trusts that the kindness of his Greek Friends, from various parts of the Continent
of Greece, has enabled him to give a considerable increase of value to a Work already
highly estimable.
LONDON:
PUBLISHED FOR THE TRANSLATOR, BY J. SOUTER, 73, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH
YARD; AND SOLD BY RIVINGTON AND CO. WATERLOO PLACE; PARKER AND
CO. OXFORD ; AND DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE.
1825.
[Entered at Stationer's Halt.'] •
^
j
TO
HIS EXCELLENCY
SIR FREDERICK ADAM
KNIGHT GRAND CROSS OF THE MOST DISTINGUISHED ORDER OF
S. 1 MICHAEL AND S. 1 GEORGE,
KNIGHT COMMANDER OF THE MOST HONOURABLE MILITARY ORDER
OF THE BATH,
KNIGHT OF THE AUSTRIAN IMPERIAL MILITARY ORDER OF
MARIA TERESA,
KNIGHT OF THE RUSSIAN IMPERIAL ORDER OF
S.« ANN OF THE FIRST CLASS ,
THE PROTECTING SOVEREIGN'S
LORD HIGH COMMISSIONER
TO THE UNITED STATES OF THE JONIAN ISLANDS
AND
LIEUTENANT GENERAL COMMANDING THE FORCES
SERVING IN THE SAME ,
8$c. , §•<?. , 85c.
This humble attempt to facilitate to his Countrymen the acquisition
of the present Language of Greece is respectfully
Dedicated
My the
EDITOR.
ADVERTISEMENT,
J. he proposal of a New Grammar lias in it certainly
nothing very extraordinary to Englishmen , particularly
since Foreign Languages have been so much more studied
than formerly. Commerce and Travelling, and the conse-
quent interest and curiosity aiioiit flip. "Literature , Anti-
quities, Customs, Manners and Resources of almost every
People , have of late greatly quickened the zeal of cur
.Countrymen in Philological Pursuits. New Grammars of
the French and Italian Languages, though they have long
since attained a high classical character , are continually
issuing from the British press.
In a language till lately little cultivated, even amongst
those who speak it, it is not to he wondered at , that a
good Grammar should long be a desideratum ; and that
many attempts should be made , before any thing like
an approximation to excellence should be attained : but
this is least of all to be wondered at in a Language flow-
ins; directly from a source of the very highest celebrity
in Literary Annals , from the Language of Homer. The
Greeks themselves who write on the subject , wish very
naturally to overleap , if it were possible , the Great Gulf,
the corruptions of ages , lying between them and their
far famed Ancestors , and to bring their Disciples into
immediate contact with the perfection of speech. This is
Utterly impracticable.
VI
It has been almost invariably the misfortune of those
who have written before this Author to perplex rather
than illustrate their subject. Nothing previously written
by a Foreigner could lay any just claims to the Title of
a Grammar. All attempts of the kind by natives have been
so very meagre as to afford little assistance to Foreigners:
many have been more perplexing than useful even among
themselves, from being shackled by some unbending Theory,
or from a very natural propensity to lean more, than at
the present epoch is justifiable, to their Ancient Classics.
Of these latter Athanasius Chris topulo is considered to
have higher pretensions than most of his contemporaries ;
but even he has spent more than one third of his small
Volume on matter quite irrelevant , wherever his Student
is not already a deeply read Hellenist , His sixty two first
pages are devoted to proving that the proper Name of the
existing Language would beiEolo-Doric; it being manifestly,
according iu inm , little more than a substitution , Gr ge-
neral prevalence of the /Eolic and Doric Dialects over all
the others of Ancient Greece. Little of general utility could
be expected from such a work as this. The Grammar of
Darvaris , as far as foreigners are concerned , has even
lower pretensions. Are we then to stop till the language
be perfect , be as classical as its Parent, before Merchants
and Travellers , unacquainted with Ancient Greek , are to
have a guide for the exigencies of the Day,
Chris topulo , aware of the warping partialities, and very
general failure of his countrymen, gives them this excellent
counsel: though his Devotion to his own Creation , the
./Eolo- Doric Theory , has made him almost as regardless of
General Usefulness as others.
» An Author who writes a Grammar ( he says ) ought
» to compose it with a reference , not to what he wishes
» a Language should be , but to what the Language ? he
» undertakes to teach , actually is. Otherwise it is not a
» Grammar , but like the Monster in Homer »
VII
» rif -or 0e Atciy, gwiQiv ll Afzxav , (j.iucnll X'y.cLifz.D
The Translator must trespass on his Reader's patienca
for one moment more; and he will then leave him with
his Author. That a Work of this nature , tolerahly well
■executed , has long been desired by that part of the
British Public interested in the subject, will be , he is
sure , universally allowed. Whether his Readers will think
as highly as himself of the Original ; Whether , by translat-
ing, modifying and adapting the Work to the use of the
English Student , he have in any degree supplied the chasm
in the series of Philological Auxiliaries ; or whether he
have but added one to the almost daily disappointments
of the Literary World, he must submit ? with hopes of
indulgence, to the Public.
If, however , the Work be of any Value to an English-
man , it is most certainly worthy of appearing in an
English Costume , for as, in sound Logic, it is a manifest
error to explain one Term by another , more, or equally
obscure or difficult , and it is the perfection of illustration
to use the easiest and most explicit ; so in a Science ,
materially connected , as Grammar is, with sound reason-
ing, it is at length , fortunately, deemed an absurdity to
teach one foreign Language through the medium of ano-
ther , whenever the Master can avail himself of the lan-
guage of his pupil.
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
Another Grammar! and after that Grammar probably
very shortly a double Dictionary. What a multitude of
Books to learn Nothing ! When will men speak one lan-
guage only ? When will one Grammar and one Vocabulary
alone be sufficient to enable Men from pole to pole to
understand each other? I join the Friends of Science in
their philosophic Wish , and am no more inclined than
they , to burthen my memory with words and phrases ,
without the acquisition of a single additional idea. But
since this aspiration will not , it is probable , be very
soon attended to ; and the imperfection inherent. in human
nature will long, and perhaps for ever, maintain a differ-
ence of idioms , I think that to increase their means of
understanding , and of communicating with each other ,
is to render a real service to Men , as well as to Science.
And if what has been often repeated be true, that there
is no book so bad as to contain nothing good , how much
more certain it is , that there is no people ; whatever may
be its state of civilization and mental advancement, with
which it is not interesting to be made acquainted , and
which may not furnish some curious observation , some
useful lesson to the sage. But this proposition , true in
general , is much more so with respect to the Greeks ,
who are the descendants of the Ancient Preceptors of the
Human Race , of that Sublime Nation which is the settled
object of our grateful admiration. It is more particularly at
such a juncture as the present , when , by generous efforts
and Heroic Sacrifices , they are struggling to regain their
liberty 9 and raise themselves to #ie distinguished eminence
X
of their ancestors, that it becomes peculiarly interesting to
form relations , and be made acquainted with them. To
this end the study of their language is indispensable : and
this consideration, of having a real and general object of
utility in view, has enabled me to overcome the repugnance
I felt to retouch a subject I had treated in a former work,
and to frame an elementary Grammar of the Modern Greek
Language.
Many persons , whose Judgment and Learning I esteem,
have advised me to give a French translation of my lately
published comparative view or parallel of the Ancient and
Modern Greek languages. But I have not deemed it expe-
dient to adopt their advice. That was a book written for
Hellenists , and they have no need of a translation to
enable them to understand it. Those who are unacquainted
with the the Ancient language would . not understand it
better in French than in Greek; and it would be very far
from being sufficient for removing the difficulties in the
study of the existing language.
A book therefore was wanting, which should treat ex-
clusively of the Modern Greek Language , and enable
those , who have no knowledge of the Hellenic or Ancient
Greek , to study it. Such is the Work I have undertaken,
and which I now present to the public. It was a deside-
ratum in our language, and, I believe, in every language of
Europe , the German excepted , which has a Grammar of
the Modern Greek framed by Erdmann Schmidt, a sworn
public Interpreter of that Language.
This work did not fall into my hands till after I had
closed my labours, and I do not regret it. It is a confused
medley of principles and forms of the ancient and modern
Greek , an undigested chaos , combining the simplest
principles of general Grammar with a few rules peculiar
to the Greek , always ill conceived , awkwardly developed,
and frequently faulty. The Author for example gives the
conjugation of the ancient verbs in yu. To what purpose ?
What remains of it is so trifling, that it may without
XI
disadvantage be classed amongst those of irregular Verbs.
Its display of Hellenic and obsolete forms is calculated only
to disgust youth with the study of a language, which is in
itself already sufficiently difficult, and needs not that those
who teach it , instead of smoothing the course , should
render it more rugged. Such a work was not of a character
to induce me to change my plan. I have confined myself
to the language now m use , without establishing any
comparison with the Hellenic , whence it is derived. I often
notice different forms; but all I notice are in present use,
and I am careful to inform my Reader which is the most
correct.
The Modern Greek preserves some few trifling phrases,,
some forms and turns of speech, as vestiges of the Hellenic.
This trifling number of exceptions to general usage has not
induced me to increase the bulk of this elementary work
with nominal or verbal forms , which have no analogy with
the existing language, and in which they are quite isolated.
Is it necessary that I should admit the dative, for example,
into the declension , because persons sometimes say h koli^
apropos, by the bye , b J, while. Certainly not. I think
that , in the present state of the language all these
formulae should be considered as belonging to the Dic-
tionary.
I cannot say the same of certain tenses of the ancient
conjugation, which Authors sometimes employ , such as the
Aorist of the Participle fyc. It would certainly be right to
make the student of Modern Greek acquainted with them
But this is no sufficient reason for admitting them into the
Grammar of that language. They do not as yet form any
integral part of it ; and if Authors sometimes employ them,
it is always temperately , and with a view to enrich the
language , and raise it above itself by well timed experi-
ments. As for us we ought to incorporate with it that only
which actually belongs to it. We refer therefore our Readers,
to Grammars of the Ancient language, for all Hellenic forms,/
which are not given here , and seize the opportunity of as-
XII
suring them most unreservedly, that the sole means of at-
taining any eminent success in the study of the Modern
Greek is to know the ancient, as well with respect to the
Grammar as the Dictionary.
In the present state of infancy of the Modern language
Authors are daily borrowing from the ancient turns of
phraseology Words and Idioms ; so that it is impossible to
determine where , in elementary Books , a stand should be
made , or to draw a precise line of demarcation between
the two languages.
We have given but few principles or elementary Pvules ,
but we have endeavoured that all given should be just and
explicit. Our Syntax, though short, is a brief collection of
the most generally used idiomatic forms or peculiarities.
All the phrases therein adduced are exact , and properly
constructed. We have avoided the error, with which we
have reproached Schmidt who has frequently given , as
examples of his pretended rules, phrases incompatible with
the genius and construction of the Greek language , more
calculated to mislead than to inform the Reader. Thus
page 198 after having proposed as an example of the con-
struction of the article the following elevated style of phrase,
lid rx now/uLJLTcLTV d^a va.ro; 6'fAvifo(, Homer immortal through,
or on account of his poems , cites this as more in use,
h tiifivifOQ a&mtiTot lix V Hoivhioltoltv ; that is he substi-
tutes a solecism for a correct phrase. I have shewn
Chapter 29 , § 3 how it ought to be corrected. Page 197 ,
lie gives us this macaroni construction as elegant ,
iTTotivu rhv t« juoSyitv iTTiuikti-iv , I commend the Scholars dili-
gence « es ist zierlicher und edler, » says he, it is more
elegant and sustained. He might have said that it was Hel-
lenic of the lower ages ; for in this language one should
rather express nimself thus, lir&up toy f^xhrnv tyiq kirtptxtia.e %
so that what he recommends as elegant and sustained, is
neither good ancient nor Modern Greek. We could prove
from a variety of other examples that Schmidt has not seized
lie genius of the Greek language , but we shall content
XIII
ourselves with these two , and no longer trifle with the
patience of our reader.
We shall close with observing that the Book we now
present to the public is an Essay , which may receive
ulterior developement ; but such as it is , it will prove
sufficient to enable the Reader to prosecute alone his
study of the Modern Greek. Should this essay be well
received by the public, we propose , in a second edition, to
enrich it with exercises and a more copious collection of
examples, as customary in Grammars of Modern Languages,
without making any change in the Rules, which we consider
sufficiently developed. We have endeavoured to hold a
mean course between conciseness and prolixity.
XV
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Chap. i. Of Pronunciation Pag. I
2. — Accent - Enclitics 4
3. — Signs used in Writing - Aspirates - Iota under-
written - Apostrophe - Stops ir
4- — Words — Numbers, Genders, Cases i3
5- — Declensions, and of the Article . —
6- — First Declension Isosyllabic . i5
7. — Second Declension Isosyllabic 17
8- — Third Declension Isosyllabic- ..... ....... 20
/ 9- — First Declension Imparisyilabic 22
IO - — Second Declension Imparisyilabic. ......... 24
11. — Heteroclites 26
l2 - — Augmentatives and Diminutives. . . 29
*3. — Comparatives and Superlatives . . 3o
T 4. — Nouns of Number. . 3i
*5. — Pronouns Personal. ................. 34
16. Possessive. . 35
T 7. Demonstrative ................ 36
18. — Relative. ................... $7
x 9- Reflective. .............. ; ... 38
2 °- Interrogative ................. 39
21 • — — — Indefinite. .................. 4o
22. — Verbs 4i
2 3. — Conjugation 4i
2 'i. — Formation of the Tenses - Augment - Character-
istic - Termination 4^
2 5- — Compound Tenses. 43
2 '°- — Fpao-oj Barytoned Active Voice. 45
— Ffsboua'. Passive Voice ....... ........ 5l
— IIocT-co circumflex ed from s« Active. ........ 57
1 — nar-ojaa'. from zcu.xi Passive 60
Tta-o from tta Active 64
— KQifjt.-wp.ai from asu.su Passive . 67,
1 — Ei^.ai ......................... 7C
2 7- — Remarks on Verbs - their Accent .......... 74
The Characteristic and its Changes 75
Certain instances of syncope ........ i ..• 80
28. — List of Irregular Verbs ....... .. .... i . . 8a
XVI
SYNTAX.
Chap. 29. Of the Article ....... 8$
30. — Numbers. ........... 5 * • 90
3 1 . — Nouns of Number . . * * . . — ■
3a. — Pronouns Personal, 91
33. — — — Possessive-relative 94
34. — — — Demonstrative 95
35. — Relative . —
36. Reflective , . • 96
37. — Interrogative 97
38. Indefinite 98
39. — Oblique Cases - Genitive 99
— Accusative. . 100
40. — Comparatives and Superlatives 102
4 1. — The Verb - its Voices io3
42. — Tenses io5
43. — Moods - Indicative and Subjunctive 109
— Infinitive 112
— Participle. ..*.. u3
44- — Prepositions n4
45. — Adverbs 118
46. — Conjunctions 122
APPENDIX.
SECTION I,
Of the Alphabet and its Sounds -'..;. 129
— Syllabication
— Accent - when alone the Sign of the grave should
be used
— General Rules for accenting Nouns and Verbs. . . . i3o
■ — Vulgar Mode of declining Nouns i3i
SECTION II.
Principles on which the Greek Tenses are translated. i36
Dialogues.
Onomasticon or Vocabulary^
CHAPTER I.
OF PRONUNCIATION.
\\ hat is said in the original on this subject , having
reference to the French language only ? I shall substitute
an attempt to illustrate the Modern pronunciation of the
Creek Vowels , Consonants and Diphthongs , with reference
to the English Alphabet; and, where that is impossible ,
I shall give as correct an analysis, as J am able. x b£
the Greek articulation.
CO
(?)
NAMES
ENGLISH.
Act
Alpha as
A in Father,
B p g
Veta
V.
r T r
Gamma
G.
A S
Thelta
Th in Them.
E 6
Epsilon
A and EinJle 7 Me)\^~*'<'z? s$w»
t I
Zeta
Z.
H 4
Eta
E in Me.
©
Theta
Th in ^Ae/n^.
I i
Eota
E in ?ne.
R K
Kappa
K,
A X
Lamtha
L.
M (x
Me
M,
N v
Ne
N.
2 5
Xe
X in Axiom and never as in
r
Alexander^ as fo 7 not s>s gx
o
Omicron
in hone.
n r,
Pee
P.
p p
line
tli
(4)
2 at
Sisrma
S in Us, never as in Is y except
before [3, & and ^
T T
Taf
T.
I ».
Ypsilon
E in me.
<l> 9
Phee
Ph.
X X
Khee
Rh.
¥ <j/
Psee
Ps.
£1 (a
Ome<ia
The two Os 'are pronounced
iii the same manner by all
modern Greeks.
1'i as. A in Ale..
Ei- E in /^e.
Oi E in me.
Oy U in Druid.
Xi us E in //?e.
p, J <^ before p.y S^'[xv p and the Vowels as i „* English,
dC < before the other letters as > ,/. English,
(i) r This letter has two very different sounds, one hard
or guttural before a o to, and before a v p : it exactly answers
to the German G in the words. Lage, Tage, gutturally pro-*
nounced , as in the south : it is very nearly , if not exactly,
met by the sound in the beginning of the Gaelic Words
« dhomb » in « thoir dhomb » give me , and a dhruadhach »
the brides maid. To the South Briton it may be well to
observe, that it very nearly, if not exactly, corresponds with
the sound produced, by attempting to sound a g before an
h aspirated, in the words g-heart g-hom g-home The soft
or liquid sound , used before the slender vowels , and the
diphthongs of equivalent force, is exceedingly easy: it is, as
3
hearly as fossinte, that of y in yes. , year. Before y x ; %
it has the nasal sound of ng English.
( y before yx^»
fi) N Is changed into ( (/, before B [j. t: <p <f*.
( X p o- before X p cr.
(3) II. This letter, when subjoined to M, is sounded as B
English: Tobacco is, by the Greeks, spelt ?a[/,Traxxo. Whatever
might have been the sound attached by the Ancients to [3 ,
the Moderns have no single sign for the English articula-
tion of B.
(4) T. The Modern Greeks have no sign for the English
sound of D; but t after v has this sound, even when the v is
in one word, and the t in the following ; as tov Tponrov
is sounded ton dropon.
(5) X; The sound of this letter is unknown to the Natives
of the South of Britain; but is very familiar to the Scotch >
Irish, Welsh, Spanish, and German ear; though, as a neces-
sary caution, it should be observed, that the Greek y , as
pronounced by females , or persons at all attentive to
euphony, is perhaps the softest modification of a guttural
aspirate in any language , and adds great beauty to the
Romaic. Indeed, when it is very softly pronounced , as it
often is by females, it has so very slight a guttural sound ,
that, to the unpractised ear, it would appear purely palatial.
It is produced by making the breath sensibly strike the
palate in its utterance, with a very slight sound of R before
it as k-here. The following are very nearly the same sound?.
Scotch Irish Welsh Spanish
. Ch in . Ch in Ch in J in
Loch Lochy Auchnacloy Sach Gijou
Italian
German
by Florentines
ch in
in
Casa Cosa,
Welchen
CHAPTER II.
OF ACCENT.
I shall in this chapter omit all said by the Author thai
exclusively bears on the French Language , except such
observations as appear better calculated to illustrate the
subject to an English Reader, than any illustration drawn-
from his own language.
i . The Accent of the Greeks is an elevation of voice ,
communicated to one of the syllables of a word , so that
that syllable , striking the ear in a more sensible and
emphatic manner , appears to predominate over the rest.
Thus , the peculiar office of Accent is to regulate the mo*
dulation and cadence of pronunciation. It affects only th^
Ultimate, Penultimate, and Antepenultimate syllables.
2. The Modern Greeks write with the Accent: All Books
are printed with it: It is not, however, as far as the Greek
is concerned,, necessary-. He , when he first learns a word,
learns with it, its accent; and there is no Native, who would
not read his language with an equally exact pronunciation ?
whether the book were accented or not. The custom of
marking, with. a peculiar sign, the point of elevation of tha
voice was introduced by ancient Grammarians, to enable
them to teach the Language to Foreigners, (i)
3. Three signs are in use to indicate the accent or eleva*
tion of the voice on a syllable , the acute ('), the grave (*)^
and the circumflex ("). The acute and the grave have always
been equivalents , though they have affected different parts
of a word: but it is highly probable , that the circumflex
originally served to indicate a different elevation of voice
(i) Just as we see in the Italian Translation of the Peruvian Ici>
ters, for the use of persons learning that language, though by Ita*
lians themselves marks of accent are £mt rarely use&
5
from that signified by the other two, since it was pecuharly
applied to the long vowels. This alone sufficiently shews ,
that it was the sign of a different inflection of Voice from
that indicated bv the acute or crave accent , which wer@
indifferently applied to the long or short Vowels. This dis-
tinction in cadence , or inflexion of Voice, whatever it might
have been, has been lost, together, with the precise charac-
ter of quantity. The modern Greeks pronounce all the ac-
cents in the same manner , and pay no attention to what
we call quantity.
4- The acute accent may be applied indifferently to the
three last syllables , the circumflex to the two last, but the
grave to the last only.
6. When the Acute Accent is on the last syllable , th©-
word is called O^utovov , when on the penult iuapo£tfrovov y
when on the Antepenult T^oo-apoJuTovov , A Word, with the*
circumflex on the last syllable, is called ireptctrw^svov, on the-
penult, TCpo-TCspi<7rcw(/.£vov. Lastly a Word with the grave ac-
cent on the only syllable to which it is applicable, the last, is
called papuTovov. Every Word, not having the acute or cir-
cumflex on the last syllable , is considered to have the grave,
arid is gapuTovov. (1)
7. All Words , with the exception of some few monosyl-
lables , have an accent , because ail have one syllable parti-
cularly marked by emphasis , or an elevation of voice.
8. This accent undergoes a change of character and posi-
tion (2). In its movements, it sometimes passes from the ante-
penult to the penult , as 6 avOpcorro; the Man , too avOpwTrou ,
of the Man ; from the antepenult and the penult to the
(1) As these definitions will frequently occur, and could not be
expressed without continual periphrases , I shall adopt them in the
neuter , as epithets of the -word Mjud , and give them their regular
plurals, as established in our Language, in the instance of Pheno-
menon, Phenomena.
(a To avoid confusion I shall confine the word change to change
'. ;hara«tei" ; and adopt the word movement far change of position.
6
final ; as otl jxcMr^nai , the pupils , ray fjLGthTftQv , of the
pupils ; olj ywoum, the Women, iw ywxixw. It changes its
form, when the acute is substituted for the circumflex; as
Kr/Aolfpt fate, t;k (toilets of fate, or the circumflex for the
acute; as h {afrit. % the simpleton, rol {ocfiou, of the simpleton ;
and the grave for the acute, in the course of a phrase ; as
h.{a£oQ avfy(a<aroQ , the silly man.
The whole Theory of accent in the ancient Language was
grounded on quantity. This determined its nature , and
regulated its changes and movements. Quantity having no
existence in the modern Language , accent is now almost
independent ; and thence is subject to much less move-
ment, but it is very far from being, as the Author states,
« nearly as fixed as in the Italian. » If so, there would have
been no need of his numerous special Rules, subjoined to his
several forms of Declension.
The rules for its movement, because it affects the pro-
nunciation , must , indispensably , be known ; but not those
for the change of form , from acute to circumflex ; as
o ^uaGnTwc, the pupil, rov (jLo&viTcv , of the pupil ; or from the
circumflex to the acute; as rb vw^a , the body, tgu a-J^xro^ of
the body. As this change of form in no way affects the pro-
nunciation , and is merely a mark or sign in orthography ,
it is almost useless that a person should know it, if his sole
object be the modern Language. We refer those , who wish
to be thoroughly informed ^on this subject , to the numerous
Grammars of the ancient Greek.
If a person's main object be to make himself understood
by Greeks , and to unjderstand them , I would advise him ,
at first, to attempt only what is indispensable , with respect
to accent; that is, to acquaint himself with what is called
the primitive accent of Words , and the more prevalent
changes of its position , without regarding its change of
character, from acute to circumflex , or the reverse. The
Greek understands what is written, as well without accent
as with : . all the accents affect pronunciation equally ; and
therefore in a Man's effort to acquire a copia verboram for
oral intercourse , it is onlv necessary, as to all inflexions 4 -
by habit, and an attention to the more common principles ?
to learn where a word is to be accented , without caring how.
When the copia Verhorwn is once acquired , the .mystery
will, almost without an effort , gradually unfold itself. Exam-
ples and Exceptions will then readily present themselves ;
and a difficulty which , unseasonably encountered , has
excited disgust , and deterred numbers from prosecuting the
study of the Language , will be insensibly stript of all its
forbidding character.
Mons. r David's Detail of the variations of accent accom-
panies the several forms of Declension, given in the regular
course of the grammar , which are the forms used in most
Modern Greek Books of any reputation. Reference is made
to the appendix , in every instance where the Vulgar de-
cline such Words , or class of Words , in any way differ-
ently: that difference is there pointed out; and at the same
time the liberties taken by the Vulgar , with respect to ac-
cent , are noticed. I trust this Mode will enable a person
utterly unacquainted with the Language to commence his
study with ease , and to avail himself of the different for-
mulae, according to his progress. TSo one can have a tole-
rably correct idea of the Modern forms of declension ,
without an opportunity of comparing them with their proto-
types. It indeed would be altogether impossible y without a
reference , to class them at all ; but the variations being ,
in some instances , considerable , they ought to be kept
distinct, that a person may, at pleasure, apply his attention
undividedly to his more immediate object. Instead of the
Author's Special Rules for almost every form of each de-
clension, which are exceedingly perplexing, and difficult to
bear in mind, I have attempted to reduce the Rules to
a small number, applicable generally, and resting on the
leading principles of the Theory of Quantity ; though for
common purposes they do not require a knowledge of it.
I will not venture to say that they will admit of no exceptions:
but I think they will admit but of few.
8
These I have annexed to the Forms in the Appendix ;
hut I have not that degree of confidence in them , that will
allow me to substitute them for those of the Author ; of
which I have in the first part of the Treatise given the?
substance , though with an attempt at greater perspicuity.
Any set of Rules not embracing the whole Theory of
quantity, as it affects accent, and not noticing its many
exceptions, can he but an approximation towards precision ;
hut where the difficulties in the way of infallibility are so
great , I am persuaded approximations will , by all but
pedants, be indulgently received. To them neither the lan-
guage of which we treat can, in its present slate, be a wor-
thy object of criticism ; nor can any work, making an
humble attempt to assist those in acquiring it, who aim not
at scholastic fame.
For the due placing of the accent in pronunciation, two
points must be ascertained , the primitive accent , and its
movements, or change of position. That is termed the primi-
tive accent, which belongs to a word in its primitive state, or
before it undergoes any grammatical change from de-
clension , conjugation , juxtaposition etc. ft is on the
nominative singular of nouns , and in verbs, on the
first person singular of the present tense indicative. The
primitive accent being once ascertained, its movements ,
and even its changes of form are easily determined. We will
endeavour to indicate both , particularly its movements , in
the course of our observations on the Declensions and
'Conjugations : hut , as to the primitive accent , use alone
can teach it. That of Verbs is easy : it is sufficient to know,
whether they be Barytona, or Perispomena; but that of
Kouns and indeclinable words is more varied and difficulty
Ear, and a quickness of observation can alone secure precis
sion in this particular (x)»
(i) At least unless a man ehoose to burthen his Memory with all
the Rules of Prosody , and the very numerous exceptions to theui.
9
Another important acquisition, on this head, is a know-
ledge of the v'uvi'Cwk , or fusion of Vowels. This species o£
contraction , whereby two or more vowels form but one
articulation , is much in use in Modern Greek. We have it
in English , and may thence form an accurate idea of it. It
corresponds with the union of io in tion, ia in tian, and the
fusion of the y with its following vowel in yellow, young, etc.
Thus, in Modern Greek, the Word sra/W children, consists
hut of two syllables in sound , though it has really three ,
id. being blended , as indicated by the acute accent on tha
final vowel. If it be wished that the two vowels should be
separately sounded , the acute accent must be placed on
the / , and the word be written as in ancient Greek, craiS/a.
This termination must otherwise be pronounced, as an
Englishman would pronounce ia in Justinian, as though
it were written Jus-tin-yan, where there are evidently only
three syllables in sound.
This fusion of Vowels sometimes occurs in the middle
of Words ; and then the accent appears to be placed a
syllable farther back than it really is; thus, in eV/«to<ra, /
have perceived, it may seem that the fourth syllable from the
end of the Word is accented; but that fourth in appearance
is but the third, or antepenult in sound ; since the syllables
01 and u are blended in the pronunciation: vvmfiewt, azoriuxat,
it is cloudy , it is gloomy , are pronounced in the same
manner.
A v before the wyi'Qvis is sounded as gn in french and Ita-
lian, in ognon, degno, pronounced in English, otvn-yong,
den-yo-, thus jwctaca should be pronounced, as though it were
written, en-yo-sa, ^'^J.,en-yd , just as mignojiette , though
the combination of letters is quite foreign , is pronounced
by every working gardener, as if written min-yo-net.
of enclitics.
All Words have an accent, but some few monosyllables
and dissyllables , which , in pronunciation , unite with the
10
preceding word , and seem to form but one with it , lost?
their accent , or rather transfer it to the word with
which they are united. They are called enclitics from iyKhho^xi
to incline ; because they incline towards , or , as it' were ,
rest upon the preceding word. Thus you , of me, bears the
circumflex accent ; but in the phrase b <piko( /uov , my friend,
it becomes enclitic , and is closely blended in pronunciation
with the word p'wc ; and for that reason loses its circumflex
accent.
It may be well to observe, as it regards orthography, that
when the enclitic follows a proparoxytonon, or a properispo-
menon , it passes its accent to the final syllable of its antece-
dent, which then has two accents , its own, and that of the
enclitic; as b clv^uvrbsycv, my Man; rb luwbv you, my supper, (i)
When it follows a paroxytonon , or perispomenon , the
enclitic loses its accent, without affecting its antecedent, as
h$ixoQ yov, my friend, rev ixcahov pov % of my Child.
If it follow an oxytonon , the acute accent is retained ,
even in those situations in a phrase, where the general rule
would demand the grave.
The circumflex of the enclitic, wherever an additional
accent is given to the antecedent^ is changed for the acute,
as in the example, b etyfywerbe pou.
The principal Enclitics are the monosyllabic oblique cases
of personal pronouns you y.l (jlol; <jou crs udg tgu tvq tgv tjJc to
TQV TOV? TOLiq T r i„
(i) Our Language abounds with these enclitics in pronunciation ;
and they are among the most perplexing difficulties with which Fo-
reigners , in conversing, have to contend; because they have no in-
dication of them in prose Writings. Thus the verbs to be , and to
have, often lose their accent ; and are so blended with the preceding
pronoun, as to form with it a monosyllable; I've, you've, they've
been, he's, she's, they're gone: the auxiliary will undergoes still
greater mutilation , and merges into its subject ; I'll , you'll , they'll
attend. The pronoun sometimes resigns its distinction ; as in 'tis ,
; twas.
T I
The pronoun rk, as in on whatever; the adverbs uov y >&qtI
js-at, where, never, how, etc. as, m wort) xa «r«{yxa gtov.
These are not however always enclitics : Thus the pronoun
*?s\j and the adverbs 'nroZ wort are not so when used interroga-
tively: hxTi, why ? OT07e When ? crcrt, ©-ore, never , never ,
negatively.
The oblique cases of personal pronouns are not enclitics,
when they precede the verb on which they depend , as
fj.l Ae'yt/, he tells me ijjxq j%k* he deceives us , see the Syntax.
Besides these ordinary enclitics , some verbs beginning
with a vowel, or diphthong, which lose it by elision , become
enclitics , and are completely blended with the preceding
Word; as poU to 'Swxe , he gave it me, instead of y.ov to 'Hem,
7ov to Va, instead of tou to e;Va, I told it him.
CHAPTER III.
Or THE DIFFERENT SIGNS USED IN WRITING.
OF THE ASPIRATE.
The aspirate is placed over vowels, whenever they com-
mence a word, and is of two sorts termed the soft and the
rough aspirate. It formerly marked the degree of aspiration,
or breathing communicated to those vowels. The soft a
slighter, and the rough a stronger breathing. Among the
consonants the % alone is aspirated , or rather is marked
with the sign. It has always the rough aspirate at the
beginning of a word ; and when two ^ follow in the middle
of a word , the first has the soft , and the second the
rough aspirate , as in tj>j>o>co hail , in the sense of salutation.
It is probable that there was a sensible difference in the
pronunciation of these two aspirates by the Ancients,
The rough being a strong breathing, the consonants termed
slender , whenever followed by it , were changed into their
aspirated cognates , whether in separate words, or in com-
pound terms , as *a8' yi ( ucU , instead of kit ;f««c , or k'olQokov],
generally, from wt% and hoy. This Aspirate has been com-
IS
pared to tliat produced by the German h , in hok, hauen ;
but this idea is rather ingenious than exact ; for we do not
see that the German h affects the Words^ with which \Z
comes in contact, as the rough aspirate ; or that it produces
the same changes. Whatever may be conjectured , it is
certain that its peculiar properties no longer exist in the
modern language. All vowels are pronounced in the same
manner, and without any breathing or aspirate, whether
marked by the one or the other sign : It's only use in the
Modern Greek is to indicate when the above elision may
take place.
Of THE IOTA. UBTDERWRITTEIV.
It indicates the elision of an / after the vowels, under
which it is written. It is commonly the last of the second
and third persons singular of the Tenses of the subjunctive
.Mood in a , yf#f>ffi 7f a 'p?t 7f*p6«$, 7? ai P^'
OF THE APOSTROPHE.
The apostrophe in Greek, as in French , denotes the
elision of a vowel, or diphthong , whether at the end of
words, as to <tto k u duwac thwt 9 he forthwith opened his mouth,
instead of to ar'apa. ; fJv*oKo x$ VT ' 0C > it * 5 entirely of gold, in-
stead of that, or at the beginning; as , rev ro 'v?a^ instead of
iTvrxj V rnv i&bhiv 9 instead of uc rw vroKn> To Constantinople.
OF PrJWCTUxVTIOIS r .
A point (. ) placed as in English, indicates the completion:
of the sense.
When placed parallel with the upper, instead of the
lower part of the letters, it is equivalent to a colon.
The comma ( , ) is of the same value as in English.
The combination forming our semicolon ( ; ) is used as a
sign of Interrogation.
Some Editors make use of the Note of Exclamation I
CHAPTER IV.
. OF WORDS*
Tiie Modern follows the Ancient Greek, in acknowledging
iiine sorts of Words , called parts of Speech , Viz. The
Substantive , Adjective, Article, Pronoun, Verb, Participle,
Preposition, Adverb, Conjunction.
The Interjection is classed with adverbs.
OF NUMBERS.
There are two Numbers..: The Singular and Plural.
OF GENDERS.
There are three Genders : The Masculine 9 Feminine f
and Neuter.
OF CASES.
There are four Cases : The Nominative , Genitive , Ac-
cusative , and Vocative. Of these four , the Nominative,
Accusative, and Vocative are always alike in Neuters, as in
Latin.
CHAPTER V.
There are in Modern Greek, according to Mons. r David's
classification, three Declensions: the i.» { Comprising Nouns
in Btci«f ,«,«: the 2. d Nouns in h\ and cv , and also those
m i , and o 1 mostly from ancient Diminutives in toy : and the
9, All the varieties that do not fall under the forms given
in the first two, in the following succession : it can hardly be
called order.
NS. GS. N.PL
1
TifWT
ac
U
%Q
2
Ayovptd
oc
CL$
%
3
Tifdyju
OL
olto;
<XT<X.
4
■Vol?
%C
a
eilic
5
Xar?
VS
V
tli^
6
M«ycv\
Q*
fl»f
wit?
ftS. GS. Nil
7 &f(n ( u ov cljcq ara
8 TIa. cc tyc n
9 Fj-wcr i$ vc tg
10 A^ikh ia; ice €z
J 2 Evvifi is ovi; lis
15 tWc ( vol? vov J yets
The classification of Greek Nouns has ever been, and
still remains, among Grammarians, disputed ground. Whe-
ther ay hat is here attempted will be thought to furnish
more precise lines of distinction, than the distribution of
the Author, must be left to the Public to determine.
I shall venture to divide all regular Nouns between 3
Declensions Iso-syllabic,and i Declensions Imparisyllabic;
and shall , after the regular forms , give as Heteroclites i
the few that will not conform to this arrangement.
Before we proceed to examples of these, we will decline
the Article. As it very commonly accompanies Nouns , it-
is necessary to know the Declension of the one , before
we attempt that of the other: It has three Genders.
DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE.
Masculine b as b yikiqq the Sun
Feminine n n Qdhzvara. the Sea
Neuter. to to (phvozrocoy the Autumn.
SINGULAR. "
Masculine. Feminine Neuter,
Nominative b jj rb
Genitive tqv t"y\z tov
Accusative rh T«fV r»
I J
PLURAL.
Nominative
d
cd or
< CO
TX
Genitive
loiv
t2v
TUV
Accusative
rove
rdc
rot
CHAPTER VI.
FIRST DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC.
This Declension comprises nouns Masculine in at gen a>
and m 7 gen n , and Feminities in a , gen «c and *c and in 57,
gen W (2). .
V N.
Acaf
1 flCf
Avav
1
at or ou?
G.
(3)
— .
a <9r ou
— .
ZZ
av
A.
— .
• — ■ car
— .
. — '
a; or aic
V.
- — .
~
p
Oil 01' 0H£
K*
M«9
JJT tfC
Ma9
V,T
vl'i or Ait
G.
, —
— ■ n or cv
—
,
0V
A.
—_
■ V\ V
—
.
cic or out
V.
,
— n
1
0— _
ai or out
(1) For tlie peculiarities of the Language , as it is spoken vulgarly,
and written in books designed for the Vulgar , see the Appendix ,
where all the forms here given , with the terminations used by the.
greater part of Writers of reputation, are repeated , with all the ir-
regularities of accent and termination , in use among the vulgar.
(2) I am aware that some would form 1 Declensions of the forms
that are here given as one, but, except with respect to the Genitive
Singular the Analogies in Orthography and accent are so great,
that the subdivision would answer no good purpose.
(3) Instead of repeating the whole Word , I have preferred giving,
in the oblique cases, the Termination ? or variable part only, substi-
tuting, for the rest, lines. Of two lines, when the first is accented, it
answers to the Antepenult, when the second to the Penult. The double
lines 5 without accent, shew where the accent is sometimes thrown hy
the Vulgar. The French circumflex is more conspicuous over lines
r6
V
N.
Mo us
«
'
Mws"
#*
or a/c (s)
G.
— '
Hff
or
as
—
KW
A.
A
a»'
t
«c
or ait
y.
A
s
r~— ;*
a/
OT' CLIQ
P
G.
T; y a
1 *«
i *-*
a/
Or oug
A.
m
-
ac
or ''cut.
V,
— ,
n
I -
«/
OT ai£
DECLINE LIKE,
tivQoiybfdie
KWTtlG
Xn{<*.
hti.Wft
AfcftwW
tevt'/rwc
<piktx
rv'^n
JIOLVUOLVIOLQ
ILKiZSTYlQ
yuyta
tK'Jrn
Aiviiocc
KThrnc
KQKCLKlia,
tO^il
than the Greek, and , therefore, in such situations, has been pre*
ferred. This Mode as it appears to me , presents the Termination ,
and the situation of the Accent most prominently to the eye ; and ?
if it do, must greatly assist Memory. The supply of the deficient part
of the Word, though immediately above , requires a certain degree
of attention , which , in young Scholars , it is , however important,
extremely difficult to fix,
(i) Some Authors write e * instead of &$, that they may not seem to
■violate the principles of accentuation , for whenever the Nominative
and Vocative plural are written 4t$ , instead of ai, the accent ought to
be the same as in the Accusative plural.
Nouns ending in $&, Qa, pa, and in a pure (that is where a of itself
forms a distinct Syllable ) terminate the genitive singular in ag ; as
$ ittApot., the day, ttj; %sp«s, of the day, i cpiXia, friendship, rifc ^tXt'a?- A-U
others form the genitive in y,s , as >j pouax , rr,; jjeouav^j vi£o£a, rfc £a£v)?-
The termination kj ijs , however x very general 7 among the Vulgar.
... t . 17
All Genitives plural in this Declension are eircum flexed,
except of adjectives, whose Masculine and Neuter, of the
2.4 Declension , are proparoxytona , ( see ay^c a'yf/« ay?' " J
and of feminine substantives , derived from Masculine
paroxytona in oc; as lev hoc , hvhn , hvhuv,
Paroxvtona as Ak^/sc, and properispomena , as uova-x , m-
ver move the accent , except in the genitive plural , ac-
cording to the above rule.
Oxytona, as ny.v, never move their accent; but , in the
genitive singular and plural , substitute the circumflex for
the acute.
Properispomena as //ovcra, acute the genitive singular, and
accusative plural.
Proparoxytona, in the same cases, advance the accent, to
the penult J as 8aAae-<7«. , QxKcLvGYis , 9aAaV(T2?.
CHAPTER VII.
TI119 Declension comprises all Nouns isosyllabic, whether
substantives or adjectives , whose geniiive singular termi-
nates in cv , from a nominative in »g , or ov , , or /.
G.
av
Qou-& q; I «f
-
6)K
7ra^>
61? oc
t
O'J
-crap viy ot
A.
V
Qt |
'
©w
—
. y
V,
>t
g i 'J
i=
0;
—
t
fc
' 01
s
P
N.
ITfoar««r
OK
n f
$<rousf •
a
G.
<
ow
— '
CdV
A.
— ' —
OK
'
—
a
V,
— ' ~_
OK
»— '
— ;
9t
-
s
P
N.
Ao)/\0'Era/o
Aawo'STtf/d
a
G.
A.
— — .***.
tou
—
*■*■
tiav
a.
V.
— ' —
e
■ —
m
*ff
S
p
K.
fcoS *
|
<W& tit
a
A,
•* *
/
— ' ■ ■ I
5 ''
1
•
»
tx
1
r
N.
K
hill i
Km/S id
G.
icy
- — - twv
A.
/
*- — \%
. v.
— ;
•■ ix-
SINGULAR*
M
F
N'
N.
5o?
c£
2
e;p
i * 2af
G.
— -
cv
fc
—
A.
—
if
^ '"•
—
^
—
i i
*S
■ —
Plural,
M
F
N-
5o<p
0/
2o.p
at
or cut-
Sap
G.
—
w>
-^
toy
— .
A.
—
owe
—
ct$
or WZ
—
V.
—
0/
—
<
XI
or ah
— •
or
'op
N
DECLINE LIKE.
kvtifW&'QQ
^OOr^TTQY
<pao/
(JO^r
__ .
*
-r~~. .._.
. —
any at
uluhoi
pzQli. ■ -
v^riKOf
ayythoe
h'J-^avov'
9/6*
TVft
TQKIA.YIPGQ
e'ecbihfet
a\?ci$i!}T3V-
•Xi/vasra/^/
Xifl
QzV{ua<r7o$
iwiKoyoc
tpQivi'oruPQy -
CKIZ61
Xotfrf
7WA.Q$
Gi'oy.a^cg
ffvuzrwtQr - ■■
v.yAh
ci^yi- -
■oma^C
h
SINGULAR.
M
F
N.
N.
iyft oc
t= yjr *
ayf^ w
G.
i
jr: — ' ae
ES ■ — ' ou
A.
^J! — — ci
52 — ' ay
M
V.
_■--.
£2 — «
PLURAL.
*»
N.
cty^ c/
t= yfi cu or cut;
' fyfi ^ a
G.
E2 — ~ wr
zz ■ — ' uv
cr — ' «r
A.
pr — ' qjc
^ — ' ac Ora/f
//
V.
u
jrs — ' oli or cliq
N
Adjectives of three terminations are, for obvious reasons,
here declined throughout ; though the feminine form be-
longs to the first declension , and, m writings of Reputation,
regulates its accent accordingly ; but they are very com-
monly accented throughout, m all Genders, on the antepe-
nult , as indicated by the double lines.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
M. and F.
N.
N. s»-$c£ oc
UOOZ, OV
G, — ■ — ov
— — ' ' OV
A. — " — cv
)l
V. ^ - i
)1
M. and F.
iv\o£ 01
— - — ur
— • mq
V
N.
<M
a
DECLINE LIKE.
G KGtt U
J \v%ot
e$ec
e rta; »f x«tc/hoc
o xa/ n GTfbyows
KCX.I Yl KfynfMQfAQC
9 KXl V
vvhyot
3WS
Proparoxytona move the accent from the antepenult i& ■
the penult ? in ihe genitive singular and plural , and in
the accusative plural of Masculines and Feminities : see
atdfOTree.. For the Vulgar exceptions to this Rule , see ihe
appendix. *
Paroxyton'a neither move nor change their accent : sec
Qxytpna never move their accent; hut substitute the
circumflex for the acute in the genitive of bolh numbers;
See (refocj KUslf.
Properispomena never move their accent ; but substi*
tute the- acute for the circumflex ", in the genitive of
both Numbers; .and in the accusative plural of Masculines
and Feminines.
As the first of the above rules, with respect to Proparox-
ytona , is the only one that affects the pronunciation cf
Nouns , beginners need attend to that only,
CHAPTER VIII.
The Third Declension Isosyllabie comprises Nouns
Masculine and Feminine in u , gen: ovt ; as b xou i ivhaSii,
gen: <suc ; and Nouns Neuter in n and os ; as, to $'S\szf£c ,
t« tu%-oc ? gen: owe
G.
A.
V.
■>h
t
IVKC(;3
t"f
TO
VJh
££
iVKCtC
«>
tf
cv;
m
cvC
OK
n
us
k
w
ff
Uf
k
w
N.
■rv?x oq
T£/ '/C
V.
G.
>
f
QY
-A.
— Cf
V
V.
Cf
. '
H
SL
9 ay cJ
OVf x
CD
s. I
m
StXfifE LIKE.
tvKctfrnt
•t&Xft
paydd
waiGii
&rx§o;
yayovAb-J
ivy trite
Tikes
7T#oapoy
apKU&ni
X iTh0 *
yii^ea
tvzrpvntc
'pyoj
k fJjK<ovB§
tVTthVS
(/iao$
KKilbcLPOV
The singular of <pxy- cu, a female glutton , is given under
this declension; but its plural is found irregularly declin-
ed, like that of the masculine y*y*< 4 by adding Se and
Ivy to the Vocative singular : see the Declensioir-df Hete*
roclitcs.
%VKot€u{
Oxytona , as iy«jSife , declined after this form , never
move the accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the
acute in the genitive and accusative singular , and in all
the cases plural.
Paroxytona, as.9?moW, never move nor change the accent,
except in the genitive plural , which is circu indexed.
Proparcxytona Neuter , declined after euVa£eV , as
koxU%c , from the Masculine paroxytonon Kamfof , never
change the accent, except in the genitive plural , whose
final is circumflexed ; but they advance the accent to the
penult m the genitive singular, and in the N, A , and V
plural.
Properispomena , declined as the above , never move the
accent, but in the genitive plural , whose final is circum-
flexed : they substitute the acute for the circumflex , in
the Gen: Singular, and in the N , A, and V. Plural.
Paroxytona, as %iko<; , never move nor change the accent,
but id the G. Plural , which has the final circumflexed.
sa
CHAPTER IX
I. st DECLENSION, IMPARISYLLABIC.
This Declension comprises all nouas increasing , and
forming their genitive case in 01 , except those in toe , which
fall under the 2. d Declension Imparisyllabic , and some few
in \jh , classed among the Heteroclites.
EXAMPLES.
SING=
N. y«f> or
Gr. •— ' OVT Cf
V. yif o»
SING.
G. •— • of o?
A. — — *
PLUR.
PLUR.
-— ' QV
— — ' at
r *— -' i C
SING..
PLUR.
»;
ere ay, a a
GTfCLy/A
ar
«
G.
■ ' CLT G{
'
t
6)/
A.
- — a
.»
— »
a
V.
a
t
—
&
N.
<po
fW
a
G.
. —
' — '
ar ot
A.
' — '
— -
a
V.
1
•— .
a
<p0 fifl
V.T 6f,
— • af
— a
©rxLiNE jl 1 i;r~
ytfOY Tfyyav 'zs-fdyuoi (p-c(-i.uz
ihifClC
jtpyiTsxr«jf
X?o>ux
et'srayiVjAGt
ytyotc
ytv ( u%
jwaBu^a
a^.KZJiy%
fit**
ffTiftotfiSL
XciyvyZ
isriTeuot
f&ifi'tpfxyux-
$v\x%
XV jM*
~<5ra.whv/.i%
ACCENTUATION.
The interrogative t/V is acuted throughout on the sanid
syllable ; t/c r/w* r*we §*c The indefinite ri§ advances the
accent to the increment, in all the increasing cases; and, in
the genitive plural , substitutes the circumflex for the acut&.
Monosyllabic substantives advance the accent to the incre-
ment , in the genitive case singular and plural : as %&$ *
X u fa ■* X i7 ? : * » X iT f l c > X u ?® y ' X"?** * X i7 ^^ except Tf«V,
f»ac , ©-a?c and las , which advance it only in the genitive
singular.
Oxytona , except in the above instances , neper move flie
accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the acute , when
the increment is short , preceded by a long Vowel ; as
The exceptions as to the Vocative singular , considering
its rare occurrence , would lead to useless prolixity ; see
page 8 line 6.
Paroxytona never change the accent ; nor ever move it ,
except in the genitive plural , where it is advanced a sylla-
ble : see y^w.
Proparoxytona never change the accent; but , in all the
increasing cases, advance it; because the language does not
admit of the retraction of the accent beyond the antepenult.
In the genitive plural , tlie accent advances two syllables :
see o'opiy.z.
Properispomena never move the accent , except in the
2 4
genitive plural, Vhere thgjr advance it a syllable .* they sti>-
stitute the acute for the circumflex in all the increasing
cases j see w^y^a.,
CHAPTER X.
DECLENSION IMPARISYLLABIC,
This Declension comprises all nouns increasing , and
forming their gemtrve singular ia.eo;, or *&>c.
EXAMPLES.
SINGULAR. PLURAL
N. QcL VIK IUS £x CtK $£
G. — —
A. — —
lUC
v. — —
VJ
€ CSV
t GL$ Or^CKTlUlQ
tit
N.
£a9
vt
G.
«^.
i
A.
_
vy
V.
«
N.
$4
V
Cr.
- —
£
A\
-*,
V
V.
, —
0t
OQ
Caff
(!>!&
€
tic
ill
av
a
a.
G.
'Gf
i
!Y
i or
&c
it
US
i.
UK
a;
p
NU
yt&ir
fC
yvw
Of
G.
~J
t
&t
to
I
ay
A.
~- 7
>p
i
ui
V.
^
t or k '
ttc
S
p
N.
<rvy
Xj3/<r
*;
r-HI
xph
us
G.
—
— '
£ Ci(
.-,
t
€ tff
A.
»
—
IV
L,'
cic
V.
Y
— *
t or i;
r
i/f
DECLINE LIKE,
j&3uriKti>c
/S«0vc
£a 0J yy&c/C Sf
vfifK
vvyn^uTK
&vyyfct$tvt
£afi/C
C«fl} XOLVifif
Vificrrctffts
$ah.y$tvc
-srxaruc
Wkairv x^ac/f
Xip. wvic
WfCJttifav
f
fy*xve
Cpa^J «&C
VU$cL%MK
tefafiuc
yhVKV(
yhvxv QcrK
til wk
\t37ll\JZ
tftpvt
epijUb "ZS-iortg
*$K
ACCENTUA
TION.
Oxytona of this declension never move the accent ,
that is , it is always on the same syllable as in the nomi-
native. In the plural isosyllabic cases , the circumflex is
substitued for the acute; see £a?u'c; as also in the Vocative
singular , when the nominative ends in tu'c : see jSswimuV.
Paroxytona neither move, nor change , the accent : sec
Proparoxytona never change the accent ; but in the ge-
nitive singular , and in all the cases plural , advance it a
syllable : see fdyKfuriz,
Properispomena never move the accent , but substitute
*6
the acute for the circumflex, in the genitive singular, and
in all the cases plural: see ymne.
CHAPTER XL
OF HETEROCLITES.
i. st We will notice those that are declined like nouns
of the i. st declension Isosyllabic in the singular , and in-
crease, in the plural; as %trijif a Pilgrim, <$xyZ<; , a glut*
ton o us Mem.
S P
G.
A*
fay
*e
a
civ
a
<pxy
out
W or t
he or txtc
lie or %clo;
Nouns in rie of the first declension , accented on the
final, are very generally declined like <pcty&& ; as m^me
S P
N.
G,
A.
V.
x *ri
ne
a
x«*l
Jtf Or lot is
tar/
he or Ixtc
he or hue
a. dly Those in ou , aye , declined , in the singular, like
Neuters of the 3. d Declension Isoyllabic. They are the fe-
'murines of nouns of the same nature as qayoie i expressive
of some kind of excess , or indicating some trade or cal-
ling ; as <pxyov , a gluttonous Woman ; wtiapv , a Woman
having a large foot.
N,
G.
A.
V.
m
cv
ev
9*7
a 7
fe
or lx%
o&)V
u
or W
hi
or lev;
Some few Proper Names of Women are declined as follows:
N.
G.
A.
V.
n
6)
Al«r*r«
A-Vcrac
At'csra
3. dly Nouns borrowed from Foreign Languages , which
very slightly differ from the foregoing , such as y.xtpyk -,
coffee , or a cup of coffee , *z$$pk , a coffee-house.
N.
G-
A.
V.
e Jfotfip
See or Sotic
$s< or las;
DECLINE LIKE,
fay 'I?
MVKUVXC
fxyov
XKlllxfOV
jUVKWOV
y.zyovKcj
folk
Nouns declined like the above 72€^r 7/20^ their accent,
and are generally acuted throughout the plural , contrary
to general principles as; fdftne: pi p^»W , /**«$«&
o3
S P
«reX
ou?
a-TTA
tit
ou
~-^
<3V
oDv
- —
o&g
oG
=—*
ot
N.
G.
A.
V.
The Vulgar use avm •> It^h , fyc. , and decline them
jeguiarly, like ^96? : vou c , the plural of which is very little
in use among the Vulgar, is declined as the above. Writers
decline the plural as the ancients , to ■ u - uv - ac, - u , and
sometimes use the resolved form of the genitive .singular ,
w
Of
5. tUy Nouns of the 1 . st Declension Imparisyllabic in w
gen: utoq will bs sometimes found declined in the singular
as Nouns of the i. st Declension Isosyllabic, with the excep-
tion of the genitive, which always ends in oq : thus $%fiifi-
rnroi from faiGoLfbiw. The plural is always regular.
G.
•f #p(3apo ryjT
0:
A.
-p —
a
V.
, — / ~—
a
Nouns of the above class are also sometimes thus declined
in the singular £ap£afor «•, wf . «« ..,'«
Some Nouns Imparisyllabic in « , mostly proper Names,
are declined in the genitive singular , and throughout the
plural after Nouns of the 1 * st Declension Imparisyllabic ;
While , in the Accusative and Vocative singular , they ana-
logize wibh Nouns of the a. d Declension Imparisyllabic-
S P
N.
n*>.
1$
O.
— '
t
A,
>
tv
y,
~J
K
So;
or 1
Ilap
etc
Hcuns in ys , ucc have the same Irregularities*
N.
ty?
u$
6.
. —
u
o;
A.
—
uv
V.
—
u or
u$
ly) \>
e$ or i/jiCf*
fc%
The following are irregular in the singular , hut have
the plural regularly formed , after the i. st Declension
Imparisyllabic.
4 ttcctt'p or t.olxI^ genitive watpoc or itarepx.
6 avnp or av§pa$ dcv£po< or avop<%
& 7:olu; ttoXXou accusative iroXuv
t, yuvfl or yuvawta yuvaowfe or yuvawca?
t, 6.uychnop or Ouyaripa Ooyarpo? or GuyaTspsu;
?i yaar/ip or yacnrepa
yacrpo? or
ya<jrspx^
CHAPTER XIL
OF AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
Nouns form Feminine Augmentatives in af* : as from tq
«roSotf/, the foot , >? croSa'pa ? f/je large f oo t , masculine Di-
minutives in &W which are for the most part proper
Karnes, or receive the addition from the speaker , to express
endearment or affection; as, from EuWa0^c> An/^r^c, are
formed b SraDgW * 5 Ajj^mrpaVqc ; ??y //£/& Eiistathius > my
little Demetrius. Many Neuter appellatives also have this
termination ; as t^ ^-ol^'Iki, the little infant ; to Tfoczri^lxi f
the little table ; to •wola^oLKi , the small foot , formed from
«■«&', rpajarfjf, igobdfi. Feminine diminutives end in <v£s£ &•
c-J\a ; as \J/yv/r^a fjioiifjny little soul, \\iviT{a pov , my little
Helen} from v'^X^ ^ rw i anc ^ SrawvAa pv, and ^tcw/t^cj /4*y ,
3b
my beloved or little Aitastasia , from 'hwrtmis. These di«
minutives are often applied to grown persons , as more
polite and affectionate than the proper Name , without
the addition.
There are also adjectives in ovr{tMt - w - cr , which come
under this denomination , and answer to the words in Ita-
lian ending in ino , etto ; as piKfovrfaoc , ti , ov , very small;
and in uccio as kolkovt{ikg; - * - ov , very pretty.
CHAPTER XIII.
OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.
i. We have, in the course of the declensions, referred
adjectives to three different forms: in oc , « , ov ; the second
vc , ux , v ; and the third in v\t , k All these form their
comparatives 8$ superlatives from the nominative singular
of the neuter in o , v , tc : thus , from the neuter of the
vulgar, ro <ro<pe, is formed the comparative <ro$QTt$oc. ff«?«r«f.tf#
ffo^Tepw, wiser, or more wise, and the superlative s-oparaToc , (i)
ffo<p«TarM, GoftiTSLTor wisest, or most wise. From £a8J, deep ,
the comparative /SaQuV^oc , jSaGure^jj , GMrtfov deeper , and
the superlative jSaS-Jrarof , Col^otjlth , fia.QvTa.Tov deepest; and
from euVt&V pious, the comparative iuaifr'-o-Ttpoc , wcifar^r, ,
iwi&ffTtfov , more pious , and the superlative iJartCwraiw ,
euo-e^s/rrar^ , iva&k<naTov , most pious.
2 . Some few Nouns in oc change this termination into knfoc,
t7Tifn , z<T7i?ov , for the comparative , and, iarotroc , ivTetrn ?
fFTUTov, for the superlative; as, a^j»eS"oc has ot^tthrifof &c ,
in the comparative, and ayjuwraros §'C. , in the superlative,
Comparatives and superlatives are , in the masculine and
neuter, declined after nouns of the first 8$ second declension
of the same terminations.
(i) Writers generally terminate and accentuate the feminine tlius.
3r
^~ 3. The accent is uniformly on the antepenult, as in eyfioc.
( See Cliapter 7, Page 19 ) Good Writers, however, ad-
vance the accent to the penult, in the feminine; and, in the
''masculine and neuter , follow the Rules for accentuating
proparoxytona in oc , ev , of the second declension.
4. Though the intonation, is precisely the same, it is, for
the sake of orthography , necessary to remark a difference
in the formation of comparatives and superlatives from po-
sitives in oc — When ^ is preceded hy a short syllable , the
comparative §• superlative are formed hy changing oc into
sm^oc 8$c, , as from Sytof , the / being short , are formed
•tyiursfoc, iyiaraTOf $;c. ; when preceded by a long syllable,
or by a a mute followed by a liquid , they are formed by
changing oc into ortffo , otxtoq 8$c. \ as from st/jtoc , w§irK*c are
formed XPiaTOTtfOC j ^lUTOTOLTOQ , &* iVOtSThOTifOt; 1 VJOZTkOTXTOey O^C.
.5. Ka>toc, bad, makes in the comparative x* l f 07l 1°s* X ll t' Q7i 1 n *
X il .f 07i ? cv t worse ; in the superlative xgxiar^, Ka'x/rrq, y.clx.vttqv $
worst', Kxxk , good , in the comparative nsjulrsfar, kclmti^
xxhnTifov , and JtaAA/oy. better ; in the superlative ulclkkijtgq
6= The superlative is generally used absolutely; as, £ <ro-
<pwraroc, generally means very (W, and not, the 7/?,a?£ ewe;
when the quality is expressed relatively, it is more common
to use the comparative, particularly among the Vulgar; as,
9&ttpaT*fos »wo rej; drijuzrovc ,■ the wisest of men.
CHAPTER XIV.
NOUKS OF NUMBER".
The five following Cardinal Numbers are 'declined,
MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER.
N. . v.; or Iv«5 it;« or p.i* ev or sva
G, Ivo; uia; svo$
A. evs . [jttaw or .*«** ev or hx
MASCULINE §
tfMlfttSrt,
N.
G,
A.
Tpi&v
?pet<;
three
0.
A.
'feo'capwv
four
TpUtSy
Tecaapav
With ' the compounds ^cjc«t f€k , Jexsjr(>'<* thirteen , ami
c{^«w^<{ , SsHargVffofja , declined like their simples.
The remaining Cardinal numbers* up to a hundred, are
indeclinable : they are.
twenty one
twenty two
twenty three
twenty four
twenty five
twenty six
twenty seven
twenty eight
twenty nine
thirty
forty
fifty
di>0
swta or i<pTa
&&r£ or 6*/t&>
evvea or svvei
£voYx«
SeJcarsvre
S£XOSTCt3s
Ssxasvvsa
etxoci
two
five
six
seven
eight
nine
ten
eleven
twelve
fifteen
sixteen
seventeen
eighteen
nineteen
twenty
eucociouo
eixoat Tpe~; Tpux
EiXOCt TS<7<70£pe<; T£Stf£p&
£l$COGfc 1w6VT£
fitttoati^
SWMNJtOXTcS
ewcoGievveoe
TpLavTa
cocpavra
spS , o[/.iivTa
dyoV/jvTa oydwvTtf
evvevvivTtt
exaroM
sixty
seventy
eighty
ninety
one hundred
(i) ^u is used before words begfrmmg with a-consonan.t ^ xai*&<.
The hundreds beyond the first are declined.
MASCULINE. FEMININE NEUTER.
•33
oiaxociQi
^ia%ociai$
diaxoGia
20(3
TplOTOCOCTiOt
TQtaxoataii
TptOBCOGia
3oo
*P£TpaXQGUDl
TeTpaxocriais
T£Tpa/.OGWC
4oo
xavraxociot
wsvTay-ociat?
ftevTaxoaux
5oo
§£«XOGtOt
^oocoGifcis
i^oacoaia
600
STvTaZOCTiOt
IttTajtoGiais
£j7Ta/COGl«
J/OO
oV.Tcr/.oGiot
6]CTaxQaiai(
oxiraxoGia
800
ivvsa*/.QCi©6
ivvsaxoGiaic
£vVEfl&Q$ltt
900
ypaoi
X^* l «
3£iAia
1000
The following are the Ordinal Numbers, in the nomi-
native of each gender.
MASCULINE.
FEMININE*
NEUTER.
77 p COCO £
TTpWTT)
Tup WTO V
first
fejTepos
SsUTEpOC
^euTepov
second*
TplTO$
¥pM
tpiTQV
third
T£TSCpTO;
T£TapT7i
TSTapTOV
fourth
77 £ [A7C TO?
ipejMETI]
7T£[/-t:tov
fifth
sztos
IZTV]
exTov
sixth
&|3oOfJLO£
^Q^O'7.71
tj^OOJAQV
seventh
oyooo;
OV^pT]
oySoov
eighth
Ivvarog
SWdCTT)
svvaTov
ninth
b(y.c/.Toq
o^ar/)
oe/.aTOv
tenth
svfeaTo;
evo*sxaT7fr
evdrz-aTov
eleventl
S(t)^£X,y.TO?
SfciSejcaTY)
J(i)^£X.aTOV
twelfth
£e-/.aTo; TpiTo; i&atin Tpir/i ^arov Tpfcov thirteenth
ctacaTo; TeTapT05&xat7iT6Tdcp'ni Sexa-rov TSTaprov fourteenth
Bixcntx; tcejatcto? 8fC. up to
bucoffTo$ l^tocrr^ eutocTov twentieth
eixogtos TTctoTO? sijcogtyj TrptoT^ etxocTovTcpwTov one ^ twentieth
TpiaaooTo; Tota^oGT^ Tpiax.ooTov thirtieth
f cGGKC.aXGGTOC TEGGapajCGGTfl
■£GGfi£pa34QGTQV
fortieth
%
l£2VTYlJtOGTO£'
ti
6v
5V h
Icy]>'»og?o;
V)
ov
6o. th
spoop/ixocTos
V)
ov
th
70.
Oy^OViJCOGTO?
\
ov
8g*
£VV£V7iX.0GT05'
VI
ov
ih
9°-
sx,c;tocto$
i
GV
th
100.
StaxociocTo?
4
ov
200/*
TptaXOClOCTO^
T£TpaXO<7lOCT05
ov
ov
3oe.°*
4oo. th
-ftSVTay.0GL0GfO$
7)
ov
5oo: h
s$axoGio<JTO<;
V]
ov-
600.*
etc.
&tt\
ete.
CHAPTER XV,
OF PRONOUNS.
PRONOUNS PERSONAL.
FIRST PERSON.
SLNGULAE
PLURAL.
Ik
G.
eyoj
p-oij
I
of m6
T0p-£OV
of us
A.
as §" spva
me
SECOND
PERSON.
us-
3V.
G.
CD Of £GU
coy
tllOll
of thee
C£l? <B>' £C£%
y@
a;
tfg cf £G£Vflt-
thee
Ga? §' cGa^
of you
V.
CO GU dj £CL>
thou?
<«F Gfet<5 §" £G£^ ■
ye
THIRD PERSON.
M
N
M
N
N. koto? auTYj ai»To he, she, it
G. tou T7i? tou of him, her, it
A. tov ttjv to him, her, it
auTol au«pqc?s auto: they
twv of them
t-ous. TaTj t-« them
The oblique cises of the pronouns of the third person
are formed by aphaeresis , or elision of the first syllable of
the pronoun, demonstrative ccuVec, , aM 7 avVt. Good Writers,
35
however , and those who speak most correctly , disapprove,
this elision , and write, 8$ pronounce it, just as it is given
in the chapter on demonstrative pronouns.
2. There is also a compound pronoun , which , as mora
polite §• respectful , is used instead of the simple , in all
persons , numbers , fy cases , the accusative excepted ; a*
follows.
SINGULAR.
FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. THIRD PERSON*
o fy JTOU^OyOU (JLOU TOU XoyOU GO'J TOU^OyOU TQU Or 77]£
^ jj, or of me. thou, orof thee, he, she, or of him, her
PLURAL.
c ) too ^o'yoo |i.a? tou loyoo ca; tou ^o'yoo tou$
^ .,' j we, or of us ye, or of you they, or of them
CHAPTER XVI.
OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.
1. The Modern Greek Language has, strictly speaking,
no pronoun possessive , answering to our pronouns my ,
thy , his, her , our , your , their.
2. As a substitute, it has a form , compounded of the
adjective tliKo; , expressive of property, or peculiarity, and
the* genitive singular, or the accusative plural of the per-
sonal pronoun. The adjective is thus declined , as other
adjectives in cc , n \ or.
FIRST PERSON.
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER
G. TOO iduCOU (JLQU TT? SOlJt^? fJLOU
to e^tzov [/.ov my, or miim
too g&XiOu [xou of my,or mine
A, tov s<W.q'v uou JTTjv e&wtvfv ulqu to eosxov p.ou my, or mine
w
M
G. TOV EOUC&V [XOU
PLl/RAt.
F
»
-WVcoY/.toVLWU
A , to'j; £o\xou; [J.ou -ra; i^ivAc, p,ou
Ta £oW. (xou my , or inin^
Twvsaiy.wv^ou of my, of mine?
a dSr/toc p.ou my , or mine
The above form answers for all the possessive pronouns,
by substituting for y.ov, the genitives uo v thy , rev his, rvi^
her, rwc , or the accusatives row , tlieir , and ^c , our ,.■
sac , your.
The lower classes usually inditlge in the elision of the
incipient- Vowel', and say b 'Imoq fxou ? T ov <xc'.
The personal proncuns ucv 7 wsv 8§c , are enclitics in these
examples, as in that of the compound personal pronoun ?&»
hkyov py, and therefore lose their accent: see Chap* 12.
CHAPTER XVII
OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1. The Modern Greek has three demonstrative Pronouns:
crJroc, clvtyi, xvro ; tovtoc, rovry;, rovio, this * and kvMvoc, , iXihn ,
fail* o , that: the former two indicating proximity, and th#
latter remoteness :
2v They are thus declined".
SINGULAR.-
N.
OCUTO? ,
auTT) ,
auTo
04
this
G.
auToD',
auTvis,
auToO'
of this
A.
auTov,
PLURAL.
auiro
this
N.
auToi ,
auTatg ,
auTot
these -
G.
auTtov ,
(XUTTOV,
au~c5v
of these
A,
auToJg,
auTai5- r
aura
these
(1) Some Authors write i<SWs , i » °' v an d m tk e P^ral feminine
(2) The above is the more usual Form 5 but many Writers prefer
She Hclknie wto; , cwr/i . t&uto,
SINGULAR.
M
F
»
%
TO 'J TO $,
TOUT7,
■roSfea
this
G.
TOUTOU ,
TO'JT-/;^ ,
TOUTOll
of this
A,
tgOtgv,
TOOV/VV ,
PLURAL.
TOUT©
■this
N.
TO 5 TO i,
to^tsi;,
tout a
these
G.
TO'JTWV.3
TOUTCO.V i
TG'JTCjJV
of these
A.
to'jtqu; ,
tout^i; ,
singular.
Touja
these
ft.
gjtetvo£,
SX£tV7] ,
IxsTvp
that
O.
ix.clVGU,
EX8lV7]f ,
sxetvoy
of that
A.
SfcEWOV ,
JxStVYlV,
PLURAL.
exeiyo
that
8f,
ejceivoi,
£X£LVat£ ,
gxsty.a
those
('.
E/.SlVtoV,
ixstvwv ,
exsivcov
of those
A.
ixe&voug ,
Ixetvas? ,
sV.sTva
those
. The vulgar add a syllable to these pronouns, which
hi general rhiaies with the vowel of the final syllable, and
receives the accent. Thus, they say , auTouvoO , aoTr.r?,;
«UTovav , auT7ivav , auTcovcov , aurouvou? , auTYivai^
instead of
«uto6 , out7& , kuton , kuttp , aurSv , ccIto'j; , auTaT; , and
TOUTOUVOUj TOUTYIV^? , TO'JTOVa , TOUT7)V.a, , TGUTOIVG'.. , TO'JTT.va^
to-jtuvuv , touto'jvou; , instead of to'Jto'j , touttj? , toutov ,
to'jtt.v, TojTQ^TO'JTaic, TOujcov, tq'jtguc. In like manner ixtivovo,
exeiyTiva , exgtrvqu, jbtetvSv, instead of l&eiyoy , |xe£vt(iv , Exetyau ,
CHAPTER XVIII.
OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE.
The Pronoun relative is g ottoToc , v». gttolV. ? to gtcolov ,
who, or iv/uch: it is always preceded by the article, and is
declined like aypio;, toe, toy of the second declension; tbus;
33
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER.
K. 6d7rofo< 'h oxota to oroibv who, or which
(r. touqxoiou T^?6xota§ touotcolou of whom, or which
A. TOV 67TOIOV T/jV OTTOiaV TO OTCOWV whom, OF Which
N.
G.
A>
PLURAL.
al ditotais toc oirota
ot owotot at diroiais toc oTrota who, or which
t&v o7roLwv tSv otcouov t&v 67rot(i)v of whom, or which
tou$ otcoiou; Ta? 07:01a? Ta orcoZa whom, or which
2. The Moderns use o'c-r/c as a relative la the nominative
case only of each number ; thus : N. S. forts , vine , o , n i
N. PL el Tim , at Tin; : the neuter has no plural.
CHAPTER XIX.
OE REFLECTED PRONOUNS.
The reflected Pronoun is a Compound ; and is employed
to express the reflection of an action on the subject of a
Verb. It has only two cases, and agrees with all genders ;
as follows :
Lingular.
FIRST PERSON.
SFCOND PERSON, THIRD PERSON.
c.
tou sauToO p,ou
of myself
tou eaurou sou tou Iccutou tou, or r/fc
of thy self of him or herself
A.
Tov lauTo'v p.ou
myself
tov eauTo'v cou tov eauTov tou, or ttis
thyself him, or herself
PLURAL.
G. tou lauTou (xa^ tou laurou cǤ TOulauTou tous o/'tow
of ourselves of yourselves of themselves
A» Tov eauTo'v j/.a$ tov £«uto'v cccq tov eauTov tou;
ourselves yourselves themselves
CHAPTER XX.
^n
*}F INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS,
M
F
N
N.
roTo; ,
sco&e,
1T0IQV
G.
TtoioUf
•scofe,
ico toy
A.
tcoiov ?
rotav,
woibv
PLURAL.
N.
T0101-,
ffoiai? ,
woii*
G.
TCQiCOV ,
TCOtWV ,
7C0tu>V
A,
1C010UC,
1C0MCS ,
7CQWC
who or which ?
of whom or which?
whom or which?
who or which?
of whom or which?
whom or which?
V This Pronoun is, by Synezesis, contracted into a Monosyl-
lable , with a strong accent on the final vowel
/^OtO^, TCOtflC., 7COIO.
&&
From TTotou, icoia$, the vulgar form icoiavoy, ^otav%, $$e c
FromjoAwv , oXou; , they form qaovcov , 6>ovou$ of all, all §*c.
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE §' FEMININE. NEUTER.
which or what?
of which or what?
which or what?
which or what?
of which or what?
which or what?
The English Word " What " is more indefinite in its
signification , " which " more strictly relative ; as wJiat
arguments did he adduce ; that is , indefinitely , of all the
arguments that might be adduced : which arguments did
he adduce; that is , of those expected ? or agreed upon ? or
known.
N.
Tig
G.
TlVO£
TlVQ£
A.
TlVflf
PLURAL.
N,
Tive?
tiya
G.
TlVCOV
TtVtoV
A.
Tiva?
TLVa
4*
CHAPTER XXL
Or INDEFINITE PRONOUNS;
SINGULAR.
T/ti or, t/c some one, or some, or a certain oil*. Tins
pronoun is used where we use the indefinite article , or
speak in the plural indefinitely , without an article.
MASCULINE.
FEMININE,
NEUTER.
N,
Tiva;, Tt$
tI?
\
Tt,
0.
two?
T'.V0£
ftvoi
A.
tivgc
tiv*
PLURAL.
V
K.
TIVS5
nvl?
TIV3C.
G.
TlVfcSV
TtVWV
TIVCOV
A.
Tiva?
twkg
TLVOC
It is declined like the interrogative r/V, with the except
tion of having the accent on the final syllable , and being
sometimes an enclitic*
The Ynlgar use y^n&ot , ui^mxi x ftifi%£- %
2, Kxuvioc-or, jf ? ev some , in the sense of quantity , is
declined like ^f ^ , >J , or , Kcx.7roi-oc , a , of , some, a certain,
like c rVo?oc , h ore/a , to otcToc ; except that the accent is
throughout on the antepenult. The same exception , as to
the position of the accent, holds throughout cWo'c , woix ,
orciov, whosoever.
3. Kxvi7> or Kxvhae , nappta. , Kaw, any one, some one, is,
declined like %1q , ^/a, '^. It is compounded with negatives
and affirmatives , answering to our somebody , anybody ,
nobody.
4- In o, i\ rh Iuvol or rdh such an one, the article alone is
declinable, as tit a. tm t&Ii yviajka, I have seen such a Woman
sfj* toy Tclh, I have seen such a one*
CHAPTER XXIL
OF THE VERB.
1. The modern Greek Verb lias two Voices ; the active
and passive.
2. Three Modes ; the Indicative, the Imperative, and the
Subjunctive.
It has also an active participle , undeclined , in ovtuq and
evvfac, uvrac , agreeing with all numbers and persons, an<*
'swering to our participle in ing \ and it has two passive
participles, declinable, the one present, y^apo^-syuc , hn, tvov ,
being written , the other past , y^a^eVo? , ivn % hov written.
Verbs that are both active and neuter , which are very
numerous, have this latter participle; raw'Ja I rot, both
transitively and intransitively, participle past, o-a^o-^c.
3. The Modern Greek like other Modern languages has
both simple and compound Tenses.
Present
( Continuative
Simple Tenses. \ Imperfect
Aorist
Indefinite
( Pluperfect
Compound. I Future
( Conditional
4- The Indicative is the only Mood that has them all.
The two others have only the present , or rather the
continuative, and the Aorist, or indefinite. The imperative
has only the second person of each Number, taking the other
persons from the Subjunctive.
CHAPTER XXIII,
OF CONJUGATION.
'. There is, in Modern Greek, but one Conjugation; but
this contains barvtona , in a , and perisppmena in a.
2. The first have the acute accent on the penult ; and
4* .
are therefore called barytona ( see chapter i , §. 6 )
Perispomena are formed, by contraction , from verbs in
to coi). They follow the form of circumflexed Verbs , or
Pcrispomena in the present , and the continuative Tenses
♦nly."
CHAPTER XXIV.
•OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
i. The simple Tenses are all formed from the present.
The derivatives differ from the present in the four follow- •
ing particulars. i. st by the addition of -an augment.
2, ly By a change of the characteristic. _3. ly By a change
of termination. 4- ly and lastly , in a great number of
Verbs , by ciianging , in the aorist , and m tlie tenses
formed from it, the Vowel or Diphthong preceding the
characteristic of the present, ( see Chap. 24 , 2. a Part
§• 4 , 7 > 9- )
OF THE AUGMENT,
There are two kinds of augments ; the syllabic, and the
temporal.
The syllabic augment is ane, prefixed to certain tenses
of Verbs beginning with a consonant; as from yppw , I write,
'iyfa^ct, I wrote,- f/Vrw I throw, ep/4a , I threw.
The temporal augment is a change of the /datable' Vow-
els and Diphthongs a , e* , m , 01 , av , w , into the im-
mutable Vowels n , w, and Diphthong v\v, as from aWa , /
hear, yik.qic-%, 1 heard; iktyxu , / reproach 'ihty^j, I reproached.
Verbs beginning with e , sometimes , instead of the tem-
poral augment, assume an 1 in the augmented tenses , as
from t^w , I have , efya I had. The augments are in use
only in the indicative Mood : thus , from the aorist indi-
cative tyfOL^a, I wrote, are formed the aorists imperative
y^a^e , write , and subjunctive w yftyo , that I write , or
may write , without augment.
The uneducated are fond of substituting the temporal
43
for the syllabic augment ; as ny^a for iy$x$ct The lower
classes often omit the augment altogether , as will appear
in the conjugation of the verb.
OF THE CHARACTERISTIC,
The Characteristic is the consonant, or combination
of consonants , preceding the vowel , or vowels in the last
syllable : thus , a is the characteristic of Gexa , and ^ of
The change of the characteristic is the great difficulty
in the Theory for forming the Tenses. Its consideration
shall follow the conjugation of the Verb , the knowledge of
which will render the subject much more intelligible.
OF THE TERMINATION.
The termination is , as appears above , that part of the
word which immediately follows the characteristic ; in 0sa<h
it is u ; in ey^avf/-*, a; in £y^a<p3--»Jit€re, wxerg. These termina-
tions should be particularly attended to , in learning ta
conjugate the Yerb.
CHAPTER XXV.
OF THE COMPOUND TENSES.
T. These Tenses are, as in all languages, in which they
exist , formed by means of a verb auxiliary united with
the verb conjugated.
They are formed in three different ways ; but without
the slightest change of signification , on account of that
difference. In the first , the auxiliary alone is conjugated,
and the principle Verb remains invariable. In the other
two , on the contrary , the auxiliary remains invariable
while the principle Ferb alone is conjugated. The future
is compounded in three ways : the conditional in two : the
pluperfect only in the first.
44
II. The auxiliaries are lya I have , for the pluperfect ,
sx\u\ 0£to) , I mil, for the future and conditional.
The continuative of the former 6%a , I A^/, is the only
Tense which is used as an auxiliary, and it is employed to
form the pluperfect.
The present , and the continuative of the second , 8*xa
and qfohoi. are both employed , with and without variation.
When without variation , the third person is used through-
out , Gs\e/ and \$&a.
The former, $sku is contracted into, 0* ; and 8& v* into 8a\
III. The Tenses of the conjugated Verb, which enter into
^composition , are the present, and the aorist of the subjunc-
tive Mkod. In the first form of composition , in Verbs
called Barytona , these Tenses change their final a into u. In
verbs called perispomena, those of the first class like, -rclja
change the a into circnmflexed u, those of the second; like
t///«, the a into circumflexed a. The passive Voice admits
into this form of composition the aorist only, which changes
the w into «, without the i underwritten , 0g\o> , QUuc yfxffi
( see first composition in the conjugations ).
In the two other forms of composition , the subjunctive
js regularly conjugated ; but when with the third person
of the auxiliary, in Us uncontracted form, >a is not admis?
.fiible ( see 2. d composition. )
IV. The future is compounded, i. st , of the auxiliary 8*' a «
conjugated, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive
unaltered , fcku' yfd^u or 8f\« yfd<pu I shall write ; passive
&'*« 7pa<p(iif I shall be written ; the passive does not admit
the present , in this form of composition.
2, Jy Of QeAfe/ , the third person singular of the present
&ko unconjugated, and of the aorist or present of the
subjunctive conjugated; U hu yftyxa ,,-w, h GVyfilf - «, ^c , w.
I shall , thou cw/£, he a;/// write; Oexei ypapfl « , wc,w or
y^(p-of/ai, is at, it xi, I shall, thou wilt, he <*>/// be written.
3. ly Of 8e for 0e*e/ , and of the subjunctive, preceded by
the particles : Gt vd y$<*.*\>-e>,n, g, or yf dp <vc, , I shall write
Is pa y^etipO-S, >??, jr, or yfaf-^a/, £c-«/,*7a/, I shall he written; au(J
^
ncfn
hy synalcepha, 9a yp^-c, ;;c, «,ory^-a, hc ? k, 6a y?«pQ-
0/* y^a'p e/*a/j £crc j ; 7 era;, winch latter is the more usual form.
V. The conditional is composed i. st of the imperfect
rftikov or Yifohz, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive,
as above in the i. st form of the future; 8<Je\-k, &c, i , %y*v 9 %r$
ay y^x^tij or yfsctpu I should S\C. , write; passive *!0e\-a , is i
t , &;c. , yjcupfto I should <Scc. , he written.
2. ly Of >J8e\fc, third person singular of the imperfect
jrfoxc'i and of the aorist, or present of the subjunctive, as in
the second form of the future, S Qthi yj a. ^r^ w, *, dry^<p-&,m 9
v. I should, thou wouldst #fc., "vvrite, or have written ; y%\i
yrfjL^ w,jic,«, or y^d.^-ofjLOLifi(FOLi 9 iTOLi I should be, or havebeen^
thou wouldst be , or have been written &;c. , see the Syntax*
VI. The pluperfect is compounded only in the first man-
ner , that is of the imperfect fj%9y or dya, conjugated , ar>d
of the aorist of the principal verb unconjugated u^cc , tlxis*
y[J.-fii , I had* thou hadst written J^a, &X*t> yf a 9®* ^ hod j
thou hadst been written.
It may be well here to observe to the reader, that in the
following conjugation of the Verb, when a Tense has several
forms , the first is the most approved ; the last the most
vulgar.
CHAPTER XXVI.
FIRST PART.
ACTIVE
V O I G E.
INDICATIVE MOOD-.
PRESENT
TEKSE.
s
yfa<p-Oi
y^j-iK
I write
thou w
ritest
I am
thou
writing (i)
art writing-
yfxf-tt
he writes (o.)
he is
writing
(i) For the principles on which the distinctions in the English
Translation of the Tenses are grounded , see Appendix §. 2.
(?.] He, she, or it in the 3. d person singular, in all the Te»ses*
J* .
P. y[x<p-6/uiv-c/,ut we write we are writing
y$<i$-iTi ye write ye are writing*
ye*<p-ovri,6vi-owi they write they are writing
Imperfect , more properly called by th© Greeks ,
Continuative. (i)
VULG.
S. ey^a?-* Syfa<p a t wrote, or was writing
eyf&f-tc »7faf-ec thou wrotest, or wast writing
«yfa<p-t wy^«9-€ lie wrote, or was writing
P. iyj)a'<p»a^t^ iyfaf-apif we wrote or were writing
gy^'p-m iyfoL<p'iT6 ye wrote or were writing
ey^«f-a? nyfcL<p~guf they wrote or were writing,
AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2)
S* iyf-x^.x. HyfQL^-at, I wrote, or have written
£y^NJ/.£f 8ypocsJ«-ec thou wrotest , or hast written
typoLy-t yiy^oi^-i he wrote , or has written
P. iyffy-ctfitf n'yf a^-xptv (3) we wrote, or have written.
ty^y-iTi myfo.^ erfe ye wrote or have written
'iyfCL^-M nyfoL^-ar they wrote or have written
(1) This Tense has always reference to continued action , or a re-
petition of action.
It is formed from the present , by adding the augment, and chang-»
ing &> into a in Barytona , and & into pQ<x* in perispomena. The
Vulgar say -ypa^ *ps> sre, avs in the plural and thus confound the se-
cond persons plural of this and of the present tense. The Value of the
Term continuative % as a definition of this Tense, will more clearly ap-
pear when we come to the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods.
(2) This Tense in correct writing has always reference to action
completed at once , and never tD continued or repeated action : by
using the same form I wrote for this and the preceding Tense, the
English Language confounds these two very distinct senses.
The English has the advantage over iheModer Greek in not confound-
ing I wrote with I have written; but this distinction of Time is by no
means of equal importance with the other , as every Englishman
learning a foreign language must have felt.
The Aorist is , like the Imperfect , formed from the Present , by
assuming an augment , and changing the characteristic : In perispomena
£> is changed into n ij y.; as ■jrar-o), sTrar-naa I Tip.a>, eritAYiaflc^
(3) The vulgar use -ft>a<j/-a<j.s- sTe-ave in the plural.
i?
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
uyoL ypxiu I had written
thou hadst written
he had written
tt'yoL.utf y?cl'lu (i) we had written
ye had written
they had written
Future tejcse first form.
£ 'X*
yfi^u
ux*c
y^a^ti
tl X t
yptx-^u-
it^Oi.UiV
yjptyii (i)
i/^STt
ypx-ftt
i{ X ay
yfdi^u
i. st Eng. form:.
2/ Eng. fo
Qt\~c*
I shall write
I will
Qih-tix;
thou wilt write
thou shalt
f&K-tl {
| ypd-^u
he will write
he shall
Qih-ejuiv |
[ orygx-fu
we shall write
we will
hik-iii
ye will write
ye shall
ft'iK-QM
they will write
they shall
p.
The first form of the English Translation is the true-
English Future , indicating simply futurity of action ; the
second form includes the idea of an exercise of volition on
the part of the speaker, and of compulsion towards the person
spoken to or of. This distinction renders the English singu-
larly correct in its expression of a simply future sense. « Je le
ferai, je te le promets,» means «I will, or I am determined
to do it , I promise you;» J'espere que je le ferai demam,
means « I hope I shall do it to morrow. » The same confusion
I helieve holds in all the languages in Europe, ours ( as spoken
by all classes in south Britain ) excepted; and therefore I arn
obliged to give both forms here ; though not as our Gram-
marians have 1 think, always, hitherto, done, to the great
(i) The more correct or approved form alone is given in tlic coir-
pound tenses. Th§ Vulgar use s?/aus , s^avs , instead of e'^ajfcsv '? eTx,«v.
4
confusion of foreigners, and, indeed, of the Natives of Ireland
and Scotland : as if it. were indifferent which were used to
express simple futurity , siuill or will, For the grounds of
the distinctive characters of shall and will^see appendix §. &*
p.
FUTURE TENSE SECOND FORM.
I. st
a^
Of At* yf>a y<u or <p«
I shall $*
I will %c.
Oe'Ag/ - N^ttf - <ptf£
thou wilt 8§c.
Thou shalt ^o
&'*.« - >|>« - <p^
he will c^-c.
he shall <%-c.
OsAg/ - *\>VfJ.iV - (pUp IV
We shall §•£.
we will 8$c.
Qiku - \Ltre " <p£3"fc
ye will <^c.
ye shall 8cd,
OeAc/ i -^ovv - cpov 1 ?
they will &c.
they shall &•&.
FUTURE TENSE THIRD FORM,
as ahore
5s r«
or
u
7f*
^61
Of fco
Ge r«
-
u
-
r^^C
(pr,C
06 F(X
£
8a
-
\pW
X (p?7
Qe vd
-
0a
• -
\f/W^£K
- <pupw
hi VOL
-
0«
-
\^£T6
<piT£
^1 VOL
-
9«'
-
\^<jy/
* <pcuy
imperative mood (i)
present or continuative tense. (aq
&
yfape
write thou
ct-Q y%&$y\
let him write
R
<x.Q yfOL^afjai
let us write
yfayiTi
write ye
a$ ypzipouv
let them write
(i) the Name and Nature of the Mood implies futurity,
(a.) This Tense is formed from the present of the indicative, by
•hanging the final o into % in Barytona. The w/ in perispomena of fch«
49
AORIST OH INDEFINITE*, (i)
% Ypa-vj/g or-iov Write tbou
«; yp«^ ^et him write
Po tr% ypa^-(d{£e9 let us write
Ypa-^sTS write ye
Ǥ Ypa i |ouv let them write
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2)
So va ypao-6> that I write ; may , or should write
va ypao-r^ thou write, mayst or shouldst write
va Ycao-vi he write, may, or should write
P. va yfteo-catstt we write, may, or should write
va vQa(p-£T£ ye write, may, or should write
va ypac°6uv they write, may, or should write
Erst class becomes gT, and in those of the second «. The reasons for
this shall be given in their proper places.
This Tense, when used by correct speakers or writers, always im-
plies continued or repeated action. Indeed the Vulgar generally make
the distinction: fjofye means write on, or write frequently; as, ^oaepe pou
•saxt; fyJQt, ava^xviv tb; €&r,8sias picu, write to me, whenever you have need
of my assistance; ^pa^s/A^Xtxoi J4a8'e %s'pav, write English everyday.
It would be as great a grammatical error to use the Aorist in the
above cases, as this tense, whenever an action to be at once performed
is contemplated.
Both Tenses, as well as the corresponding tenses of the subjunctive,
notwithstanding their Names, have necessarily a reference to futurity:
the first of each always implying action to be continued , or repeated ;
the Aorist, in correct writing or speaking, never.
(1) This Tense is formed from the Aorist of the indicative, by the
suppression of the augment , and the change of the Termination « into
e or cv
(2) Formed from the present of the indicative, by changing si of the
final syllable into « with an 1 underwritten, and cp.sv? into couav ? as well in
barytona as in perispoinena.
This Tense implies action to be continued or repeated.
The Vulgar use ■vscfocau.e and -vcaacuve in the i.st and 3:d persons plural
' ' "' 4
5, v3c ypa'j'-w that I write, may, or should write
thou 8$ 6. ._, as above.
:>£>
4
v3c
ypa'j'-w
V3£
yp^V^^
VflS
Ypa^L-Ti
V(X
ypa^-ct)rx£T
voc
ypa^-£TS
y_pa<J»-ouv
I. st E. F. 1. A E. F.
fj.-rflsVa' fp-^t or (pat I should I should \ ^
ffiek-zq -fad-tytii- OT Mt thou wouldsfe thou shouldstf % *'
•/(OeV-s ypa-tpet iw cpei he would he should' ^ g
P. ^6£X-a(xsv ypa-i|>et or ©a we should we should
•/IOsX-sts- ypcc-^ct, o/ ! &£t ye would ye should
rJOfiVav' ypa-^ei or (pet they would they should
The second English form is used to express the hypo*
thesis, the first the consequence , whenever that consequence
is necessary, and independent of volition or compulsion-.
as in form, so in sense, it is analogous with the first form
of the future. When the exercise of volition on the part of
the speaker, or of compulsion towards the person spoken
to or of is to be signified , a third form analogous with
the second form of the future is to he used : I would, thou
shouldst, he should , we would, ye should , they should*
(i) Formed from the Aorlst Indicative , by suppressing the augment,
and changing the Terminations into those of the above tense.
It is evident , at the first glance , that these Terminations are the same
in sound as those of the present indicative, and differ only in orthogra^.
phy. This has led some Grammarians to imagine that there is,proper!y
speaking, no subjuncf n e Mood in the Modern Greek.
This position might he tenable , if there were only the present tense
subjunctive. But where, in the indicative, are we to find theAorist,
unless in the compound Tenses , which borrow it from the subjunctive?
Tim tense is never to be used where action to be continued., or repeated
Is implied.
it
CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM.
I. st E. F.
§-. $$&* YP<H W or ?» I shoiild I should j £
gQ £ ^g ypa-i^ — 971; tliouwouldst thoushouldstl j*
Y)6e>.2 ypa-^vi ~<pvi he would he should U
Pv TiQeXs Ypa-^w^^^H-^ we should we should
^8e>.s yp«-^T£ — costs ye would ye should
yJQsXs ypa-^ouv — <pow they would they should ) &
Participle uncieclined y$d<pbvtoLt (1) writing.
What has been said of the proper rendering of the Greek
Tenses into English in the Active voice applies of course
equallv to the Passive voice. It has been thought more ad-
vantageous to subjoin the preceding notes to the particular
Tenses , than to reserve the subject altogether for an Ap-
pendix.
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. (?)
S. ypao-oaai I am written
vpacD-ecafc thou art written
ypacp-sToa he is written
P, Y'p&<p-o£s6a (3) we are written
Yfao-scOs ye are written
Ypa<p-ovTfct they are written.
(1) From the present of the Indicative, by changing the Termination
to in barytona, into crra; 5 and to, in perhpbmena^ into suvra? and S>VTa?*
(2) From the present indicative active, by changing to into cuat in bury-
tona, and, in perispomena in & from £&, into ouw.at, or eioupatj in 3> from
«o> into S)f;.a'..
(3) Vulgarly ^acp-cup.a^e, o?" ou^g^s., *ypa<p-sce, -yp!»!p-euvTa:«
5-2-
IMPERFECT OR CONTINUATIVE. (l)
5. eypa^p-opiv or (2) eypacp-ou^ouv (s) I was written
sypacp-oucttv or eypa(p-oo<rouv (e) thou Wast written
sygsfljp-eT^' or eypa<p-ouvTav (e) he was written
P. eypacp-ojAeOa' or eypa<p-ou(/.acT£ o/" ^s we were written
iypafp-g^Ge or sypacp-ouaacTe or s<r£ ye were written
gypacp-ovTO o/* sypa^p-ouvTistv («■) they were written
AORIST OR INDEFINITE.
(3)
S. £ypacp-9v]V - Gvjfca (4)
sypo^p-0vi; - Oy]Z££
sypa^-071 - OyiJce
P. eypa<jp-67)|/.ev * Ovfzajxsv
sypa^p-8y)Te - Ovficsirs
eypa^-Ovjcav - 0*^>cav
I was, or have Been written
thou wast, or hast been written
he was, or has been written
we were, or have been written
ye were, or have been written
they were, or have been written
(1) Tlie Imperfect is formed from the present of the indicative, by
prefixing the augment, and changing, in barytdna,the termination ojao*'
anto
/JfcVlV y OUjAOUV, OUfAOUVS.
Perispomena from aca , change u{c»r into wjayjv. The vulgar terminations
OUJi-OUV, GUJ/.OUVS
are common to both classes.
(2) The vulgar use r) as the augment 7i-ypa»-cop>ouv etc. ; and in the first
and second persons plural use ouj/.e<re and ougs^s .' they sometimes omit
the augment: They also add an s to the i.st a.d and 3.d persons sin-
gular, and to the 3.cT person plural ; and then necessarily advance the
accent a syllable ;as vfypacpoupxuvs etc. ; s^pa^cucas-e-- is by a common syn-
cope contracted into I'yp&feo^r.
(3) The Aorist passive is formed from the aorist active, by changing
the characteristic , and the termination a into yjv OF nxfc 5. as 'e%a&a ,
6-Ypacp8-viv-ifl>ca;.£7raT>Tffa , eTrarrjOyiv ; STtfiviaa , eTt^Oriv.
(4) The vulgar use Tfypafy-Twc* vr(?a.y-mxsq etc. , that is substitute ?
for'6 , in the second form , and sometimes omit the augment} as •$&$*
m^-a- e£-e- ^poMpim-a^s-sTe-ave^
PRETERPLUPERFECT TENSE.
VULGARLY
S* st/a ypa<p-Gvj or vn I had been written
el/g; ypa<p-Grj or zri thou hadst been written
dyi ypa<p-Qv) or t^ he had been written
P. £!,'/a;jLcV ypa<p-G-/i or tti we had been written
st/STa ypao-Gvi' or tv} ye had been written
gl^ov ypa<p-G-?; or Tvi they had been written
FUTURE TENSE I st FORM, OR COMPOSITION.
I, st ENG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FORM.
S. 6eXd> ypa<p07j I shall be I will be
GeXsts ypa^Ovj thou wilt be thou shall be
BeXa ypoc^pOvi he will be he shall be
P. OeXo(JE.£v ypao&vj we shall be we will be
DsXsts ypaoOyj ye will be ye shall be
or A° U<7t 1 ypa<p8$j they will be they shall be
FUTURE TENSE 2. FORM OR COMPOSITION.
r* O
« S
6a £t
ypacp-GS
or
ypflqp-co[/.ai
OeXci
ypacp-Oyj;
or
-ypa©-£<jai
(MXsk
ypa<p-6*o
or
ypa<p-£Tat
BlXst
ypa©-Gco>/.£V
or
to.uuQa
eiXei
ypa<p-Gy]T§
or
safe
•sXei
ypa<p-Gouv
or
cov-at
H
Cfl
EUTURE TENSE 3/ FORM, OR COMPOSITION.
S, 8s vie or 6a ypacp-G£ O/' ypaocojxai _, «•
Gs va or Ga ypacp-Gvis or ypacpscai 2 — -§
Gs va or Ga ypacp-Gvj or ypa^psxat H s ~
P. Gs va or Ga eft?, as in the 2, d form
(i) The Vulgar employ their usual forms , and say 6i v$cl<d-vu ,
\pccp-f oyve, 8« •ypawo-jp.^c , •ypotyoVYTfc; : see the subjunctive.
}-/..
54
IMPERATIVE MOOD,
PRESENT Oil CONTINUATIVE TENSE, (l)
S. " ypaep-ou be thou written
a; yp'fi&p-eTai let him be written
P. a; ypacp-co^eOa let us be written
yp«<p-£a9e be ye written
a§ ypa<p-covTat let them be written
AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2)
VULG.
be thou written
<pT?) let him be written
cpTWfjiev let us be written
<pTvjT£ be ye written
cpTouvs let them be written
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (3)
S. va yp«-ofo)'p.fici that I. be , may, or should be written
vgc ypa-^SG^t thou be, mayst, or shouldst be written
va yp.a^£Tat he be , may, or should be written
P. va ypa-owjxsOa we be , may, or should be written
va ypa-<p£<7.Qe ye be , may, or should be written
va Ypa-<pcovTai they be , may, or should be written
Ihe Vulgar say ypa-©o£{*-a<jT6 0/ 1 £GT£ and ypatpouvtai.
s.
ypa^ou
aq ypacpOvi
p.
a; ypaoOtop-cV
ypa(pO'?i'T£
ag ypaoOofiv
cu.-/t
(ij Th-3 Tense is formed from the present indicative by changing 1
into ou. The 2.d person plural is, in the active as well is passive
Voice, in Barytona and Perispomena, the same as in the present In-
dicative. It takes the terminations of the subjunctive mood In the i.st.
and 3.d persons plural.
(2) The same as the aorist Subjunctive Passive , except in the second
person singular , which has the characteristic of the aorist Imperative^
active , with the termination ou.
(3) In Barytona from the present of the Indicative , by changing 0/
into co , as in the active: thus <yoa'f-ou.*i : va ^fa\/.%b Perispomena change
AORIST Or INDEFINITE,
VULG.
$, vsc yp«<p-G<S o/' tw that I be, may, or should bo eh
va ypy-o-Or;; or t^ thou be etc,
ya ypwp-Gvi or tyi' he be etc.
P. vavpao; ft l or touixs we be etc.
I OOUW.5V
va ypa<p-t)*?rre or wrs ye
be etc.
va ypacp-0opv or touvs they be etc.
From the aorist of the Indicative, by suppressing the
augment , -and changing the termination w into a circumr
flexed. The termination is varied , as in the aorist active ,
and is throughout circumflexed on the vowel or diphthong
immediately succeeding the characteristic.
L st ENG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FOHM>
S, ®£kz ypa ? -e^ or tvJ I should be I should be (i) J
f$£Ae£ ypa<p-9*?j or ttj thou wouldst be thou shouldstbe'|
this ypacp-Gvj or ttj he would be he should be £
P. y$£Ao[/.£v yppup-Gyj or ttj we should be we should be J'
tiOsasts ypaip-Ovi or t/j ye would be ye should be v
•/j&£Aav ypa^-Oy] or tv) they would be they should be £
£-4
o
also sT into •/• ; as.Tra-eToai , va Trarrisat , and ou into w ; as <*a-rcu[*at , wa-
TGuo.sOa; subj: V a irarupAi, va -7raTwu,s6« 5 but the change of ou into S> is
littie attended to, and is deemed affected.
(1) There is a third English form for this Tense, when determina-
tion, or the exercise of Volition, on the part of the speaker , ( i.st
Person ) or of compulsion towards those spoken to, or of ( 2.d, and
3. d Persons) is to be si-mfed. I would, thou shouldst , he should , we
would , ye should, they should. See Appendix §. 4,
■
S, fc vj9&s ypa<p-65 or ypa<p~co(4.ai $
vjGe^S; YP a ,?"*^ ^ Ypa^p-etyat ^
pA.£ ; ypacp-Gyi or ypa^-eTat rg^ g
I'c $6e^& ypacp-6S{x£v or ypa^-to[/.e6a ^ ~Q
vjfk^s ypa(p-6v; : Ts r r ypacp-effGe $
•fc'OeXe ypa<p-(k>G'v o/' ypa^-wvTa& H
PARTICIPLE PRESENT. (l)
ypa^pdjx. - evo; -s &vt> - evov. being written,,
PARTICIPLE PAST. (2)
ypscf^ -... f/iyoc; - tyiyn - (iivov Written.
I have preferred ranging the Conditional , or Hypothetic
Tenses under the Subjunctive, instead of under the Indicative
Mood, where the Author has ranged them.
Since future and conditional, as well as past and present
Action, mny he repeated, or continued Action, whenever the
idea of Habit, continuation , or repetition is to be expressed %
the Modern Greek, with great advantage, employs the Tenses
of the different Moods in both Voices, which I have, pn that
account, called Continuative : as Mku yf4<pa *<*'? n/uifav 7 1 shall
write daily, and not Sthti yfatyfr ; tfOexe y$oiqtQ ffv%va , ccv ti'x&
Kotijot • I should write often, if I had time, and not S0c\« y^a^a*
The Modern Greeks have no difference of form for I shall
write, and I shall have written ; or for I should write , and
I should have written.
(1) From the present of the indicative passive, by changing ^ai in
barytona, and, in perispomena from so, into p.svcc, *ypc«fo-{/.at ,7pacp&-p.£vo?,
ftZTou-paA , xa-cu-p^vo?. Perispomena from ao> change the fi> into 06 ; as.
from Mtp&pai , ioijt-qyrxevo? ^ but those who pique themselves on their
correctness ( or rather Hellenism ) say jccip.-&>fA£vos.
(1) From the aorist of the Indicative , by suppressing the augment ,
changing the characteristic, and substituting the termination e'vo;, parox-
ytonon, for yjv; as from e^acp6y;v, <ypap.(jL-£vc?. ; from eirarriGviv , waTYifWvcs \
from ixptfLtOviv , xouwp-£vo£. These participles are both declined lik?
adjectives in ? ? vi , cv of the second Declension,
5?
SECOND PART.
Yiew of the Conjugation of Verbs called Perispomena
Contracted from Hellenic Verbs in ia.
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
I. St E. F.
a.* e. f.
S. rcar-co
(?)
I trample (a)
I am trampling
tig
thou tramplest
thou art trampling
$
he tramples
he is trampling
OUpL£V (3)
we trample
we are trampling
Eire
ye trample
ye are trampling
o'jy
(3)
they trample
they are tramplingy
a'
IMPERFECT OR CONTINtTATIVE TENSE.
iiraT-ouc« (4) I trampled or was
s'jTaT-oijGs; thou trampledst or wast
£?u«t.-ougs or ipdfoeiB he trampled or was
£:waT-o'j<7a»j!.£v (5) we trampled or were
£nraT-oii(j£TS ye trampled or were
siraT-doOcay (d) they trampled or were
(i) Contracted from waT-eWsic-eet-s^pv-eVrs.-souvJ
(2) I use this -word to avoid introducing a circumlocution , such as
tread under foot, since it is sometimes used in an active sense, without
a preposition.
(31 The Vulgar use oufu-ouve.
(4) Contracted from iwaT-^isu(ra-EOUffS5-EOU(re-sou<r*(A£v-20UffST6-*e6UffavJ
(5) The Vulgar omit the augment , and use afteatpe, weave in the l.st
md 3.d persons plural.
58
AORIST ©R INDEFINITE.
I trampled or have
thou traihpledst or hast
he trampled or has
we trampled or have
ye trampled or have 1 &
they trampled or have J
PLUPERFECT.
^v a sIve; ely £ ircflfpffrtt I had, thou hadst, he had trampled, etc.
FUTURE TENSE I. st FORM.
i . st I shall, thou wilt trample, etc.
etc.
S. e^ar/ic-a
e?
£
P. eTuaTvfc-apv
(0
£T£
■^aTv-^av
(l)
!i . st I shall, thou wilt trample,
a.a I will, thou shalt trample,
2. FORM.
r i. st T shall etc.
Hlv. iraT-r'cfw or S, t{<j7jc or-?j;, ?{c« or vi < , " T „
■• ' ' J 2. I will etc.
3. d FORM.
**'-»■■■< / - / ~ / - f i- st * shall, etc,
1 ' ' • j2. 1 will ? ete.
IMPERATIVE MOOD,
PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2)
S. xairst and tc«t£is trample thou
slc, tcgctyi let him trample
P. 'kc, 77aTou(jL£v let us trample
TraT£iT£ trample ye
a; rcaTouv let them trample
(1) Tlic Vulgar omit the augment here also , and use r'saas wave.
(2) From the present imperative regular of 7raTe'w, -ndttz TrotTs'sTS, by
contraction of the two £ into the diphthong et , ^atst, , Wareire; as etya
from lex* : see chapter 21 - 5 , rea-rets is for warse by the insertion of
the iota, Ionice, between the two e.
p.
$9
A0RIST OR INDEFINITE.
icrefaacs trample thou fye. as aboye
7TaT*/)G£T£
«£ TTaT'/fcouV
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. )
S. va
P.
•TITS
ouv
that I trample, may, or should
thou trample, mayst, or shouldst
he trample, may, or should
we trample, may, or should
ye trample, may, or should
they trample, may, or should
S. VOI 7wOT"/{ff-Ct>
7)
P.
AORIST OR INDEFINITE.
£7£
OUV
English as above , but not
in a continuative sense.
CONDITIONAL TENSE I s * COMPOSITION,
P.
ENG. FORM.
I should
thou wouldst
he would
we should
ye would
they would
a. d ENG. FORM.
I should
thou shouldst
he should
we should
ye should
thev should
3. a English Form when volition, is the i. st Person, or
compulsion, iC the i. and 3. d Persons, is to be signified; I
would, thou shouldst, he should , we would , ye should,
they should, For the correct use of the 3 forms , see ap«
pendix § 2.
&
P,
CONDITIONAL
TENSE 2. COMPOSITION.
vjOe^s 7raT-7)G-(0i
or
& Efiglish as above
7raT-7)GYlS
or
r
Kcn-ycn
or
77 aT-yfccop.sv
or
OU[/.£V
TuaT-vfffSTe
or
7jT£
7raT-vf<jquv
or
OUV
Participle undeclined ■srareuj'Tac trampling,
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD*
PRESENT.
s.
re act ou[/.ai
£tOU{JLat
(x)
I am
stcat
£1£<7C«
thou art
arm
£t£T«&
he is
3
p<
OU(JL£60C
aou^-a^fi ore^s
we are
£
c$
eia6s
eteVs
ye are
U
*->
GoVTai
stouvTat
they are
(1) Is formed from the present of the indicative active by changing
the final & into ou|/.ai aoujjt.at : see page 5i , note 2. The vulgar form
is frequently written with 75 instead of ei ? as noup.at ? and not etoup.at.
tin
IMPERFECT ( COFTmUATIVE. )
S» (i) eiraT-oupiv o'J(/.ouv or vs I wa s
ouffov ofoouv ve thou wast
*ito ouvrav ve (2) he was
P« o%sOa oua-a(7T£ 57s we were
sfcOs ou(j-a<7fa s^e ye were
ouvto quvt«v vs (2) they were
AORIST OR INDEFINITE.
S. £T:aT7]6-Y)v or vi'.a I was^ or have heen
US %m£ trampled <^c.
Sometimes written without an augment 1 ivoLTr.hxo!. S^c>
PLUPERFECT.
ily-ot. j a; , £ , ap.sv etc. , izz-rM I had been trampled etc,
FUTURE I st FORM.
6&-W, £i£, a ete. , war/iOvi I shall, thou wilt be trampled etd
2. d FORM.
0el& narrfi-Co or ?:aT-wpt.ai English as above,
(1) The Vulgar often prefix yj as the augment , and often omit
the augment altogether, in all the persons, but the first person plural ,
which, unaugmented, could not be distinguished from the i.st P. pL
present. They often insert et or yj throughout as etou^ouv, or r,ouucu»,
siouffcuv, or TiOucouv etc.
(2) When the e is added to the 3.d persons singular andplnral,
the accejU must necessarily be acute fa™**
6i
3/ forM.
0e va or 6a 7ccmiG-<o 0/ 1 irar-Spat English as above.
Sis riffat eft;*
IMPERATIVE.
Present or Continuative.
8, %«ir6S (i) 5>e thou trampled
&s waT/iTai let him be trampled
P* Sc? 7raT(«{Ae0flt let Us be trampled
TCfltTewjGe iztxriBi^i he ye trampled
&S -rcaTwvTai waToiJvTat let them be trampled*
AORIST OR INDEFINITE*
S* ttbenfcou
a; waTviG^ I The English as above, but not
P. h 7uaT"/iGo)(X£v } in a continuative sense.
7raT'/]0yjT£
&£ TCflCTTlGoUV
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE. (a)
S.' va iraT-w[xat - ov[x.at sioty-at that I he trampled (3)
TCaT-?i<7'at stecai thou be trampled
war-yiTat fcsrfc* he be trampled
P. 7uaT-w^£0a-ou(jt.£Ga^ou(x-a<r£-£(7s we be trampled
TrotT-faGs 6 ^f s ye be trampled
TCaT-wvTat ouvfat ewuvrat they be trampled
(i) Contracted from war sou , imperative, formed regularly froris
ftr&teopatj as irocTsTaGat, contracted from ^ars'saSs*
(2) See Page 54 > Note 3.
(3) Or, that I may or should, thou mayst or shouldst ,lie may of
should , we may or should , ye may or should , they may or should be
trampled.
63
A0RT3T OR INDEFINITE.
s.
va warn
B w-vj^J
p.
co;x£v or ouja
5rce
ouv or ouvs
English as above, but not ifr
the sense of continuation,
or repetition.
CONDITIONAL I. st FORM OR COMPOSITION.
I^ENG.FORM. 2. a ENG.F0RM. 3. d ENG. FORM*
f 1 .
S, rSiO<
P. ^OIX-
£
0H/.S'
1 should I should I would
thou woitldst thou shouldst thou shouldst
She would he should he should
we should
5 we should
* ye would
ye Siiov
ild
we would
ye should
£Ae
they woula they should they should
CONDITIONAL 2. a FORM , OR COMPOSITION.
o
S< jOsX'fij Tr«T7)0-W-
or
TC'OL"
—5 [j, at ■
5*
cr
TiCM
7i
or
^Tat
fi>{A&
or
w^eOa
7)7S
or
•?]cr9e
OUV
or
cov-rat
participles'
The 3 English forms
&s above , to be used
as the import of the
context may require,
according to the prin-
ciples laid down in the
appendix § 2 :see p. 5o*
PRESENT,
|[s6T-oup.£VQS , QujAeV/] , ofysvov , Being trampled,
PAST.
pa?mevo£-$VYi-£vQV ,
trampled,
64
THIRD PART.
Second Class of Verbs, called Perispomena, contracted
from Verbs in mi
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE;
j. st E. FORM. 2. a E. FORM.
& Ti(JL-& or aw (i) I honor * I am honoring
a? ocst; thou honorest thou art honoring
a aet he honors he is honoring
to Ttp.-oup.ev (2) we honor we are honoring
«ts ye honor ye are honoring
oOv (2) they honor they are honoring
IMPERFECT ( CONTINUATIVE. ) (3)
S; (4) £Ttpu<j-a I honored , or was honoring
eq thou honoredst, or wast honoring
I, sTtfAas (5) he honored , or was honoring
P, £Tip.ou<j-ap.£v v/e honored , or were honoring
£ts ye honored , or were honoring
sTipLouc-av they honored, or were honoring
(1) This fotm, not contracted, is in use in the Morea : some, particu-
larly the Inhabitants of the Ionian Islands, even Convert these Verbs
into Barytona, by inserting a £ between the a. and the Termination ;
from TYipaw for T /ipw , contracted from rnplu j I observe , or look at }
( See page 67 , note 1 ) they form Tvjpafr), and, taking g for the
characteristic of the Aorist , they say d*%$|a-;
(2) The Vulgar say Dj« , oSvs , to avoid the v final, which they also
drop in the accusative singular of Nouns;
(3) This Tense is conjugated as the same Tense of irarS;
(4) The Vulgar omit the augment, aad say Ttp-oua-a? e; , e , Tiw-ou<jciue
6ua£T£ , ouoav or guukvs.
(5) Some insert a ^ in certain Verbs , between a and the Termination :
as BTpa-jfoO^s , he sung , instead of eTpoqou^ooe,
6$
AORIST.
XL , ,
5. ITlfAW-Ct
I
J*. iTifiw-UfitV
Iff flip -*r
PLUPERFECT TEWSE.
S, eJx** ^ ^ ' iac ^ honored
k> J thou hadst honored
* \ 2 he had honored
P. il-Y-auLtv ( 3- we had honored
1 ye had honored
J they had honored
I honored 7
or
have honored
thou honoredst }
or
hast honored
he honored ,
or
has honored
we honored ?
or
have honored
ye honored ,
or
have honored
they honored,
or
have honored
FUTURE TEASES k St COMPOSITIOKV
I st ENG-. FORM. 2. a EK"G, FORM,
I shall \ I will
thou wilt J , thou shait
he will I | he shall
we shall / Q we will
ye will L ye shall
they will they shall
FUTURE TENSE: 2. d COMPOSITION.
I. St ENG-. FORM. 2* d EIS T G-. FO
Icmj ri^-mcj or £ I shall I will
wu or <x
wwy.iv or upiY Or o-J t ju.ir or Wfil
YKrtfi or are
viwovr O? rui
6<$
FtJTURE TENSE ; S.& COMPOSITION,
- % , r. , } ri/j, - wu» writ- view 8s C. En
m va. or ua I or ' - - ' - ' c r
) Tip. "00 -a<; - ct c^C,
glish as above
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE (CONTINUATIYE. )
S. rifAd (i)
at; rijua,
P. CLQ 7l ( U.to[AlV
T/ ( MfcT£
a% 7!(AQV¥
honor thou
let him honor
let us honor
honor ye
let them honor
AORIST.
s.
TlfAWi
a$ Tipvicni
p.
d( Tl/AMtofJLif
TtfAtlVlTl
The English as in th* present ,.
hut not in a continuative
CI? TljAWGVY
sense.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. )
S. vd Tip-a* (a) That I honor, may, or should honor
a? thou honor, mayst, or shouldst honor
a he honor, may, or should honor
ufAiv (3) we honor, may, or should honor
an ye honor, may, or should honor
out they honor, may, or should honor
VOL
\
VOL
P. m
VOL
y
VCi
(l) Contracted from Ttfi.au, as xvpixi from rtpaci
(a) Contracted from Tip.a» r Ti[/.avi; , tijaac^ , ffte.
(3) Oup.ev; or ouys*
CONDITIONAL I.St FORM. Of COMPOSITION.
6 7
I should
thou wonldst
he would
we should
ye would
they would
a. je. f.
should
shouldst
should
should
should
should
E. F.
3.<
would
shouldst
should
would
should
should
CONDITIONAL 2-d FORM, OR CGMPOSITION,
or
ne
COUiV
OfttY,
Ttfi-a , a.Q , a. , op.iy , art , ovr
Participle un declined rifiuvraz and rijueOrrag ?
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
honorin
?<
P.
Koifj.-coy.xi ,
ary.i
a rat
aa§i f
ovtroti
PRESENT TENSE
VULG.
•W,tt«i (i)
I. St FORM.
a, d FORM.
I sleep , or am sleeping
thou sleepest, or art sleeping-
he sleeps , or is sleeping
6uftotff7i 9 o'jfjLtrTi we sleep , or are sleeping
uwTi ye sleep, or are sleeping
they sleep \ or are sleeping
(i) The Author gives the form of the deponent Verb %otp.Sfjtat instead
of the passive of tifi.fi> ; not because tiuS has no passive; but because , in
the vernacular language, the active form of the second class of Perispo-
mena is preferred to that of the first j insomuch that almost all Perispo-
mena active are formed like rip.5. Thus it is usual to say aaoXou8-5>, «; ,
d, etc. I follow etc. ; -rnpS, a? , a etc. I observe etc. instead of dxoXou6-w,
el;, sT; -rr.p-w, st; , el, which would be more correct. This preference holds
very generally ; but , as a sort of compensation , the form of the
first class , that of tjktb . is preferred for the conjugation of the
passive ; and it is much more usual to say rtp.oup.at , or 71p.s101ifx.flU
than xtp.wp.at , which would be more correct, or, rather, more analo-
gical. Thus the idiom of the Vernacular language strongly inclines
to the blending of the two. There are however some Verbs which
resist this tendency , and preserve, in part , the form of the second
6&
IMPERFECT TENSE ( C03TTI]N T tJATIvE. )
VULG.
S. Ixciy.uyw zoijuovu-ovv or ovvt (f)
iKGl/A&7QY KOIIJLO'OG'OVV OT CVM
IKCiy.CLTO , iKClUOVyTClV KQlfiOVyT-&V OT aVl
Vt iK0iy.G>Utflclf ZZCt i UOV l U-a<?Ti OF i<JTi KOlfJLO'J U-0'.<TTI OT t(TTi
txoiucicrvi i-KOiyova -can Or WTfc kciugug -aeri or iCTt
ty.oiy.uYTO tKOiyouvTav y.ci'f/:cvyr-av or ayi
The English ( always in a sense of continuation , or
repetition ) is, I slept , or was sleeping, thou didst sleeps
cr wast sleeping, he slept, or was sleeping , we slept 7
or* were sleeping , ye slept, or were sleeping, they, slept ?
or were sleeping.
ACXRIST.
!?. (2) hioiyy^nv or Yi^mct I slept or have slept
lifag of vQukzg thou didst sleep of hast slept
«0y or /Ojjjft he slept or has slept
rftnuiv or v^mayiv we slept or have slept
ifon or ufejxsTfc ye slept or have slept
rfiwoLf or $ way they slept or have slept
elass,in the passive: *oiji&pai is of tlie number ', and has been therefor®
preferred as a type of this part of the conjugation, in its least corrupted
siate.
It has been observed that these Verbs preserve, in part only, fh©
form of the second class of Perispomena. The vulgar sacrifice the & ,
and change it into o\> , as in those of the first , and have preserved
the a in the present Tense only of each Mood.
(1) The. Vulgar contract m\pt&aw;t lntc ' *oi£cu<r6; an( * sometimes
use the augment throughout. In the 3.d Person Singular and PFurah
if the s be added, the accent must be acute.
(a) The vulgar omit the augment, and say xcijjrifoteecj sj, e*
fy
PLUPERFECT.
fix a > \ I had slept
tc I . thou hadst sleut
t \ *% he had slept
fiX'fiLpw I » we had slept
m I ye had slept
i?X?oir J they had slept
FUTURE TENSE I. st COMPOSITION.
&A-& ; £/J , £J , cytV 5 £7t , OVK KOl^H (i) I slltill sleep.
2,d COMPOSITION.
fl , J JL8lfJL1$-tt , 5~C , ?T , W«f7 , »?T€, CuV
I yLoiy.-uy.on ^ aaui , uraj > uutvx y acue f tivrai
3/
COMPOSITION.
J x.oiy.-uy.oLi , aaou, oltoli, u/Atvx, aavt, uvTOLt.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. )
S. Koiyou (2)
sleep thou.
«f oltcli
let him sleep.
P. a'c w/xe0a
VULG.
Jet us sleep.
aa-Tfc
OWTCU
sleep ye
let them sleep.
(1) The two English Forms, as in the Future of tium , substituting
the word sleep for honor.
(?) Contracted from jtciuaou , as xotaaoSs from xoiuaeate.
7o
AG R I ST.
English as above , but not
ac Kotfjwh in the sense of repetition ?
P. ag yLciun^oiuiv or ovpit or continuation.
SUBJUNCTIVE. MOOD.
«C Kciy^kvv
P.r.ESEHT TENSE. ( COWTINUATIVE. )
VULG.
S. ?* Hojp-Suxi or cv^ea that I sleep (A
«*«' thou sleep
ctrai he sleep
P. »//»0<3t or 9vju-a(rTi, 60-76 we sleep
«V0e or tts-re ye sleep
or eurT«i they sleep
mra.1
JURIST.
tfri$-& English as above , but not
v\$ in the sense of repetition %
y or continuation,
\ evv ovvt
CONDITIONAL TENSE I . sS COMPOSITION".
I.StE. FORM. 1. A E. F. 3.' 1 E. F.
S. vjhk^a \ I should I should I would
ec i thou wouldst thou shouldst thou sh. dst
e \ ^ he would he should he should
P. Yi&K-aLiJLiv ( |- we should we should we would
m 1 s ye would ye should ye should
?0e*.*K / they would they should they should
r
(i) I may, or should sleep, thoumayst, or shouldst sleep, etc. :
sec the same tense of tIja&,
2. COMPOSITION
$' tjtljit K0lfl-1$6i
or
OfXCLl |
v%
or
acai
rM .
or
ecTcti
P. vftuUlY
or
ujuifa
wttfTi
or
ajOe
jj8»yj'
or
&YTSU
PARTICIPLES
w
7 s
English as above.
Present xo/.w eu-uero? , m/uni ? nfjuvov sleeping.
Past KojjAYifA-me, m , ttor having slept.
VERB SUBSTANTIVE.
INDICATIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
o. upon
tiaou
iTfCU
P. fvccOoc
UjJL-OUTTi y
err*
CfVft
UdTi
fe/ ra/
I am
thou art.
he is
we are
ye are
they are
IMPERFECT. ( CONTINUATIVE. )
VULG.
S* Huyiv
WfJ.OVY
I was.
wo
wcvr or
r
WOV
thou wast.
r
T1T0V
V.TOLV,
VITCLVZ
he was.
P. ijulk
UfA-CLSTt ,
tffTl
we were.
m l h }
W&rfl
Kflraore
ye were.
war
hr*v
hrsLV f
mcLn
they were.
(i) For the rulgar changes of * aai into euaat etc, see the present;
Tense subjunetrve.
iiju.iv ,
MM ,
AGRISF.
P.
may.
I was , or have bee&.
th.ou wast , or hast been*
he was , or has been
we were , or have been
ye were , or have been
they were , or have been.
PLUPERFECT.
VX-* > t, i, ccjusv , in j av gtoM , I had been, $££.
FUTURE
TENSE I.St COMPOSITION
I, St E. FORM.
2.dE. FORMo
SlK-O
v^
I shall be.
I will be.
tic
thou wilt be.
thou shalt be.
it
\ ^
he will be.
he shall be.
e t utv
/ o
we shall be.
we will be.
ITZ
1 «
ye will be*
ye shall be,
cvy.
J ***
they will be.
they shall be*
2.4 COMPOSITION
fahu vpoa y wai y wen , fyc. , or oraO- q , tic , J , fy.C.
3. d COMPOSITION.
6fc m , or 6a JJ<ua/, mat, hat , 8$C. , utcS-q , w C > f > §"^ v
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTJNUATIVE. )
S. eo-0 be thou.
Sc hat let him be
P. iijuiQ-ot. let us be
«V v>vk or M7t be ye
«V hou let them be.
(i) The vulgar say g-afaix-a, s;> s, *fc. Without augment.
p
ytfvov
?.
ac
a?
yi/yy; y
yu'vujutv
yitnrt ,
«v
yiirow ,
s.>
p.
p.
a ^.a^
« t'OCi
AORlbT, OR INDEFINITE.
English as above, but not iu
the sense of repetition, or
continuation,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. )
that I be, may, or should be
thou be, mavst, or shouldst be
he be, may , or should be
we be, may , or should he
moLdh ye be, may , or should be
they be, may , or should be
AORIST. ( INDEFINITE. )
English as above , but not ia
a continuative sense.
s. m*-
>tfik-
V
UjU.lV
ITi
cvy
CONDITIONAL I.St FORM OR COMPOSITION.
I. St E. F. '2. E. F. 3.d E. F
I should should would
thou wouldst shouldst shouldst
he would should should
we should should would
ye would should should
j - ^ they would should should
CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM OR COMPOSITION,
£
ciy.iv
ITi
I
r n 1 yjuat ,
vViktior , i
{ (TTOLV-U
YldCLl ,
net . n/jiVx.
w^t ,
, OOUiV , >]li , OVt
Participle indeclinable a
GfTCU
bein:
J
CHAPTER XXVII.
REMARKS OH THE VERBS.
FIRST PART.
OF THEIR ACCENT.
I. The accentuation of Verbs is easy. The Accent is always
retracted as much as the genius of the language will per-?
mit. For determining what and where it should be , at-
tention must be paid to the terminations; since there ar«
some , which will not admit of the retraction of the Ac-
cent to the Antepenult. They are those formed with the
vowels co and n , and the Diphthongs u and ov , ( except
when this last , ev , appears in the vulgar form of the i .st
and a.d persons of the Imperfect Indicative Passive ,
iyfdfou/uLovr , iyfa<pov<rovy. ) These same terminations require
a substitution of the acute for the circumflex, Thus the
Penult of rfiyz is circumflexed ; of r^yo acuted.
i. The Aorist of the Subjunctive Passive is always cir-
cumflexed on the same syllable : vd y^a<p9a> , vd yfoifHuyiv ,
yd y<f%f -3->jt£ ; vol GroL7*}§-.cd uytv , or ovy.iv, rjrt ; vol y.oiyn§-(2 ,
oytv , or ovy.iv , yiti.
3. In Perispomena, or circumflexed Verbs , ( that is ,
in their present and imperfect Tenses , which are the only
Tenses that undergo contraction , or have any thing dis-
tinctive from the Verbs called Barytona ) the accent is
always on the syllable resulting from the contraction ,
t'&x.Tovyw , iwoLTOvcrcy , tzrarov yiQct ; tKOiyoynv , iKoiyart ,
sKOiyaytSz, circumflex, or acute, according to the gene-
ral principles of accentuation. The second person singular
of the Present Tense Imperative Active, is an exception ;
because the accent does not fall upon the contracted syllable:
izrmtt , Grant; riyai , riyct.
The Aonsts *vtqltwol , tTi'ywa ; itarctr^uv , triynSviv , not
being circumflexed, though parts of circumflexed Verbs, are
acuted, and follow the Rules for Barytona , which throw
the accent as far back as possible.
SECOND PART.
OF THE CHARACTERISTIC AND ITS CHANGES.
7 5
i. The Characteristic of the Imperfect is always the
same as that of the Present, as well in the Active as Pas-
sive \oice: yfdpco , yfxtpouca , Imperfect ey^apa , zypottpojuw*
But that of the Aorist is different. The Characteristic of
the Aorist Active regulates that of the Aorist, and Parti-
ciple Past Passive ; and therefore alone demands the Reader's
particular attention..
i. The Aorist Active has , for the most part, but three
Characteristics tr , % , %L : ifa?t\ivru. , I reigned , epuA«£a ,
I guarded , tyfa^ct , I wrote. Thus , except verbs having
one of the four liquids, \, p , v , f , as the Characteristic
of the present in ku , pa , yq , $><y , all verbs , forming
their Aorist regularly, have one of the above as its Charac-
tenstic. These three Characteristics of the Aorist Active
change in the Aorist Passive : thus , o- is changed into ,
or <r9 (i), &0L<riKiv?x, I reigned; iGouriKtvQw , I was governed;
kCici(Tcc , I forced ; tfiict&vir , I was forced : £ into x^ >
itpv'xocZz, kfvhctxQyir , I was guarded ; and \|/ into sp9, typx^oc,
iyfd<pfar. Verbs, having 9 as the Characteristic of the Aorist
Passive , form the participle past in pivoc : ifixri\tvfay ,
(Ix-iKivy.ivoq , governed ; those having <r9 combined in r^lwc,
iGns^w , fiats pivot , forced ; those having ^9 combined in
yy.iroQ , ifjhzxhY , yvKay pivot (2) and , lastly, those having
(1) Always into G G , in Verbs in £ w , TW , 6m , that is , having
dentals as the characteristics of their present Tense : aXtoOco , I spin ;
IkXtttra, I spun; |ylx«c8nvj I was spun; kXcogusvo; ? spun: And in some
few in > pure , which pratice must teach;' as dexofa , I hear; ^cuca,
I heard; 3x069611? , I was heard; axotxr^sva; heard: yj.zioi , I shut ; iVJ.staa,
I shut, or have shut; iyXi'.aHv , I was shut; xXet9p.svo§ ; shut: Also in
some Verbs in &> ; as, (3a9av£a, I torment; Slavic*, I tormented;
e€a(yavi«ye-/)v \ I was tormented; ^afcy,*.-., I think; e^aaOnv , I thought;
S-«/£«<Tuive; , thought.
(2) The Vulgar usually change this Termination of the Participle
7 6
f9 comhined in ^#eyef , with two ,a ( u' fyfaf^W t yf^a^e^f ,.
written.
3. It thus appears, that when the Characteristic of the
Aorist Active is known, it is easy to form the Aorist Pas-
sive , and thence the Participle Past. Attention, therefore,
to the above Rules for the change of the Characteristic
and Termination , with a knowledge of the i.st Person
Present Indicative of a Verb, will enable the Reader readily
to form all the other Tenses. The essential point being a
knowledge of the Characteristic of the Aorist Active , and
that depending on the Characteristic and Termination of
the Present, all the Variations of the latter, and the con-
sequent Variations of the former shall be here brought
together, under one View.
4. Perispomena , conjugated regularly (1) have always 9
as the Characteristic of the Aorist; and change the short
vowel of the Penult (2) into the correlative long Vowel.
5. With respect to Barytona, they either end in w pure ,
or co preceded by a consonant. Those in &> pure , like
Perispomena , have a as the Characteristic of the Aorist ;
thus: ficKTiKivu Aor : ificLdlkiwoL' ukovco vulowx. It is the same
with those ending in So , 0u , to , and the greater part of
those in fa.
Past, -yuivfis, into ppevo; , with two p, and say <puX«u.u.s'vo? , instead
of <pjXa.7u.sv0;, cppafA(j.£vo; , instead of copafy.evcs , from tppacrcrw , I stop,
or fence. This occurs also in Derivatives from Verbs ; and the lower
classes say T o nrpau.jjt.aj the thing, from Trpanrw , I make, or do.
(1) The Word regularly is used in contradistinction to a very
favorite change with the Vulgar , that of the a , the regular character-
istic of the Aorist of Perispomena, into £. Thus, they say fpu-rtaga , I
asked, instead of epcoTYiaa ., from epwr^-aco, a>, I ask.
(2) Perispomena , being contracted from Hellenic Verbs in e'w and
aw , the Vowels e and a are considered , with reference to the forma-
tion of their Derivative Tenses, as the Penult. This change of the
short vowel of the Penult into the correlative long , e or a into « ,
is liable to many exceptions , which must be acquired by practice ;
thus: TjiAiropu j I am able; -rcapawaXw 5 I intreat, I invite , -reapa7roy,qu(jt,ai s
I complain , make in the Aorist x(*iro'pe<r(x , eitayxjMtXesa, swctpaTrovstav »
without any change in the Penult.
6. But, the above excepted, all Barytona ending in a
impure , or preceded by a consonant , may be divided
into two classes.
I. Those which have one of the 3 Labials; & t, or <?, for
their Characteristic , either alone , or combined with
another consonant, and end in Qo , szrw , f» , tttj. They
take vL as the Characteristic of the Aorist : jcpu'&aor icfoorTw,
I hide; Act: ex^a , I Md; ■ tSjt« , I rejoice; in^xj I
rejoiced : y$cl<pa , I write ;• '(y^a , I wrote.
II. Those which have one of the 3 Gutturals y, x, or £
tflotte, or combined with another consonant, and those in
ff<ra and tto) , and some in £«. These take ^ for the Cha-
racteristic of their Aorist : yvKxyu , (pvrAnju or <pv\cLTTcd ,
I" guard ; Aor : eipJXsdfc*' g?askg> , I weave , Aor : '(srKt^a ;
I wove : rf&x a > I run . 5 ? T f4* ? I ran : / Oc^ > or P''X T6>
I throw ; Aor : ep^a , I threw : azs-^yj^y I thrust ; Aor 2
«WfoS«, X thrust or have thrust: ©■>£« , I congeal ; Aor:
tvttfcai I congealed: yplfa or <pf<x.<7&o , I stop, or fence \
Aorll'fpafa , I have stopped , or fenced:
j. The only terminations that now remain to be noticed are
those of Verbs in aw , -jta^vei §• p. These verb?, as has been
already observed ^ preserve , in the Aorist , the Character-
istic of the Present. They change the e of the Penult into
tj; and those in «/?©, the Diphthong a/ into a: (TTi\Ku, I send,
Aor: 'ivT&ka 9 I sent :' rl^a , I distribute j Aor: tfiifi* y
I distributed : frha, I dwell ; Aor: 'iffcnai , I dwelt : Kfha ,
I judge ; Aor: 'ik$a* , I judged: Jottcuw, I warm: Aor :
ijlirau, I warmed : czrtioQ , I sow; Aor: -twuf * , I sowed.
fn the Aorist Passive 8 is inserted between the Character-
istic and the Termination , and the Diphthong u is changed
into a. , whether that Diphthong be in the theme , the
present Tense, as in *&&$& , or be farmed by insertion
of the / m the Aorist Active ; as in <rrehha , wtukcc thus :
ff&iiqw , wnfafct , A. P. , z<raroifQw , I Was sown ; participle
past o-'sraLfft.sv&Sj sown : vr'iKKu, icmiKa. , A. P. , wtclkQw , I was
sent ; part: past, qtolkiAvcs sent.
Some Verbs in m 7 and particularly those in cwa, simply
(TCi ,
t
7 8
change the v into : iIigtmsl, I warmed; e?eoW(W, I warmed
myself, or was warmed ; part: past. 'C^ra^hoc , warmed /
ikftvfr, I judged; fafifav , I was judged ; part: past. *p(am,
judged.
8. Other Verbs in vu , which practice will teach , and all
those in onw, which are formed from Barytona in a pure \
Ly the insertion of the f, change, in the Aorist, the v
into <r, as ; hlvvu, I dress; Aor: A. eVWa , I dressed * A. P^
l^ttSff? , (i) I dressed myself; part: past. iSvptvoc , dressed :
livu, I bind ; A. A. e Wa , I bound; Aor: P. tl&nv } I was
bound ; part: past. Ii/uzyoq bound.
q. Verbs in ova change the short penultimate vowel into
its correlative long vowel : tv&qvq I print ; A. A. 'iruwa
I printed; A. P. itvwg>%w\ I was printed; part: past. Two/urns
printed.
to. Some Verbs in «/r&> change , in the Aorist Active 5
this Termination into a, and take the preceding consonant
as the Characteristic. Such are : ra-afWcw, I suffer; Aor:
eo-jtSa , I suffered: ^afe/W., I learn; Aor: t/caOa , I learnt:
KOLTaKa^cfJvQ , I understand; Aor: ejcaraxaCa, I understood:
KcLXwto > I receive by lot ; Aor : ex«x a » I received by lot :
*to%&?ro , I am , I happen to be , it is my lot ; Aor : ti^x* >
I was, I happened to be , it was my lot. These Verbs, which
are not numerous, but, from the nature of their meanings ,
very much in use , are , most of them , in the table of ir-
regular verbs.
ii. Some Barytona in f vu , but more particularly Per-
ispomena in $m , contracted from fv&a , lose the v in their
Aorist Active: Itfvo , I beat A. A. 'ihifot , I beat, or have
beaten ; A. P. ilcifav , I was beaten ;. P. P. l^uivoQ , beaten :
Perispomena form their Aorist in ma , as if there were no
v in the Termination of the Present, and without changing
the Penult: %t$w, I vomit ; Aor : e^ow-a , I vomited: ov^-co ,
I embroil ; A. A. iyvfxva, I embroiled; jttjW, (2) I pour out,
(1) The Modern Greek lias no Middle Voice. The passive is used
in a reflective sense.
t (2) See Note ung^ this Verb in tke list of Irregular Verbs.
79
or give to drink, as Wine \ A. A. \A^s% , I poured ant : :
wipu , I pass ; A. A. lo^ao-a , I passed. The reason of this
irregularity is , that the v , which also passes to the
Imperfect, is an insertion, the primitive form being in ?«:
foLu , j>«, Ufa , e^fefw, ovf<y , *«f« - v^a. The Aorist Passive
of tiie Perispomena is sometimes formed with 0,and some-
times with <t0.
Some Barytons in \a are found written with a r between
x and &> : Thus, many say gtzmcd , Vcmxra , instead of gtsa-a.^
tffTitKOL
i a. The second person singular of the Aorist of the
imperative Mood Passive always assumes the Characteristic
of the Aorist Active , if it exist , or , if there be no such
tense , such as analogy , if there were , would require ; at
least whenever a- , %L or % is the Characteristic: thus; tnu^nv
makes riuww , taking <r from irifAw* ; tyfdyfar, makes yf*\j*v,
taking -l from tyf^lx; and ETfajS/xOwj I retired makes tj>«&'-
%ov, retire thou, from WfaGfeetz kro^aV8nr , I thought makes
mxiwj , think thou; because, if this verb had an active ,
the Aorist would be itto^jx. But, if the Characteristic he
any other than one of these three, <r , -l or % , which only
occurs in Verbs ending in k© , y.u , yu , ^ , it does not
pass, to the Aorist Passive. This Person of the Tense is
then formed , by changing the 8 of the Aorist of the
Indicative Passive into. «■; Thus a-j^.V^.a , / answer makes
aVtJtf /Bur , I answered; imperative, «.vrU$fow, answer thou,
by the change , of 5 inter: £«rT«/Wai , I warm myself;
Aor: iU-r-i-y, . imperative &?Tu<rov , (i) warm thyself.
i3. In the language of the Vulgar , Yerbs in iv», aoa ,
take -X instead of a for the Characteristic of their Aorist
Active; Kwpua I shear \ A. A. Uc^u^x, Vulg. 'ptouft^x ,
I shewed : Kerreo^, / approach; A. A. Uo»7«wx; Vulg.
-: - 7 ;s, which have not in the Aorist preserve, in the
, tlie characteristic of the indicative : i v t pv , I was rejoiced *
- ;;a::-j, x*:c5 , rejoice thou : ecpam, I have appeared
:5 : appear thou etc , see the list of Irregular Verbs.
So *
iKmtvj/a, I approached. Deceived by tlie sound of the 8*
in these Terminations, where it is pronounced as p> , ( see
page i ) the common People form the Aorist according to
the analogy of Verbs in £«. They follow the same analogy
in the Aorist Passive and Participle Past: thus, from
tJtou'f fc\|/ot , they form, A. P. iv-ovfarmoi , I was shorn, and P.P„
xov^iy.fiivoc , shorn, lilStead of €Kov$ivQyiv, Kovftv/utvot;.
But exoufeuflw , and 'utovfifQwoL differ only in their termina-
tions ; for , if the Vulgar , instead of the more approved,
Termination be taken , and it be written cxwrepSw, it will
differ from the regular form in orthography only , the
sound being precisely the same; since, in the Diphthong
tv i the v before aspirates is sounded like <p. See page a.
TfilRD PART.
5f. Some Present Tenses Indicative, such as Qh'a , t will;
h.iyu, I say; x\a/yw, I weep fyc. when conjugated, lose, by
syncope , a syllable. Thus, it is usual to say Gee, thou wilt 9
or art willing $ Qs,uiv, We will , or are willing ; S-m , ye
will , or are willing-, (fe> , they will fyc. instead of Urni »
QiKO/Jlilr , 0SA.fcT6, fchOVY '. hiQ , KtftlV ,■ A6T£ , KtV , thOU SOjeSt et€»
instead of "KtytiQ , KeyojutY , Kiyiri , hkyovv : >cxa?c , kKoufj.iv %
KKcclTi , xAcd?/, j/zo'k weepest etc. , instead (XiLKatyuc M kx«/-
■yc.ut!' , KXcu'yiTi , KKaiycVV.
We see the Verb thus, losing its characteristic , its ter-
mination and the vowel or diphthong following its charac-
teristic' , retain only its final consonant , or , at most, its
final syllable. This syncope is not admissible , when the
termination consists of a single vowel, or diphthong not
followed^ as is the Case hi the i. st arid 3. d Persons singular:
0{\-&> , Uh'ii ; because , if so , nothing constituting Con-
jugation would remain. Ge is the sole exception; and is in
use only as an Auxiliary.
i. It is by a similar syncope that the imperative particle
«lq is formed from the Hellenic Imperative oip; , leave ?
from dfivu j I leave?
8i
3. The lower classes employ these elisions in Nouns , as
in the following proverb , o xyov^o^at; tKtfixfctv roy oqiy.oyct ,
instead of ° aycv-oopxyot; k/t fiuai rhv ufi/xocpoiycv. fi) The unripe
fruit eater has got the start of the ripe fruit eater.
4- As of general application, it may be well to observe,
that the lower classes have a dislike to v as the termination
of a Word. They , therefore , when the regular termination
requires this letter, elide it 9 and say 70 >arfka&fi the face,
and not 'Grfawurcv \ rhv {aovitx , roy ^afat , instead of /uovray ,
tyxfzv , the regular accusative's. In the same manner ^ in
verbs , they drop the v in y^oyi, y^cx.^ot,ui, instead of saying
yt<x.$ouiy , ty^^cty.iv , or subjoin aii e to the regular final v ,
"as in y?cl$cwi, y$£i^:m, instead of y^l^ow^ 'iy^&^oLv. They often
annex it to the article, which from the sound might lead a
person to imagine the following Yerb to be augmented ,
when it is not : thus they say rov\ /2a?'st« ? I see him, instead of
Sir GtetTo; lit T9vl Uha t I will not have him, instead of^er rh &m>.
CHAPTER XXVIII.
LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. (2)
AVafTa/Vw, I err ; Imp. 1 dy^raivx ; Aor: &pi$TWct , and
r.y.xjrov P. P. a paLp vifjLivoc,
AtouPxi'yu, I ascend Imp. 1 drotf£cuvct \ Aon £vi$w , and
kvuifiwta; Aor: Imp.e xyuffix , availZoiri ; Aor: Subj: yd aiou'£-a ,
(1) If in a good sense, as sjte'p^a^ev would seem to indicate, equivalent,
perhaps , to Our « taking time by the forelock : a if in a bad sense,
to our « eating corn in the blade. »
(2) The Imperfect Tenses are all formed regularly, but are never-
theless given, as likely to aid beginners. The form of the Aorist Pas-
sive in r,v, used by Writers, is alone given: It is easy to substitute
vixa 5 wich is the Termination preferred by the lower classes > and ,
indeed , in Conversation , by all Classes. The Reader, who may be
surprised at the different acceptations of some of the following Words,
should recollect what limitations , extensions , and Changes many
English Words have undergone since the age of Shakespeare ; such
ks prevent , obnoxious, nervous etc.
6
82
$;, r tJ va oWip-topsv, va efvafpitfir, Or ttvaifSfrre , va avaijJofoi-
KorraScavw, 1 descend is conjugated in the same manner,
A'vaipw , I abolish , or destroy; Imp.* ovaipousaj Aon
avaipscra; Aor. Pass. dfoatps0 , nv; P.P. aWpmsvo?*
A'vacTatv6>, I raise, I re-establish ; Imp.* avacmva ;
Aor. avsVnn<ra; Aor. Pass. aVs<7T7]07iv ; P.P. ava<?T7iptiv9<;.
A'xatBatvu) , Vujg. irai9a£vw-, i die Imp. 1 arcatOawa; Aor.
ara'Oav*; P.P. a77o0a;/.p.evo; ; Vu%. ira&OapipEvo;, dead'.
A'peaco , I please; [flip.* and Aor: aps<ja Part. Past.
Kpeo^evogi This is the only Verb that has <j as the
Characteristic of the Present Tense.
AuHzviw, I increase; Imp.* au£ava : Aor: ai^ca , Aor.
Pass. au^Sriv-; P. P, au^jptivb^
A<piv«, I leave; Imp,* aoiva; Aor. a<pvi<j« y - and aoY,xa;
Aor. Imp.* aqrtjjr'e, aosfceTs; Aor. Subj,-va a^viorto, or a^i/.w ;
Aor, Pass. cbsGnv ; P. P. a^pvo?.
Ba£w, 1 set , put, or place , Imp. 2 IfJa£a; Aor. epaXa;
Aor. Pass. IpoXWj P.P-PaWvo;.
Bapaou[j.at ', I am weary, I feel a listless disgust,
( said of any thing irksome , ) je mennuie ; Ioip. r
PapsioupLouv. Aor. epap'g0r,v P. P. Papspt.pE.svo?.
J&s'irto, I see; Imp.* &£J>.£7ca; Aor. sl5a; Aor. Imp.* lSh r
i$lc , ttsVs; Aor. Subj. va • tS-fi ? -/j? , Sp, or , by apha3resis r
va rfe y va $r,$ , va §?).-
Bpsyw, I wet ; ( |3psysi, impersonally, it rains) ImpJ
e(3psya; Aor. e(3psja '■; Aor. Pass, sjSpayj/iv , lam wet. or have
been wetted, as with rain; Ppsypis'vos, Wet, as with rain.
Buvivo, I suck, as an infant at the Breast; Jmp.* gj3u*
Cava , Aor. e(3u£a£a.
repa^o I grow old; eys'pa^a; Aor. sys'paffa. The Aorist*
alone is much in use.
Hvopcat, I become; Imp.' ey'vopuv ; Aor. iysiva ', and
lyiva and syivviy.a; Imp, e Pres.* y(vou, yivscfrsj-Aor. yevoy and
yovsj- Aoj:. Subj, va yeivwor yevwj P.P. ysv/;pvo$ e
83
iaiykavca, I bite; Imp. 1 iSdcfkKt'& 5 Aor. loayx.asa, P. F,
Aeta , I bind; Imp. 1 f£sv« ; Aor. s$Sda ; P.P. Sejjtsvo? ;
see ( hap. 27, Part 2. ]N r . 8,
AtSo> and Afoca , I give; Imp. 1 sSi£o§ and Ijwx ; Aor.
. .a and e^ftwa; Imp. e So< , Sots, or S©<xs , 6_o-:th;
Aor. Subj. va ow<jw and va Jwxw ; Aor. Pass. i&ofb&v; P. P.
E\8yaivu , I go out ; Imp,* spyttulft; Aor. sSyry:a ; Aor,
Tmp. e s,3ya, sSya?;, as if from a Perispomenon, djs-yau-yu.
Compare this Verb with avai^sc'vo).
E'Syaao , I lake away, or sand away; Imp.t EfiyaZfi -;
Aor, I'^yaAa ; Imp.e ePya'Xs 5 Aor. Pass, iSya/.jvrv 5 P. P.
r^- ;.;.y^vo:. Compare this with JJa^Wi
E'p.j3aivo>, or Vulgarly iy.ita.ivto , I enter; Imp.* ty.Sy.va,
EM.7rat.va ; Aor. s^Sr.xa; e^-r./.a; Aor, lmp. e k'/ia , t\LiOt ,
?,<L r yy-z , c{i.i?st6 ; Aor. Subj. va s^S-co , r,; , yi, or lait-S, '?;,
!gj etc. ; P. P. saSacp.s'voc, or sptacrptivos.
E'vo'jvfii 5 1 dre.ss ; Imp. 1 I'vSuva ; Aor. tfcjfu&a ; Aor.
Pass. fr&ufrqv ; P. P. evSuuivoe : see p3ge~8, N* 8. In like
manner, i/.^jvu, I undress,
EVrp£iroji.as , I am ashamed; Imp.* svtjj eirpupouv ; Aor,
svTpaTTr.v ; Aor, ltnp, e IvTpaicou ; Subj. va svrpaircS.
E'cyoaat , I come; Imp.* e^oupLouv * Aor. vfXOa , Yulg.
r:9a ; Aor. Imp.e sXa, ^ars; Subj, va saGco, Vulg. fpOca.
Euptaxcd , 1 find ; Imp. 1 eupscxa; Aor. vjupa , £&p« , suor./.a
and supjxocj Imp. e sup£ , iup£Te ; Subj. va eupto and va siipcoj
Aor. Pass. eupsQvi^ ; P. P. eupTjuivo^ and £upgu,£vas.
'Eyco 3 I have; Imp.* elya : Put. OsXw r/ci.
Zc# , £ti4, 5^ , Cwjisv, £*}Te , ^oOv , I live, ihou etc.; Imp.
fv:0ca; Aor. e&fiaa ; Imp. e %nat 3 £tjts , Subj. Pres. 1 va £fi,
5^5 , £rj ^c. ; Aor. va £*jtffc>.
'H;j.r:op(o, I can, or am able; Imp.* ^xopo&y« ; Aor.
- ; 7.TTopt<7aj without changing the Penult,
H
H^cupw, 1 know ; Imp.t x'^cupx ; Aor. syj&et , from
p.a6aivt).'
Gelco, I will , or am willing; Imp.t vjOsXa; Aor. -/ibCkr^d.
0£Tco, I place, or set; I'm 'p. 1 ifeVa 5 Aor. Ufane ; Aor,
Pass. £T£6viv ; P. P. 0£pvo; o
KaGofwtt ,1 si I , abide , dwell; Imp. 1 cV-*:8oua'ouv ;' Aor.
txaOvjca; Imp. e Pies.* 'xa6ou; Aor. fedftqce'; P. P. xaQod(i.£vo£.
KaOi'Cco, T place , or seat, is regular ; Aorist acaOtrfa; P. P.
xa(kap-£vo;.
Ka&co r xaiyco, and Vul^. xauyw , I burn; Imp.* Ix'ata ,
txatyoe, sxofoya;:' Aor. IxauG« , t r o1g. fxaajfa, See Page 79 ,
K. «3. lmj). e xaifce , V. xa^e. Tlie Present and Imperfect
liave also a Neuter signification. When the Verb i^
thus used' the Aorist is Passive excSfy V. exaT,xa ; Imp. 6
Pres.* P. xouoy; A. P. xaucou, xacpGvJTe; Subj. va xa&;P. P.
xix^pivo? , as if from xa^iw , iu analogy with the Aorist
Active &.&§&.
Kalw, I call ; Imp.t IxoXou sa ; Aor. l*a&Gtt;'Anr. P.'^s.
without changing the Penult ; exfl&saOviv; P. P. xatefffiivo';.
Kaavco and xavw, I do, or make; Imp.* f&epwa , and
sxava ; x^or. exa^a •;. Imp.e najjL'e; P. P. xa|/.<o(xsvos.
KaTatj3aiva> , I descend, like avat^Guvto.
Ka?a}.a(3aiv(i>, I comprehend; Imp.t exaraXapaiva; Aor.
IxesTd&aga , or xa-a^a^a , See ^a^avco.
Kfip^aLva) , or xsg^w,- f' gain;' Imp.t sxepSffiva, exep$i£a ;
r Aor. £xeo5'/ica > and ex£p$i£a; P. P. X£pSyj|AeVo$.
Kspvw , (1) I pour out to drink ; tmp.t IxepvoStfa j Aor,
ixeoaca ; Aor. Pass. IxepasOviv, P. P. xspatfpvo;. •
(1) Just as we say , mix a Glass of^Lemonade, Orgeat , Punch , etc. ,
but pour out, and never mix a Cup of Tea, or Coffee , though v as
generally drunk, they are all mixtures. The primitive meaning of
the word was to mix. The Ancients usually mingled Water with Wine,
as we often do ; hence the progressive limitation ; and the Modern use
• i'apowi as- a -generic Ter,m for "Wi»* ft
-RXata), and xXaiyo; I weep; Imp.* fitXaia and fi&aiya-
Aor. e/.Vauca and ei&aijja; See P. 79 . N". i 3 ; P. P. ySka^Avoq.
Kotttco, I cut; Imp.t gxoirTa; A. A. exo^a, Aor. Pass*
jlepiniv; Aor. Imp* Me , jcqtu^ts ; P. P. xo{/.|/ivo^
Aap.8 avco., and Aa[3atvw , J receive; Imp.t £>.au.(3av<% 5 and
&« t Saiv« ; Aor. IXafyx; Imp. e lajk.
AavOavofAKji , I mistake, or am deceived; Imp. 1 s^vQavo-
[xvjy; A or, £"XavQas6v]v, Subj. va"Xav9aa0w; P. P, 7.av6a<jp,evos
sJffQe xoXXa ^avOaGj/ivo?* I^stc (xeyalo >,a0o; , you are very
ranch deceived , or mistaken.
Aa^atyw , £i; 5 €/c\ I receive by Jot ? or it is my lot,
thou receivest by lot , or it is thy lot etc. Imp. 1 i\%-
yjwa ; A or. sXa^a, See page 78, N. 10.
Aeya>, I say; Imp. 1 IXsya; Aor. elxa; Imp e £1775, or by
Aphaeresis , and the addition of a a' ra;, rare , iu(g to ,
tell it; Subj. va eJsuS-, and vaxw, P. P. irregular %zywj.&
V05 , the aforesaid ? the Person in question.
Ma£ov&>, I collect, or gather together; Imp. 4 Ijjta^ovos,
Aor. £(i.a£fe>£a; P. P. f/.a^<o[/ivoc. The v of jxa£ovw is by in-
sertion, See page 78, N. 8. The 5 instead of <y as the
Characteristic of the Aorist is the only Irregularity^
See pagjB 76, Note f.
MavOavca , and MaOaCvw , I learn, I accustom myself
to; Imp. 1 £[xav8ava, and £p.«6sava; Aor. ejxaOa , Imp. e p.aOe.
See page 78, N. io. The Participle Past alone is ir~
regular , ^ctOvi^svof.
NoioGco , and voiovw , I perceive j Imp.* IvowOa and
fyoiova; Aor. IWwca. The v is inserted.
Seovw , I vomit ; Imp. 1 e?epvoGf<ra ; Aor. eEepaca , See
pa.se 7.8, N, f 1.
S«, £&yco, and £j<o , I scrape; Imp.t e^ouora; Aor. ?&>?«.
Ilaipvw , or rtepvco , I take, take away; Imp.t £'nrccipv«
Aor. iicrjipa ; lmp, e irape , reapers ; Aor. Pass. eTOcpO'iv j
jSubj. voe reapOfci; P. P„ xap(/ivo;.
m
HaV/io, 'fcaQaivco , I endure , I suffer ; Imp.* f^W %
liz&bqffli , Aor. common to both , IWq^a,;
IIspvw , Bnwpvw, I pass , pass through , or across %
Imp.* ^wspvou^aj Aor. arapaca P, P, 7r£pa<7[/.syos, airspaq/ivo^ ^
from ra-paco-pto, by insertion of the v. See page 78 , N. 11.
ribs , I fly , (N) I make fly ( Act: as we say of a bail )
con traded from rrsTawi 5 Imp t |tc£to5?#$ Aor. S7t£ta£a ,
?:£T£ioij(Jiai, I run in haste, fly, Aor. ei^ayfyov ; P. P,
-sTaywivo^. Ail the irregularit'yeotWists in the substitution
of die characteristic £ for <f and its consequences. Sefc
Page 76 , Note i ,
ITviyatvw , Tuayaivco , and Tuayto , I #0 ; Imp.* sV/fyoivse ^
Ixayatva; A ircfiyft Pluperfect, siva 7nq,ya(v§i; PteS.* Jmp.%
7r/fyatvs, ^aye. There is a first Person Plural , without a'V
the particle; Trimev , let us go; instead of ^aytapv' Trayca
admits the syncope noticed Page 80, N. 1 , and it is
usual to say 7cayo> , 7?a; , xa , rcajxev , 7?a-£ , 7?av ; instead
of Tr^yco , TTceya; , Traygi , Trayo^cv , i^aye^e, Ttayoiiy | P. A,
TT^yaivQVTac.
JltvOj , I drink; Imp. 4 £%ygT; Aor. ema , fea ;
Imp. e Trie, ttl£T£ ; Sul>j. va tu& ; whence the Pluperfect ,
el/cc 7rt.sr ; Aor. Pass. ercoGviy, and eiuoGviv ; P. P. wicopivo; s
drunk ( intoxicated. )
17.^777(0, and^Tw, I fall; Imp. 1 ?-^7t« , eWs^pTa , Aor,,
IVreda ; P. P. 7T£(j{/.evQ$ , fallen.
II)v£w , I Sail , hup,* |7cXsa ; Aor. gir^euca.
Ilviyw I dr.own {actively ) Imp.* frcvtya ; Aor, |Wvt£a$
the only irregularity is in the Aurist Passive , which
preserves the Characteristic of the Present e7uviyy,v; P.P,
TTvty^evo^ , or miy^Ayoz, See Page 75, Note 2.
IIpr*<Pio|i.ai j 1 swell ; In) p. 1 eTypw-otr/jV ; Aor. g^pyfcGviy ,
P. P. xp'/icrj/ivo;.
2j3uw , cpuvw ? and <?8co , J extinguish , and I am
extinguished. ( transitively and intransitively ) Imp.
5;
Ikgua, Eo-(k>va, Ia 4 6ouca. Aor, ecjSuca. There is nothing
irregular in this Verb, but the insertion of the a in
the P. P. c,S'j<ruivo£ , as in rWt/ivoc,
2r ) >'»ovo) , I raise; imn. 1 eY/pcova ; A. A. s<y$Ma<ra ; A. P. in
an intransitive, or reflective sense, eV/izoSOnv , I rase ,
or have risen; P.P. S7ptfc>pivo;o The only irregularity of
this Verb, is in the iA Person of the Aorist Imp. e Pas-
sive, or rather reflective, gtt/.ou, rise thou.
Zraivw , and <r*4vco, I erect, fix up ; Imp.* s^-cava and
,IV^va ; A. A. £<pi<Ja ; A. P. fe0$y ; Suhj. va st.Ow ; P. P.
c-^jlevo? , regularly from ^v*Ww«
2t£xw, and ?&xo{£a>', I stay , remain; Imp;* s^cV.ou^ouv;
Aor. e^a67iv. Imp. 1 <r£wc, £e#£T| , and ^acou, s-aOvjre ;■ Subj.
va ^aOw.
2tsIX<o, and <rslvw, I send; Imp. 1 IVeXXa, 2?&Xva; A. A.
f~zik% ; A. P. ig-aX^Tiv; P. P. ^aXpivog -.: See Page 77, N. 7.
2u[x(3aivsi, It happens; Aor. cuvs^ti ( to ay^p s^yixo; , the
Tseuter of the Ancient, Pe>f. Part. , an occurrence 9
accident , event , that which has happened , and its
plural, t% Gy(j$e(37)3coTqt, though occasionally used, have
no analogy with the language, as now spoken, and
must be considered as Hellenic relies. )
Tpip}, I run; Imp. 1 'hpeyjz; Aor. erpsHa, fmp.e Pres. x
'Tpsyjj, rps^STS, Aor. Tp£<;£, Tp£^£ir£, and Tpey_a, Tpe^are.
Tpc6y<o. I e.U ; Imp. 1 Irpcaya; A. A. e*>aysc ; lmp. e <pay£ ,
foyers ; Subj va <pay«; A. P. s^aywBvjv ; whence the P. P.
<payco|X£vo;. Tpwyw, in the Indicative, and va (payco, in the
Subjunctive, are often syncopated , like jcXaty w : See
]>a«;e 80 , third part,N. r.
Tu^aCvw, I am, I find myself, I happen to be; Imp. 1
eTu/jnva ; Aor. fcuya,
X7:dcr^o[;.aL, I promise; Imp.* uizoayjiufiouv* Aoi\ uroc/s-
4h)v; lmp.e Pres. 1 utcocf^ou , bxtiayj^h ; Aor. urroT^scrou ,
"o^oc^gG^Te ; P. P, fooweu-evof.
S3
$a£ta(£oei r ', I appear; Imp,* - 3paivoj^-r r v or auv ; Aor. dcpav*;*
imp. e Pres,* <pouvou, cpawcaOs; Aor, ^pavou,. or rather^ (pavou.^
<pavvjTe.
^euyto, I depart, flee, go away; Imp.* ecpsjyoc ; Aor Q
e^uya, Imp.s Pres.* cpeuys; Aor. ^uye, (puyeirs, and <peuya ,_
^Qav&i, I arrive, has the v by insertion; Imp. 6<p9ava fc
Aor. e<p0a<ra; P. P. (pSast/ivo; , arrived,
Xaipo[Aot , I rejoice, am pleased, Imp/ syaipopi-v. ,
t^atpo'jp.ouv 5 Aor. iyapyy- ; lmp. e ^apou , or rather, ^p ou ?
^apTJTe ; Subj. vayap-co, yjs , $i; Part, ^apouaevo? 5 pleased ,
satisfied.
XopTQciv<«) , I am satisfied, as with food , I have enough $
Imp,* gppTatva; Aur. ^opTcara. Part. P. ^opTcccrp.evo?.
SYNTAX (i)
CHAPTER XXIX.
OF THE ARTICLE.
i. The Article (2) has nearly the same force as in French ;
It is sometimes prefixed to the Participle Past, b Sajuw WHyt
yd &tww$L\M } He who had- been beaten went to complain*
(1) The Reader will observe occasionally a difference between, the
accentuation of what follows, and that exhibited in the preceding
etymological part of the Grammar ■, particularly in adjectives of the
3.<* declension accented on the antepenult ( pro paroxytqna. ) To obviate
any perplexity that might result , it will be sufficient to observe t
that the learned among the Modern Greeks , and indeed all who
pique themselves on, knowing their Language , follow the Hellenie
principles of accentuation, as well in speaking as in writing. Their
example will, in this particular, be followed. The difference consists
chiefly in words declined like , dcv8pcMro« > ^o'cwTrcv , a-fptoc , see pa-
ges 17,19. In general, the Language, here attempted to be taught,
being the language as spoken , no notice is taken of a variety of
Hellenisms and Corrections, which the learned, with reason, wish tq
introduce,
(2) See Appendix 5- !»
a. It is sometimes a relative, by ellipsis; Uv ( « a^Ve; jfafyfl ?*,
.; ^ xyz'&u twtZ ?/ak a«c ; His Daughter Joes not please me,
but I like your friend's. ( 'Daughter understood. )
3. When the Article is joined to a Substantive , which
is itself accompanied by an adjective , the adjective must
invariably be placed between the article aod substantive *
l itoLKoc (plhot: , the good friend ; If the substantive precede,
the article must be repeated, thus; b <pi'hoc b xakbc The
latter phrase is more emphatic. In the more elevated style,
it is not unusual to interpose short, qualifying Phrases ,
between the Article and Adjective ; as, b W tol wcwuxToi t*
Grifiynpoc tfptyftt, Homer renowned for his Poems, or, with
a repetition of the Article, thus; b d(w?oc, b W to, ttompcltcltx
vnfitpnpos. That , or the Homer renowned for his Poems,,
This turn , however, though elegant , as it is bold , ought
to be used sparingly , since it has very little analogy with
the Idiom of the Language , as now spoken ; at any rate i §
far from being generally received , even if generally intel-
ligible.
4- It sometimes defines a number, as forming a part of
another number , expressed^ or already known ; as , aVi
TOL TiGVCLjCl CLTTthlC/. , 07TM U^O. , (T^aV TO IVi y TOL luO , TOL TflZ ,
of the four pears that I had, they have taken one, two ,
three ; in like manner r« 'Iko^olv to ha -^ior tv Ifiyahxv to ha
{uolti ; they cut off one of Jiis ( tw r o ) hands, they pulled out
©ne of his (two) eyes.
5. We may , by ellipsis of the Words licrzcrbrn^ tm&wfrai »
say , I *2.pv-pM , E f <ps<m , the Bishop of Smyrna , the
Archbishop of Ephesus.
6. The Noun of Number hae , pta , h ,ope, is used as an,
indefinite Article , but less frequently than in other lan-
guages of the South of Europe. When opposed to «>\cc H
assumes the article; as, Ivolq otliku toy ockkov, the one injures
the other.
K«S-?/V likewise assumes the article, as
W&wh , give a Para to each.
met eyx
m
CHAPTER XXX.
1. The second Person Plural , in polite Phraseology ?
as used, as in our language , when addressing a single Per-
son : MTa^W //« , Icoitri pv ^uyJ , Papa, give me some .bread,
2. The second Persons singular and Plural are , bj a,
singular anomaly, often found in almost immediate contact
with a nominative in the third Person ; as , n tvyiviia. <rxc
yfyvftic on ai ayavrx. , you know Sir , that she loyes you ;
vi tc,o^'oTyi^ vac Ih rfctvgiTi kukcc to / srociy{jL&L , your Excellency i$
liot well informed of the matter,,
CHAPTER XXXI
ROUSTS OF DUMBER.
I. To express a quantity, the cardinal numerals are ranged
in succession , from the highest to the lowest, without any
Conjunction 5 as , yihioi , cKTaKoaioi , HKocri TitKia^iQ ciffyaGrci ,
one thousand, eight hundred, and twenty four Men. Dates,
are expressed in the Neuter Gender, §- take the Article ; as ,
el AyxfYjvoi eTrn^av tyiv tvohiv tic ra yj^ict TtTcaxovioL wiv/iVTa. ana
X£W7K ; lyzfrdv Tin K'ofivQev (jjaai 7roKKcl ahhet f^s^ia ( ytda-rfOLj
t?c TliKomdvyvxTM , tic t& yj^iQ- (iY.TCLY.osia ukoci Tfia., Tile xUrks
took Constantinople, in the year of our Lord One thousand,
four hundred and fifty three. They lost Corinth, and several
other Fortresses of the Morea, in j8a3 ; x( ona * s understood?
it is even sometimes expressed.
1. The Ordinal Numbers follow the same construction;
t'lC TY!V iK0f.T6(TtriV TflOLKCfTTr.V TflTVJV O kVliGTldtx f jll the OU6 hun-
dred and thirty diird Olympiad.
3. To express many thousands , the substantive %i\t*c$
preceded by a cardinal number, is declined, and the Noun,
(1) M"ons, r David has here, rather unadvisedly, assumed the Charac-
ter of a Prophet , or retailer of Prophecies , predicting the fall of
Constantinople in 1821. I have altered the Phrase,
9 ¥
whose quantity it determines , is put in the same case §
hKorcoai tvo xjkiy-lii; av^wGrxt; , he killed two thousand Men.
4. The idea of half is expressed in two Ways ; I.° a
hy the adjective (ait-h , « , o* , half 7— following the
substantive , with the intervening copulative mi ; acaV*
\to riaf/Vi fcxx xf- urx KX '' i JAJT ' 9 > ^ resi & e & 1 in Paris ten years
and a half; t$&yi Ivo ra-sjp&xec nxl fiiah . ( pi&w )• He ate two
Partridges and a half; II.- f by the substantive liuwv, a half
immediately following the noun of nmmber which it modi-
lies; X H tfimv six and a half: When preceded by a cardinal
number terminating wi th a vowel, v/iurv loses its first syllable,
and becomes .enclitic ; Seepage 1 i.'Wrst pu seven and a
half : it even forces the accent of paroxytona forward ;
thus, liKCL united becomes St*a '/v.isv ; ten and a half; in
the same manner 3 \yd 'y-pu, one and a half; loiMzd \u^v ,
twelve and a half; Tt&tr^fd 'yu/ojt/, four and a half; riatroLf 0.^171/
fMtfidti four ducats and a half.
The feminine of the adjective pmc is also enclitic after
#U: yja.\u«syi we* , an hour and a half, half past one o'clock.
5. The Words fya. and vplg* are generally omitted after
Cardinal Numbers ; Mi tk rm firl '/mtav , he came at half past
pne; &hu dvwcofwti %i$ TaTf Ivo d-mo to ju&wfiifi , fye will set out
at half past two ; ik touq thx r* wafbvTos (AYim the tenth
of the present Month. ( viptfous understood. )
CHAPTER XXXII.
OF PERSONAL PRONOWNS.
1. The Pronoun Personal, when the Subject of the
Yerb , is generally understood, as in the Ancient Language,
Latin , and Italian ; because the terminations of the Verb
are sufficiently varied to distinguish the persons, without
the pronoun; thus Ck^-v , us , u\ I see, thou seest, he sees,,
2. The pronoun , as the Subject of a Verb , is never
expressed, but for the sake of distinction or emphasis; as,
lyw %\ to &\cj k%Qqkv y I will hj no means allow it, or hay®
99
|l so. When however it is the Object of the verb, it is; and if
emphasis be aimed at, it is repeated; thus, y.l pamra/, it
appears to me ; kpiva /A oodnron prt tafuKtg ; it appears to
me that you have erred.
3. The monosyllabic personal pronoun 9 when governed
directly or indirectly, unless the governing Verb be in
the imperative Mood, precedes it ; (A dyuTrz , he loves me ;
p* liltt , he gives me; Imp.e a-yiVc. ^g , love me; ScJcrs ^« ,
give me.
If , of two personal pronouns , in the same Phrase #
die one be directly, and the other indirectly governed,
the latter precedes ; thus, ^ to 'l&xi , he gave me ; 7« toV«,
{ iTttcl) I told it him ; Imp.e ^ ff£ Ty ' TOj gi ye it him; «>g t* 73,
fejl it him.
The Vulgar, however, very often neglect this rule; and
jt is not unusual to hear the following, and similar Phrases y
uld rov , I have seen him , instead of toy tlla..
4. With Compound Tenses, these Pronouns are placed ,
always in the above order , between the auxiliary and the
Verb ; thus , 0&.<a rh flu , I shall see him , I will see him j
i)a roe ayra.(jiMii , He will meet him ; S9e^£ tw ttfyfii , He
would find him; 0a *$ to %ii%u , I will shew it him ;
( to him ) #* t» to VJ ( fc/77-J ) I &>/// tell it him , I shall
tell it him.
The Reader has already seen that, when these pronouns
follow the Verb, they become enclitics; and that on the
contrary , when they precede it, they preserve their accent,
The idiom of the language inclines strongly to the use of
these monosyllabic pronouns after other Words , as after
certain adverbs ; See Chap/ XLV , 1 , 2 , 4» 5 , and after
some pronouns and adjectives; as, ctirbc pa (1), myself; otiToe<m 7
thyself ; clvtoq its himself , ubvos ,«« , I alone fyc
5. It has been observed, Chap. r XVI , N, I. , that the
.Modern Greek has, properly speaking., no possessive pro*
(1) Tli e Vulgar dyop the y and say £ T0 ' 5 ^.ou , octo's^w, drro; 7ey»
3 J
ftoun, but substitutes the genitive case of personal pronouns*
following the noun, as an enclitic; thus, h (pihor, ^ ; my"
friend ; tvxr $ihor, u.< , or has ,«» <pi'h6s , one of my friends ,
6r a friend of mine.
tloX TOY (fihOY ( U\i , GX , Ttf , F. TY:Q ^lrig.
yaQ y a-uc, Tw, or t*.; M. F. N. Plur.
I have seen my j thy , his , her j its / Friend Sing*
our your their Plur.
6. If accompanied by an adjective , the pronoun may
preserve its place after the substantive , but its more ele-
gant arrangement is between the adjective and substantive ;
thus , ul-oL toy kxkov (DtKcy pat i more elegantly , iiloc toy noe.h.'oY ( a*
ffhoy, 1 have seen my good Friend.
7. The Personal Pronoun , thus constructed is , by
pleonasm, put after certain substantives including the Mea
of exclusive property in the subject , as of the hands, the feet;
file eyes of a Man ; thus, ™ 'Uo-^oiv t* xh™ r« , fx tt \x^x r* 9 .
they cut off his hands , his feet. The continually recurring
habit of employing this genitive has doubtless originated the
pleonasm. The use of this pronoun as an enclitic is \
consequently , very frequent, which, to obviate the neces-
sity of recapitulation , the Reader is requested to bear in
Mind. A new example of it will occur in the ensuing
Chapter.
8. By means of a demonstrative Pronoun preceding the
substantive , the Greek reaches the following energetic
Phrase in old French ; J'ai troupe hier ce mien bon ami,
nearly as energetically expressed m good Modern English,
I yesterday met with this my good Friend »l^x l^U tQtov
r'ov xocxor y.v Qi'kcv. We often add a old »', expressive not of
age , but of length and cordiality of intimacy ; and the
Phrase is , then , I think , more energetic than either
Modern Greek , or old French.
9. Some Authors use the Genitive of the personal Pronoun
of the third Person , without elision of the incipient syl-
lable , and say, and, more particularly, write, uba re? yt-uv
*»7*' rof ft km KbTuvy I have seen his , their , Friend,
io. The CoinpoitiKt Personal Prdhbiin rZ k'ojm ft* , <n>\ $*,
follows the construction of the Simple iyd , aw , «utq? , but
it is more polite : Thus , instead of saying , ky lh toy
yruffliK KaAa , thou clost not thyself know him well } it ii
Usual in courtesy to say ; t« ^y* ay Sey rep yrofifa kx\ql , or ,
in the plural; rw xoywo-ac ^tw yvQ^ri kuksl , you dont
yourself $fe. Thus also , speaking of a person present, in'
the tiiird person , t« *cy« tw rh tltiv ex®h , M. r .
( this Gentleman ) saw him yesterday* considered much
•more polite than avrhs rh itlt.
ii. When this Compound Pronoun follows a preposi-
tion , it drops the Article; Trny-outa M kbyv <rv , I am going
to your House; ifX 9 f JLm ^ K ' Y* ™% I come from your Houses
CHAPTER XXXIIL
Of THE RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRO&bllft.
I . In the Relative Possessive Pronoun b iWc p? , mine 4
the Adjective $/jwc expresses the idea of possession , sl4
observed fn Chapter XVI, while its relative force is con-
fined to the Article, which , as the substitute , refers to
the preceding Substantive; thus, in the following Phrase,
yd ro frifikiov /am , nal va to tlmh <rv , here is my Book , and
there is thine , or yours , the second -ro is elliptic , and.
refers to the Substantive fii£\iov , in the preceding member
of the sentence ; so that , to render the Phrase complete i
it would he necessary to say , w to QiQkiqv ^v , ko.\ vd to
10 MOV G"d filCkfoV.
1. When this adjective ej/koc is not preceded by the
Article, it indicates possession iirelatively : thus avrh to
•GtfitJor that tliKov jam , this book is mine , ( belongs to me )
uvai iliKoycru uvtq to ufohoyicv • Is this your Watch ?
3. The Adjective eWc, preceded by the Article and fol-
lowed by its substantive , serves only to increase the force
of the Phrase , without having any character of a relative ;
thus ^ vol 70 iliKov (jlm &i$kUv % « thare is my Book*,- is more em--
phatic than vd rb Ifiuuv ( wv, there is my book. If still greater
emphasis be desired the adjective may be placed after the
Substantive , vd ib Q£k!ov rb ituir ju*.
This adjective is often used emphatically in the sense
of our word own ; thus , i-z-fpHh d^e tx TTz&iy. r» , more,
emphatically aVo rd thud™ 7tailrJ , and still more emphatical^
ly , two rd thud ™ id Trails , he was betrayed by his owo
Children,
CHAPTER XXXIV,
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
I. The three Demonstrative Pronouns, aJroc, >*, ?, tvtoc and
ImhcQ always require that the article should be prefixed to
the indicated Noun: thus a-Jrcc b a^ac, t^to; b a^ac , this
Man; aJrj? >j yurxlKx , this 'Woman; k^oc o arS^ac , that Man,
Ixtitti -a ywotTkz that Woman , the article is indispensable , as
the pronoun alone would not adequately express the indication,.
For greater elegance the pronoun is often placed afier the
noun; b avspas wtoc , b dvlpxs IxCivoi-.
'2. \vrbc and Uihas are often substituted for Personal
Pronouns of the 3. d Person. They in that case have no
Article following them, but are succeeded by a Verb refer-
ring to the subject they , as personal Pronouns , represent:
auToc tihdt , he is come} iitiTtos uh rh dli\(pbv [a%g , he has seen
our Brother.
CHAPTER XXXV.
OF TlIE PRONOUIf RELATIVE.
t. The Pronoun Relative i b l-row answers to our Rela-
tives who which, and that; i%woa rh ywx7xx rm qtoiolv \eye^,
I know the Woman of whom you speak: &q rh ar^wro? ,
h b.?o7os dy.ih.wi p% ipirct > did you see the Man who spoke
to me ?
d'ffTtc is confined to the more sustained style of writing r
9 6
ytupffyk toy crfya'rov oo-Tiz h*K$t e^Oe'c j Do you know the Mail
\vlio ( that ) came yesterday ?
oV» ■, indeclinable , and agreeing with all persons and
genders, in both numbers, is of very frequent use, as a
Relative, particularly by the Vulgar j and in the colloquial
style : ai yuwjKtc on* tlla , the , Women whom I saw.
2. In speaking i) the first syllable is often dropped : t»
X^tI '** F* '^>ief , the paper you gave me ( or that, or which
you gave me. )
3. Some Writers place the antecedent after the rela-
tive in the same Member of a sentence, thus; i$eiifo rh ottoIov
KiynQ mbfuwov , I know the Man of whom you speak , or of
what man you speak. The indeclinable particle hvrZ cannot
be thus used 5 and indeed the construction is , by many
Writers, thought to have two little analogy with the Mo-
dern Idiom , and to savour too much of Pedantry to bt
imitated.
4. The Modern Greek has several correlative adjectives \
SUCll as TOffe? , ocrot; ; tqiStci; , o-frojoc : i X il r ' ocry ! v tv%w 07r,v Kdi
a dlik(po<; t» he is as fortunate as his Brother; il'vcii nat o\%o[M
701* toq 'czjoTov rev tile*, he is still just such as ( just what )
I saw him.
CHAPTER XXXVh
OF THE REFLECTIVE t'RONdU^f*
t. The Reflective Pronoun is substituted for" the siniplfe
Personal Pronoun 9 whenever the verb governing it expresses
the action of the subject upon itself: thus , dyxTra. r'ht
iolvt'qv r\s , he loves himself, and in the feminine^ dya-tra rov
taurbv rw , she loves herself, ym^i'i toy lavr'ov um , know thv~
Self; and with prepositions \^oni\n\ \ivl toy iwtbv vac, think
of yourself ; v\(auq %h tyivvvi^n^Lip tic to? koo-juiov cicc toy tdvrov /ucc£.
We were not sent into the World ( born ) for ourselves
alone, The simple monosyllabic Pronoun would in all the
above Phrases be a solecism ; and it would be improper
to say j yi®$i 4% } yfinfy hi vu The polysyllabic Pronoun
li not, under similar circumstances, more correct, accord-
ing to grammatical analogy; but, as it gives a better
"close to the Phrase than the monosyllabic, it is admissible^
as a substitute for the Reflective Pronoun ; and one mav
say indifferently lh tyivvlSypiv lid tov tcuirov fidg y or Ih zyivii-
fjyijuiv oix y]ju<xQ.
i. The Compound Personal Pronoun, r« xcy« om , Without
Article, may, after Prepositions, be substituted for the Re-
flective Pronoun : <pfbvTt{i lid hoy* o-h, %h kyiwyiSvipciv lid ao-jvmvc,
to Uxtxkcc&x cctto Koy\s [ax , think of yourself ; we were not
bom for ourselves ; I , of myself, understood it.
CHAPTER XXXVII.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS*
, i. The Interrogative Pronouns tig , ^o7oc , are construct*
&I as in English: rig JjkS-i ; Who is come ? zrolos r» to t/Ve ;
Who told ( it ) him ; za-olog iTwi av-rk ; Who is he? zxoix tTvii
( Trai*, vii ) oiVTVi ; Who is she? aroiog 'cccr'QLVTVg toy ilti ; Which
of them saw him ? Iwo-i ^ to fiiQhiov , give me the Book ;
■zroHov ; which? ( Book. )
i. These Pronouns are also used as Relatives : lh '£%iv$a
hi i/m tivri , I know not what he told ( said to ) me ; al
sfUTwi izoioc, Jk8fi , he asked who was come; ti%iv$ug vrbaag yj~
hiding (i) ifyUvtn; Do you know how many thousands ( pias-
tres ) he has spent?
3. The Interrogative Particles tt^ , tt'qti , nS , 5^c.,
follow the same construction : i^w^a &Zg to t-nipu., I know
how he did it , lh ^ iTzrav tron uxk , thev did not tell
me when he came ; vfcwpiv «r» iv^yi , they know ( or it is
known ) where he is gone.
(i) Just as we omit pounds, because the nominal coin in which
we make up our Accounts. Piastres , as pounds , are always under-
stood, unless, from what lias preceded, reference to other coins be
distinctly deducible*
o 8
4, The neuter r/ , used either in exclamation ', or inter-
rogatively , is constructed with Nouns in all Genders?
Numbers and Cases : ri avfyuvot; iTvai uvr'oq ; What Man is
this? ri ywoCiKOL tTmroLvrfi; What Woman is this? ri fya uvat;<
What is the hour ? In exclamation ri u<aiu ywaTxa ! What
a beautiful Woman ! ri wjuoffx -arailia ! What beautiful
Children! ri xa^ocfo n$b ! What pure water!
Instead of zro? r and ri , ( except ri in exclamation )
the Vulgar use ri hoyns; how ? in what manner; of what
kind ? ri hoyvc rb 'ixay.i , how did he do it ? ( or make it? )
kwaOa ri hvyw fb 'UafAi f I have' learnt ( fou-od out ) how
he did it; ri \oy% w^emro's ihw' olvt'o;. What Maa of What
kind of Man is this ? Hzvfo rl hoyHc thai ctvros a^G^utsro^
I* know **V*a£ /*/*£/ 0/' ( £/ze ) Man he is.
CHAPTER XXXVBL
' OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
i. Of these nxnk is more in use than ik : it has ge-'
nerally a negative sense. It, in fact, answers to dur one y
body , person ; for if negatively used, to he correct, a
negative must be added , as we add no, thus; lb rb nh^u
xdaic , no one , 720 person knows it. It is sometimes used'
affirmatively ,, thus ; rh tilt v.dinit; , somebody saw him;
and sometimes interrogatively :■' Ik u a xavu'c ; Is any one
come? It is also used with the Imperative Mood, thus:
ac rev vrtxw xx\«/c let, some one take ( hold of ) him;
o( fxrv rh -ridoyi y.dnir,, let nobody take ( hold of ) him.
a. The Neuter riven is of very frequent occurrence ,•
as an Interrogative , wilh,. and without negation; thus ,
tXuc riyron; ( vapor f/Vyfc ) Have you any thing ( to say to
irie')? maybe answered, according to circumstances , af-
firmatively , e^fij , vai - pdhnrra ; negatively , W £^<y - oyj ~
rforori. In like manner it is very usual to sajr, Si* £*&> 7%<?rt,
I do not wunt'f ' wish for ) any thing,. lit ula ri*or* } I did
2K>t< jee any things
I, ki,uwwec % ^ , 9v expresses the idea of an iiideterriii-
Viate quantity : r.jJlir KxjuTrocot kt^avroi , a considerable num-
ber of ( 'a great many ) Men came ; t*a£i:, **/ lyon
Ksif/wUih tf«f«ta , (i) he played , and lost a good deal of
Money ; nzp.'rwft 7t^o( a Considerable number.
(I'voiot , trik j o-roiev. answers to bur whosoever, whoever ;
it requires the indicative Mood, when referring to time
past) orfoiH tc inn* tilpaM whoever said it was mistaken:
it may be constructed with the indicative , or subjunctive,
when referring to time pfeseilt, oirmc to x<yv, or hiyr; <r<pxh>,ti,
whoever says so is in error: but invariably with the Sub-
junctive j when referring to the future : ottom to s/Vjf ,
$i\ii to jMt&oiuM , Whoever* may say it will repent ^
■shall repent it.
4- Sometimes , t6 give a still more indefinite turn to
the expression \ the particles *ai aV are subjoined : o-rotn
xxi av to s/V«, $* to juiravoidoYi whosoever may assert it
shall repent it*
In the hiobe sustained style, writers use J'rr/c ; osth; koli
at i*«« , whoever he may be; oc t k *«< iV tc wV*T, whoever
may say so, fyc; o,ti km <*.v um , Ih i%a lUaiov , whatever
he may have said, he is hot right.
5. These pronouns may be governed by the Verb :
ar*ft ottoiov 0s'w;f , take which you please, will, wish (may
wish)', HctMi oiTiQihyt . o^ti kx'i a\ Qihvc , do whatever you
like : they sometimes , to increase emphasis , are placed
at the opening of the Phrase : o,ti 0«m# , jca^e , do just
Whatever you pleasei
CHAPTER XXXIX.
OF THE OBLIQUE CASES.
FIRST PART.
• OF THE GENITIVE.
i. The Genitive after a Noun Substantive in Modern
Greek, as in other Languages, indicates possession: b vM
(i) Itotia^e;, in the plural, is used as oiir generic Term Money.
TOO
t~« (pikY (jlm , my friend's Son ; o Avroxfd-ruf rue I'Wa ton:, Tfcs
Emperor of Russia , See Chap/ XXXII , 5.
2. It is used in speaking of age : Tftar x?' om7 vai M
an infant three years old , or of age ttocuv x?' ovav twcu'i
how old are you'? «kw« r|>/<ap, twenty three, ( Xf' 0yuy under-
stood ) These and similar Phrases, are elliptical in most,
if not all, languages.
3. It is also employed to fix a point of future time;
6s*.'ea oVaK$j>su(& tyiq ml/lit $ m , I shall many ^ or he married
at Easter, and, in the same manner, tv X& u i^eaiis the
ensuing year.
l\. It supplies the place of the dative , which exists
only in a few Hellenic phrases : We p.v -^api , give me
some bread ; Ivan, tvk 7rx^oc tv vt$v£v t~ Ka.vp.et* , give a
para to the poor blind man; tv Kiyco , I tell him.
SECOND' PART,
I. The Accusative ',■ with the preposition ik , is alscr
Used to supply the want of the dative case : Key a iU- toy
qii.ov pv , I say to my friend ; and without a preposition ,-■
{ittcl 7ov Ttufyicv vol ehSvi , I told George to come*
We may therefore indifferently use the genitive , or
accusative, and say pv eWe , or pi s'Ws, he gave me ; pv
yaiviTai, or pi yalviTai, it appears to me ; Tv-xeyw or tIv Keyu ,
I tell him. The accusative appears to be very generally pre-
ferred, and indeed, in the plural, it is in exclusive use; thus it
would he a violation of the idiom of the Modern language,
as spoken, to say rm 'Hukx , I gave them, We %y , give'
them ,- instead of rvt, tWa , We" rvs. The genitive plural
of the second person does not exist in the Language ;
and that of the first , being a dissyllable , cannot precede
the verb ; the accusative, therefore, of both is of necessity 7
the only case plural that can be employed : paq iWi , aa;
tt7rt' 9 he tald us p he told you , It has been observed, in
3<M
die declension of Pronouns, that the accusative plural of
the Pronoun p ersonal of the third person , r«V , joined to
substantives, as an enclitic, expresses, as well as the ge-
nitive , the ida a of possession : thus , we may say, indif-
ferently , o Tan j>«c ray, or o Trxrtfac t«c , their Father : the
genitive may be more elegant and correct perhaps ., but is
by no means in general use , at least in .conversation.
2. Some Verbs active govern two Accusatives , one
directly* of the Thing, and the other indirectly, of the
Person: S/Wxa to vaili rd yfdjupard , I teach the Child to
read; rhv erWe v^rdvi , He put Kim on ( on him) a caftan,
3. It sometimes marks a particular part : ( the prepo-
sition xara, in, with respect to, as to, being understood,)
Kxfi iTvcj k'okkivx tcI uctTicL voce ; Why ( how ) are your eyes
so red ? tovq tci, they pain me, i. e. I have pain in them 5
( KCLTCL TV. jUOLTIOC. )
4. The Accusative case expresses the circumstances of
fiine , measure, distance, &;c. , by the ellipsis of Kxrd :
toy tl^hivcru Ukx xf ord ^ 1 served him ten years; h*.§t re £fs5t/,
he came in the evening; r^tc $o'$yfc tm i&lo^dla , three
times a Week; rh a^p.^ov , to day; frjufyxv understood: avrh
to ^cofiov iJvoli fAXK^tid CC7T ihd lixx yJ-hhia this Village IS ten.
sniles hence ; Ti^avh t° ytyos, a German born, or by birth;
rrovov uaoti juxxfyTtfoq 'cltt olvtov ; how much are you taller than
he? (Mav (jTr^XfAY.v , a palm : thus also , by ellipse of the
preposition ik or Kara, the accusative may, like the genitive,
mark a point of future time ; 8exw vac ta-wxefOE r'm aKKny
KVfixKviv , I will come and see (visit) you next Sunday:
by ellipse of the proposition lid , it marks the price of
of a thing ; iTrdrKwx to dxoy'ov /uk houio<na yfoaict , I have
sold my Horse for two hundred Piastres ; to nybfctcra. X'' K!CC
yjmicL ; I bought it for a thousand piastres,
5. It signifies the mode of action : Trnyxlw yiiiKo , yia\o f
1 coast it , I go along shore ; ty put^d narfkia. Trnyatvw
yuvid , ycdnd. Small Boats go , sail, make from, point to
point: of similar import are evafftrx, one by one, lvo } Ivo 9
two and two, by twos , or in pairs.
TQ3
G. It als* indicates the matter : : ytpdrt nfo , lull q|
Water ; er^uivo ^d$xi<; covered with 'matting; u/a x^a n^c,.
q pup of Water ; crot {wyaft u7to%yi^tol , xa\r£a/c , a pair of"
shoes, stockings ; era x$?ra$/. t*jW a troop of children.
7. It is also used to signify an arithmetical proportion :
Hiflma. IfKa to. tKctrov , 1 gained ten per cent.
8. Adjectives of the three degrees of comparison , in^
the accusative plural, are often employed , without pre-
position, adverbially: IkQtc <*fy* >, you are come late, **&#*£
xxhx , if.0Ly.cx> , a<j)(Yiy.a , ykwyo$ct, , ttokkx , you djd well , ill %
unbecomingly , quickly, much; also with the preposition
Kami : tffitLt kztcI 7TohKoi iv^^i^Kf/hci: , I am exceedingly pleased
hxCdltn: KUhkr,Ti(-ct , xiip'oTtfoi y KzhKifTet , you read better %
worse , exceedingly well ; bfAihiTc kclkkivtu. , you s,peat ^ad-
mirably.
CHAPTER XL,
OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.
i, When the Comparative is followed by a substantive^
the latter is put in the accusative case, with the preposi--
tioil, a tto , Qr Trapa : n Ttf/uxvioc ejfrai piyuMTtfci c^tto , or ?raf~
7w Ta-hiJoLv < Germary is larger tlxan France.
1. Relatives and Adverbs are also put in the same case,,
with either of the above prepositions , though tx^x is most
usual: olvtqq ilvai 7Thxo}<L>T$foi; Trap o,ti (tto^Iio^i , he is richer
than you suppose: e^uaGe 7^^10-7 o%ox iraf sera 'ihWiuo*v<Ti , fie has:
learnt more than he has forgotten, Sometimes the relative
is suppressed, and, in that case, **»« becomes a compara-
tive conjunction, like than in the English, equivalent to
« than (hose things which » £,«a0e wepwo-erefa -rxprc ihw/Libvwt ;
but, to admit of this, the Subject of the two verbs must
be the same : thus turn* twgiutk>9q ttx^ol <ttox«'{i(tQi , would
not be Greek : it , indispensably , must be *tf on
3. The Verb, when the same, is, in comparative Phrases,
suppressed in the second member of the sentence : an^o*
r%tufu rripv'rfoife wxp i-^k , he {aiows more to day than yes?
ioS
sjerday, instead pf ntf oV* vfaptpv lyQk 3 u^it <p?criuo7tjoc Trugx
TTfuTOL , I am more prudent than formerly , i. e. mtf b y 7.i
4- The positive , with the adverb yrhiov , more, is often
substituted for the comparative : a'Sexf 6f <r« e/^a/ 7r\£oe p^ou-
^oc ana « , (aVksra ) your Brother is more prudent than
vou.
5. It has been already remarked Page 3 1 , N. 6 , that
the adjective in the superlative degree is used absolutely,
Relative super onty is expressed by the comparative ,
preceded by the Article : l .\\i\Kij.t; yjrov avlfuoltfoc elrb t«c
WkhKwzt , Achilles was the bravest of the Greeks ; The
Vulgar sometimes add the adverb *hkw to the comparative ,
just as the lower classes in England often add more :
n vkIqv ofjLOff'oTtfv yvmjKOL aVoAac, the most beautiful ( the
prettiest ) Woman of the whole.
6. The personal Pronoun is sometimes put in the Ge-
nitive Case, after the Comparative : yyu^t rh *.«.KKYiTifa <r*
( learn to ) know thy better ; aaVej uvxi piyuMTtfoc ^« , he
is older than I : this construction is confined to the en-
clitic personal pronoun. When the pronoun, not being a
monosyllable, cannot become enclitic, it must be constructs
ed in the usual manner, with the preposition T*j>a, or d*??.
CHAPTER XLI.
OF THE VERB,
OF THE VOICES.
i. The Active presents nothing requiring particular
Notice ; but the Passive has many peculiar applications
demanding the Reader's attention, (j)
2. The passive Voice.
(1) There is one rare use of the Active , that require* distinct
notice , or the III. d Rule for the Peculiar use of the Passive Voice
might mislead ; particularly without the restriction , I have added ,
* in a very few instances. » The Phrases there instanced , fall rather
1 ® J ^
1.° Is used in a Reflective Sense, i. e. the action is upaia
the Agent : eilvyepan , I dress ( myself , ) or am dressing \
Zvfi(Qfii&i , I am shaving. ( myself ) Yery generally the.
reflective pronoun is used , when reflective action is in-
tended thus , dyoL'&ci rov iclvt'ov tv, he loves himself. When
however the action is upon the Agent's person , the Pas-
sive is always preferred: 'Mvo^ai , I am dressing ; idifyjjuxi ,
I bathe ; Grhvvo{u.ai , I am washing ( myself ) xTy&pat 9
I am combing myself , fyc.
The Passive Voice in a reflective sense sometimes go-
verns the Accusative case: «rao-cut/,3^a/ nva , I jostle, brush
against some one j jUW vnxyyq vol GuctaoLhiidvai tvs of'rOfwVvf 9
t&ulvi thou cKofiukoi , dont go. jostling, or brushing against
people, for the plague is about.
II. ° It very naturally passes from a reflective to a
reciprocal sense : thus £yy.ci&w$t*$«. , we embrace each
other , we mutually embrace ; li^h^a , we beat each
other; aVra^o^o^eOa, we meet , ( each other ) 8$c.
III.° It is used also, in a very few instances, to express
what we get done for ourselves by the agency of another ^
as in the following formula of the Greek Marriage Cere-
mony , when the Priest places the nuptial crown on the
heads of the espoused , b Ixkoc t« 6e« M/^awx artfctv'onrc/j ri'p
ixhviv r« Giy Giolcofccv, the Servant of God Michael weds
( takes as his wedded Wife ) the Servant of God Theodora 3
here (rn^avonrai properly means that , by the instrument-
ality of the Priest, Michael places this crown, the symbol
of their nuptial union , on the head of Theodora ; and
that , thus , he makes her his Wife. Thus also , in com-
under the Character of exceptions than examples of a General Rule v
and ought to be accounted Idioms ( Idiotisms ). The Active Voice is
sometimes used , as we use it, in such Phrases as the following, wheref
others are employed to act for us ; I am building a House , Ktj'Coj
fva (j7i7i-t ; I am sowing my Lands, $nvm tk xwp«<p«* fwu ; I am planting
a Vineyard, cpuTsuco a^weXt ; and also in some very few instances where?
we do not j as ? I have ordered a Coat; cprtavw e'va (fo'pej*^
ICO
m%n Conversation , b rait ecm<para9w$ rh rawe .ff^c/z a cue.
has married such a one, i. e, literally , has crowned,
ner\ or caused her to be crowned for himself: and again
fn'r e^wp/«r8wj has divorced Aer , has , by means of the com-
petent Authority , separated 7?e/' from himself : the sense
being active regulates the government accordingly.
IVo Sometimes, though purely passive , i. e. in sense
as well as form, it governs the accusative ; b Azfuos icTiovify
rbv fy'ovov , Kcct rnv Zp>M cctsro txq eda«c i* vvrrxb^q DariUS was de«
prived of ( his ) throne and life by his own Subjects.
CHAPTER XLII.
OF THE TEASES.
I.I have thought it more advantageous to the Reader,
in the English Text , and in the short notes severally at-
tached to the different Tenses , in the conjugation of ypa'<p« ,
to do as much as- possible towards exhibiting their force ?
instead of reserving the matter for detached explanation
here. See particularly Pages 47 ■> 4°* ■> 5o , 56 , Text and
Notes. I have not been so sillily pedantic as to think it
either right, or feasible, to change the Nomenclature of the
Tenses, though I have affixed to the immemorially received
Names, second Names or Definitions indicating their force.
Men who have already mastered the difficulties of reconei-
Jing Names , however inappropriate, to the objects named,
feel habit of too much value, in aid of Memory, to give it up a
without a struggle. To young people , however , the habit
of qualifying the first Names, by always repeating with them
the second , could not, I think, but be useful. little re-
mains to be said here ; but as examples are of great force
in illustration, and I have given but few in the conjugation,
I shall here subjoin those given by Mons. r David , on the
distinction to be made, in expressing continued^ repftedtive,
or habitual action, passion, or state of being, and in express-
ing their single occurrence.
jo6
a. If I advise a person to practise writing, for the purpose
/of acquiring a good hand , I say ypa'pe lid yd ^afyc naxa ,
which means write often , repeat ^e <zc£ of writing , till
you have learnt to write well. If I request a person to
write a letter to one of his friends , I say -ypa^e t« <pix\< <ra ,
and mean , that he should write once, and not repeatedly,
Should I say y?d(pt 7 « <p/a« m , the meaning of my Phrase
would be, continue to write to , keep up a Correspondence
with jour Friend. In the same manner, in the subjunctive
Mood: crpeCTe/ vi ypa'<pv;c $id ?« ^a'O^c xa^a ^om must write ( con-
tinually, frequently ) to learn to write well; t^ttu vd y?<x^r< t»
<p/x« ov , you must write ( a letter ) to your Friend, If being
jhungry, or thirsty, I ask a person for something to eat or
drink,I say luai Mi yd ma f mi yd <pdyco (i), give me (something)
to eat and to drink ( now , this once. ) But, if I speak of a
permanent obligation to furnisfr my food, the proper mods
of expression is, lilt (m vd mm xai yd Tfuyo, give (^continue to
give ) me my necessary supply of foocj,
3. Tins distinction must regulate our use of the mv
conjugated , as well as the conjugated part of the princi-
pal Verb, in forming the future, and conditional Tenses,
as I have already shewn , Page 56, at the end of the
Passive Voice of Tfdtpo. Thus Um ™ yfd^u , or tid r« y^d*
^w , I shall , I will write him ( once ) a letter ; 8?\&> 7*
yfu<pu or 0a rv y?d<pu , I shall , I will keep up a Corres-
pondence with him.
(i) These latter examples require a caution, or they might perplex
tjie subject they are intended to illustrate. The reader must bear in
mind that c^to is not a present Tense , but part of one defective
Verb , used as the Aprist of another defective Verb. They are , with
this caution , being expressions of the most familiar use , the best
possible illustrations ; as they shew this admirable accuracy to be
an intrinsic character of the Modern Greek. No Goody Herbseller ,
either in Athens , or in any other corner of Greece , but would
detect a Foreigner , by the confusion of these Terms , and smile at
\t , as a most barbarous solecism.
107
4- In speaking of Bodily sensations ,'" particularly if of
any duration , the Aorist is often used where we use the
present: Ufi/w<ra, I am cold; irjvTafck', I am sleepy; hre/rop* ,
1 am hungry; ( i.e. sleep , cold , hunger have seized me. )
5. The Participle, past in composition with the auxiliary
tX u > forms also a kind of indefinite past, and of pluperfect,
applicable only in speaking of a thing present, or present
at the time spoken of : <r« ocflirer olvtol 7 a iawrbtiz ; rd t^y
lixKty f u-Yx , do you like these melons , I chose them my-
self ; J7A9e KCLl Ui tjfZSrxZt TCL TrtTTOilCC fJM , TOL OTolx TO. U")(CL %lCLKiy
/uhx, lie came and took from me my Melons, that I had
myself selected ; tifiup.*<ran 7} zTttiv IiIxckxacz ; do you re-
member what the Tutor said? rb e^« y^u^yov , I have
written it down , I have it written, or in writing. Some-
times instead of this participle , the neuter plural of a
Verbal adjective , having the force of an adverb, ( see
Page 102 , jN t .° 8 t ) is substituted for the participle ; thus,
writ ifyz<T7yifia.fnc \%%i duoiKTa. , TJiis Tradesman ( shop-
keeper ) is open, that is , has his shop opened ; ( t»
tfyudTy^i ctvoiyuivc* ) t^u FfahiarTct IS shut ; tcv \yu clmvtx ,
I have heard of him , heard speak of him , heard his name.
6. A conditional Phrase is in Modern Greek always
constructed with the Imperfect Indicative : ay tlx* vrafc&te ,
vbihct Tkr ludii tic twV sttg^c, (1) (/'/had Money I should
give it to the poor, or if I had had Money I should have
given it to the poor. See page 56.
7- For greater brevity , the Imperfect is sometimes used
(1) The above Phrase might be translated « if I were possessed of ;»
and then , both hypothesis or antecedent, and consequence would
clearly appear to be in the subjunctive Mood : again, a though I had
been poissssed , or should have been possessed of the riches of
Croesus, I would not have given him a Para, must in Modern Greek
be translated, K.au *' *h* 8X«»« ~t'k 77*p*£es rov K:ei«y, <Hv r.OeXa Toy
&0}<7S>. i'yT3 it% U.0V6V TTXS*.
in both members of the above conditional Phrase: ai %f%$
8. The simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood Active,
preceded by the Auxiliary Particles, Si vol or 0a, express con-
jecture: Au70f f£CC bjUihU VVyjCL jA IKlhw TVIV K07ri\htXV , Ofe K« T^C
dyoLTra. That youth is frequently talking with that Girl,
he must be enamoured of her; rov J'W Shippim , G& r?t
i^aOe tsi' &<VaV 7S (pfh* rv , you saw that he was distressed.,
he must have heard of ( learnt ) the death of iiis friend.
However superior the Modern Greek Verb is to ours, and,
I believe, to that of all other languages of Europe in the
expression of continued action , under every modification ,
the great advantage of our unequivocal precision in
expressing Simple Futurity and necessary consequence ,
appears strikingly in such Phrases, as the following , when
written , and destitute of the aid of emphasis ; oVo/oc ™ &'V5,
%'i-hu 7o (tiToiHidiu. It may be guessed in this latter Phrase ,
that a threat is intended ; and that therefore the proper
Translation is « whoever may say so shall repent it »
equivalent to, I am determined, that he shall repent it.
This is , however, by no means , necessary , or certain ; for ,
if the speaker be not himself concerned , but merely pre-
dicting the consequence, it ought to be translated « he wilh\
See page lq.
9. The future tense QIku is also used to express conditional!-
ty, when referring to a future hvpothesis, vQim when referring
to a past, as; Uv }o 'Uxviv, WiKtv to ^era^/aVr,if he had done it
lie would have repented i^. This may be translated either „
whoever should assert it should repent it , or would
repent it. The meanings are very different, though express-
ed in the same , and therefore in a very equivocal manner,
in all Languages of the South of Europe. The first transla-
tion , « should repent it » includes a threat, equivalent to
J would make him repent it. The second , « would repent
it » , expresses merely the prediction of a necessary conse-
quence , unconnected with any idea of the exercise of
\olition , on the part of the speaker, or of compulsion towards
the Person spoken of. See Page 5o,
fgjtj
CHAPTER XLItl.
OF MODES,
FIRST PART.
What has been said on the Tenses embraces alt that is
peculiar, with respect to the Indicative and Imperative
Moods.
OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE,,'
I. Preceded by the particle Is , instead of vd , it suri-
plies the place of the Imperative Mood. n£juw , let us go ,
without particle , is the sole exception.
•2. It is also used in interrogation, as to the advice, or wish
of a person , by ellipse of 6!m/£ or Ktyui; Not al KoL^r^iva-cb k&co ;
shall I wait, for you here? Na 7rnya.hu drro^i ui rbv x°f* v i
yj vd x.aitib<ra \tq o-ttuti ; Shall I go to the Ball this evening, or
shall I stay at home? rl vd aa^cj ; what shall I do? ft ret ti#a ;
what shall I say?
3v This turn has peculiar force, in refusing compliance
with another's wish, or in rejecting advice, as absurd ; iy<*>
yd liQLvmca qtq v&yjti , nxi roc junv vrayco clcv yooov , aurs tivxt to
iaovov d.l'Jyy.Tov , Stay at home , and not go to the Ball , that
is out of the question. This Phrase has a spirit of Irony
about it.
4- This Mood is also used in expressing a wish, by ellipse
of the optative particle S^iwon , Heaven grant : thus, b &oV m
idq <fwri(jy] ; May God enlighten you , <pcojid vd tvc tk^ty , May
the flames consume them ; kqmo xf^c vd 'x?y , evil betide
them.
5. The conjunction «V,- and its derivative adverbs of time
9%cti , bvoTOLv when, whenever, as soon as; also a<p v from
what time , as soon as ; eJOu? ott\s , immediately that, lsc.
are constructed both with the Indicative , and Subjunctive,
but; invariably, with these essential restrictions : that, when
a particular fact is spoken of, they require the Indicative i
iro
crav tilt rov ixfyw* "yvyt ; as soon as he saw the eneniy , m
fled whilst on the contrary , when what is customary, what
•usually occurs , without specifying a particular instance, or
fact, they require the subjunctive ; otolv &« nh f^fyft, fivyti,
as soon as he sees the enemy , he flees. ( usually , in speak-
ing , but improperly , fllies. )
In this latter Phrase , the Aorist is used, where we use
the present ; because the acts are consecutive , and not
simultaneous-, he sees before he flees. When the acts are
simultaneous , the present is requisite in both members of
the sentence : qtclv aot^drai , foyx^l 11 > when he sleeps , he
snores;
When both antecedent and consequent are definite ; and
past , the verbs must be both in the indicative : b KcoVcxf
CTQLV XXTtlvKCOVi TH S ' P 'UfAbttVf . 'lyilM {AKTVTQQ lit; «JtWC aS SOOIl 8S
Caesar had enslaved the Romans, he became hateful to them;
As a general Maxim, according to rule , thtis , or at
jcaTa£v^«o"Ji t/c t«c vvu-nQKirat; tm , yinrii juiiktcx: iic aurwc.
Whenever any one enslaves his Countrymen , he becomes
hateful to them ; ottoioq , whoever , follows the same con-
struction ; oVo/oc xalaWac™ a , r , k. Whoever enslaves 8$c.
When olar , d? 5 , fyc. 4 afe followed by the Aorist sub-
junctive, in the first, and the future Indicative , in the se-
cond member of a Phrase, it indicates two future consecu-
tive acts, or events : otoly %uwimni Q'thti &oi<; krivkipty % when he
has supped , ( that is shall have supped ) he will come
and see you.
When by two Aorists, two consecutive past events ,
to be translated by our pluperfect , followed by what
M. r Murray calls our Imperfect , as in the above Phrase ;>
i Kouva? &. C
6. The Greeks sometimes , form a Compound future, by
adding the Aorist of the conjugated verb to the first form'
of the future of e^w , thus- ; fchu 'ix €l &*""»'*« Hq tolq mtu, bet
will have supped at eight.
If* the verb be active, and the object of the action be
expressed i they form a compound exactly similar to our
Hi
6wii : OfVw 'lx il ^i*fo-vpwov to Gt$tJwint ai^ov^ I shall have read
your Book to morrow.
n. In French , « when the declaration of one person
is made by andther, that is, » in an indirect Phrase, after
a past tense , the present is changed into the imperfect ,
and the future into the Conditional. In Greek, the Tensed
and Moods suffer no change , under such circumstances ;
and. we say, indifferently, in the present, h?yti , on U\u t«
luc, •jrafaW , orxv \a% o;a t* x% i(jo7T)iv (0 U dit ,• qil U kit
donnera de V argent quand il aura recu ce quon lui doit,
he says that he will give him Money amen he receives
what they owe (is due to) him; and,: in the past, tTW ,
en fchti Ttf luati •srapa'SfcC , qtclv ko.&a ojcc 7* Xftucrixv . U a dit ,
quil lui donnerait de V argent , quand il aiirait recu ce
quon lui devait , he said that he would give him Money f
when he received what they owed ( was due to') him. (2)
(.1) This Phrase affords a good opportunity of noticing that th#
indefinite expressions, on dit, it is said, People say, they say , ar<f
almost invariably rendered by the Vulgar in our last mode : Xsfeuv ,
Xeid><r&^ ; Xe^exat , ^m^stron, are more refined.
(2) By whatever difference of Tense, the above Phrases may h4
Expressed, in the three languages, it is evident, that that they are ,
in all, equivalent to , « he says , that when he shall « « receive, etc. , r
he will give etc. » and « he said , that when he should receive etc.
he would etc. » When the nature of the Subjunctive Mood is philoso-
phically considered, that, like the Imperative, it necessarily implied
some modification of futurity, inasmuch as obedience and consequence
must necessarily follow their correlatives command and hypothesis,
these striking anomalies of the three Languages are easily accounted
for , by an acquaintance with the subtHty of the humari Mind , and
the very different, though nearly equivalent means, by which, under
very varied circumstances, it reaches the same ends. I have thought
this opportunity of illustrating what I may have to say , in' the Ap-
fendix, on a very perplexed subject, too good to be allowed to slip •
have therefore given in this instance, an exact translation of Moris.
D. s Rule and the original French of his example; though , without
such an object, the Rule, to apply to English , must like some others,
have been entirely remodelled ; for after what has been said on the
peculiarities of the Modern Greek , as to the future , and' conditional
Tenses, Pages 5o and 108 , § 9 ,- it differs nothing , in principle , from
the first part of Rule 6 , though the example is transposed.
SECOND PART,
OF THE INFINITIVE MOOR.
I. There being no Infinitive in the Modern Grfeek , iii
place is supplied by the subjunctive; Uku vd wm\ je veux
Loire; that is to say, is used, in the three Persons, as the
French ii'se it in the i. d , <Sf 3. d for they can use the in
finitive only in the i. st ; je veux boire , and employ the
subjunctive in the i. d and 3. d ; je veux que tu boives, $£Vd>
id ttivq , je veux qu'il boive Uxu vd my ; whereas the Ancients
would have used the infinitive in the three Persons ; bibere
volo , te bibe're vblo , ilium bibere volo; 7riiin fixhcpu^ -nidv
ill (&~hQjUOLl . 7TltlV txvrov €'*?yc l uai (l)
'2. The Neuter Article rb is sometimes prefixed to the
Subjunctive , together with the particle vd , as a Noun ;
and the Subject of a Verb, as we use the Infinitive: u-,m
xahh to va. txGrcQdvn r/c lid tyv ttoIp/Iqi t* , it is noble ( comely )
to die for one's Country. This construction facilitates the
iise of whole Phrases as Substantives ; thus , to vd dv-S^M^ ,
KOLl VOL 6lda.£/l TIL] KOLKOL TOL 7T0Llbl0LTX , OLVTO llVCXl KOLKKWTiPOV tTT^OL VX
td x°&wy . It is better well to train (nurture ) and instruct
(i) The English in this exactly follow the Ancients; I wish to drinks
I wish thee, him, her, it, you, them, to drink: so in the plural,
We wish to drink, We wish i thee, him , her, it, them , to drink
This comparison with French may serve to abate , somewhat .
the prejudice , which many have rather hastily taken up against, the
Modern Greek, when it is observed, that what they have deemed
clumsy exists , as a very extensive anomaly , unobserved, I presume ,
by the impugners , in one of the most cultivated languages of Mo-
dern Europe. There can be little doubt, that under advantages ,
devoutly to be wished , the Greeks will gradually raise their language
to a rank not at all unworthy of the unrivalled Parent ; and will
probably unite many of the pre-eminent privileges , and much of
the fascinating naivete of her Infancy , with the peculiar Graces of
the Offspring : for it is most certain , that a great part of the in;
definable naivete, and playful simplicity of all Languages is due to
the exercise of strong Minds, and quick and brilliant Imaginations^
among the' lower classes,
n3
Children than to indulge ( fondle ) them ; to vet dycura xa-
ttis rr.v Gr«7f/Sa, avrr, thai i gt%(*tM &.^nv\ , to love one S GoUIllrj
\% the (i) first of Virtues,
THIRD PART.
of the participle;
i. Tire Active Participle undeclined agrees with all
numbers and genders, though not with all cases ; for it
tan only refer to a nominative, which is usually the sub-
ject of the Phrase : olvtcuq at yt/»a/klc £hi7royToic_ rev ki'vIvvov 'iyvyat ,
these Women seeing the danger fled ; r« -sra/W ^kittovt-x^
ih a'fxvSa, h^ou^av, the Children seeing the Bear trembled.
It is not the same with the present passive participle ,
Which being declinable, in gender, case, and number,
agrees, with the Subject \ agtcus &1 yvtaukit , ffffivptwic re*
kiyIv>oy . tfvyat.
2. Whenever the undeclined participle, or the participle
present passive , refers to any other noun, than the sub-
ject of the Phrase, it is used absolutely , and expresses a
(i) Good as a Grammatical Example , and an admirable moral
Maxim from Cato , or any other Stoic , among the Heathens ; but
Christianity requires one other Virtue, at least , to have precedence,
the love of God , as the only solid basis of every other Virtue , the
onlv firm security for the performance of any of our Duties towards
bur Fellow Creatures , to which latter the qualifiying word Moral is
usually most improperly limited. Silence is by many thought equal
to consent. Stability of Morals , without Religious Feeling , is what
I cannot understand ; Mons. r David is perhaps of the same narrow
understanding with myself; but many of his Countrymen, and of
my own , I know , have long since shaken off these , as they think,
puerile , vulgar prejudices. Did not Arlstides feel accountability to
the God of Nations, who maketh empires rise and fall? Did he not
aet under a much higher principle, when he nobly rejected the time-
serving expediency and treacherous baseness of the laxly moral pa-
triot Themistocles ? I know thousands of my Countrymen consider it,
as it truly is , amongst the first of Virtues.
8
i.4
circumstance attending the action : the participle passive
declinable is, in this case,' always in the nominative: ara^aourrjtc
(tyo) ) cItto rrir %fivfvffr , tyttvi atKrju.bc , on nry quitting ( as
I was setting out from J Smyrna there was an earthquake,
eua/uoc is the nominative of the Phrase ; o/Iolq viatic tic To x®$' lov
ixccy To an fa i /uxs , while we were in the Country our House
ivas burnt ; KoAfoptvos aiTc % k To 1fOLiri{i > hhSav o! <pi\oi ts i
His Friends came, while he was at Table ; vwyoLivdpivoi avroi
tic To x a ?' 0Y i ^ £ T° Ko-fx&i t^, their Vessel arrived while they
were proceeding ( on the road ) into the' Country. In the
three first Examples, To car fat , ol <pihoi , To xctfci£i , are the
Subjects of the Phrases.
CHAPTER LXIV.-
OF PREPOSITIONS.'
a7]/\ or olvTc for, in exchange for , instead of , required
a genitive , ph a/laarcS/fyc komov dfll kolkQ , return not evil fof
evil ; d-Trhrnatc <piw cot?? i%$fi ; you have acquired a friend
instead of an Enemy, aVn rl yd for hrcu-wc, Tv vC^Xnc instead of
commending you insult him.
In composition , it signifies ( against ) ctmjcefycwf , op-
posite; dvTtixicc, the reverberation of the Sun; i. (before:)
aVr/Vfo^Gef, the day before yesterday ; 3. ( Imitation y
counterfeit : J dvTiv.Ktili , a false key.
Atah (from, by, ) governs the accusative; this preposition
indicates ( the point of departure / ) 'i$x o P LOLl d&i rb vr'aw,
I come from the Town ; — - — 2. (The origin, J avry i k&k;
<sra$dytTxi dwl rd e'mwjW ? this word is derived from An. 1 Greek;
To thufict a<aro Toy <pfhov pv , I have received it from my friend ;
tl/jLardTTo %y -ww ; ( I am/'/ om sleep, ) I have just awakened^
lam just, (hardly) awake - — -- 3. (apart:) w/aWV aVo to
X*fh ^ e him by the hand ; — 4- ( abstraction ) $V«c aVo
7kto to nfb % I have drunk some of this water ; woiec dno lo-ac t*
%kaf*t; which of ( from amongst ) you did it? — — ? 5. ( the /nat-
ter: )xvtt« «V» piwyp*, a cup of gold ( a golden cup ) yi/udfa
1 1 J
&h rife, full of water; see p. 102 , § 6. — * — 6. ( the efficient
cause : tt*&* : - ; -'~^ '■"' *ty<**, he died of thirst; tmlw Qprnr,
of fever • €*%? wmtiQn «tVo ^w A'%?hM<z, Hector was killed
bv Achilles; ixffyfht tesrl % citot %; he hid himself
through fear; 7. ( division, allotment : jea'Os s-t^t/ s^ej
aWo '"-/a rr/Jaa-ra, each House has three Stories ; ( is of
three Stories ) % lt77rtcv ( * v*/ ) &s»d€fca -, fsa& , g'i^c&z rhn^: ,
tt'^tvt kci-tIi Z7TQ Tfix yfofjici rlr y.xhha, the supper co,??.? twelve
Piastres, we are four, that is three. Piastres a head; (three
Piastres therefore fall to each) -8. ( an epoch pas %)
lie la\ Sw etc* T* ya»/ti«, two hours after dinner; aV« jcrec
thenceforth : aV« rvfa , Jtai £/'c to §£«c, henceforth ; Thus,
in dates , the genitive also ; awi Xfifftv, after Christ ; ik fa
y/ wa cxra/tcTia aVi Xf^ 7 ^ 1 1600 after Christ; ol-to xz.to£om.c
noaiiv , fr°™ the foundation of the World ; 9.
( time ) cIttq gfctlns , at nightfall
In composition aW , marks, 1 . [separation, ejection)
a 7 s!;m a , I throw away , reject ; a*™** ; getting up from
his recumbent position , as a Man from a couch or bed,
a Hare from her seat, <%e. , — — 2, Privation : ) aVarfip^ec
inhuman; 3. ( cessation :J sVi^aya?. they have finished
eatm^; aTtvz?-*-' a Uxxuff/a^ the Mass is finished [ the church
has chaunted, the Church service is over, )
Aia • this Preposition governs both genitive and accusa-
tive • with the Genitive it signifies, ( through, across , by I
W irr&iTWfAOL i-r'ifzsn Idlm irehiTziaf, the army passed through
the Citv : vhh hd fytfis , h* Ukx-jt.; , he came by Sea, hy
L an d-- — _ 2. it indicates the [means) &£%' corefxa &nt S
&*« f&, I sent it you, by ( means of) my servant : we may say
in Greek Id ^ww ; With the Accusative it indicates i. st
( the final cause : ) %*p* to Id yf^i u* , do it for my sake;
.ATTiUn hi rn* vuTfiloL , he died for his Country ; *yk$§urcc
raZra -rx t&idz Id tIt eScxfel fin , I bought these books for
mv Brotlier ; Id cropa tv Walfa e\s, *) &afanaxu p in tlie name
of your Father ^ for your Father's fame's sake , I intreat
you* Tx^hvu , Id d pd% fym yxwmwe , he travels to acquire
foreign languages , — — 2. ( the efficient cause h uphdh
n6
ilvarvx^i , he has become unfortunate through Idleness /
( or Carelessness ) ; al \7ra1yil hx to (p'^ci/u'oy <r* , I commend
you for your behaviour* e/^ua/iyyuAV, tyyvtl>y.ai h'avTbv, I pledge
myself for him ; 3. ( the end: ) ipfotvtrt hd %* U'okiy,
lie has set out for Constantinople; hot tt* thai olv\o VkctQciGy;
whither is this Vessel bound; — — 4- ( the subject) ow
upihQvQLv hd Tr'ohiuLoy , they talked of nothing but War ; 1/ eac
fcxfvtlcu h olv% ; What think you of this ?
In composition it signifies, through) thoroughly, distribu-
tion ; it implies also intenseness of the simple.
E/c ( in , into ) requires uniformly the Accusative; kxQouou
tk % Kfijbfrain , t keep my bed; vyyaivco s/V to ^^oxuoy , I ant
going to School,
By ellipse of the Accusative , it sometimes appears in
immediate contact with the Genitive: wycum tU ™ 'OUovby.* ,
I am going to OEconomus', to' ctWt/-, house, understood.
KolIol, governs both genitive and accusative. Witli the
Genitive 3 it indicates opposition, contrariety : avTcc uyi'hwi
xolJcc cm , he spoke against you; %1'vri 7roh\d Kurd tcov r^aiKar ,
he said much against, spoke much to the disadvantage of ?
the Greeks : With the Accusative , it signifies in , or at r
and expresses conformity : tccff \v.iaov %* xaifor , at that time
xefldlov TfOTTov. 7K7cv y in tliis manner; xa\d %; vfywc, according^
to the laws; xald %v yvcoym yx % in my opinion ; tafia. (rvyfitfiwk,
by accident, accidentally.
In composition , in addition to the above senses , it
augments the force of an adjective : KUTa^n^ , very dry ;-'
tf«?'xc7r%0Q , very white.
Me , with, requires the accusative, and indicates union:
irtryaivw f*« aJr«c , I am going with them ; and the name of
the instrument or matter, with which any thing is done :
yfdyco yX ri xovhJhi, y.1 to fjLihdvi , I write with the Pen r
with Ink,
Mcra, after, requires the'accusative; flat 'ikfy ynd 7fc?«-' vu'ifan f
he will come in ( after ) three days.
In composition it signifies change : to lyndnmva ,
I- repent it : ( I have changed my mind about It ) :
«*7
pi.7 (l$'1kkq , I change ; fjaroi^xivu , I change position, pasf
from place to place.
Ea*a, contracted from k$avoi, is used only in composition ,
.and indicates reiteration ,&s re, in English: jSMsrw I see ;
%a.va$\i7T(j) I review,
ITa^a, than., and also , against , as the inverse of kxtol
according to* admits only of the accusative: lh iTiz -ruf iibiti4v 9
I have seen no other than him; Trap <pv'<riv, against nature ,
wtLfd tvc v'oum; , against the laws.
It is sometimes a conjunction , and always marks dif-
ference , aS CLKKOL,, (ACt y but : llV fJM TO U7TtV (plhOQ GM , TTCLfd
6 dlihfbe fjLM ; it was not your friend, but my, Brother who
told ( it) me; Sex dtau crotpfa , cra^a loxw'trotpoc , he is not wise,
but thinks himself so; llv rlv hKoracriv Olkkoc , ifdod Hwof , no
other than he killed him : here the accusative does not
follow rafct, because it is., in this instance, a conjunction (i)
and not a preposition. It might without solecism be re-
garded as a preposition , and the accusative put after it ,
tiV 70V tOKQTZiCKJtV CLKKOQ 7T3{> 'iXiTyOV blLt tlilS WOuld lead tO
ambiguity , which ought to be carefully avoided.
This preposition is oeasionally seen constructed with a
genitive , signifying the efficient cause ; j3/£a/w rynaxJliv
mtfft 7v relit , a Book composed by such a one.
It is sometimes purely intensive : iJvm vctod ttokkol \u\bc ;»
lie is exceedingly silly , an exceedingly great fool ; and in this
case often retracts its accent , and becomes paroxytonon ;
era pa 7rohXa ao>ao?.
In composition it preserves analogous senses of change,
opposition , intension : ttjLfaLiofioc , illegal ; TrafaSdiva ,
/ transgress ; to. va.^nhbm , he exaggerates ; avrd ro £/-
Qhiov fxl 7rocfAfbu . this book pleases me exceedingly.
Ufo\ before , since ', requires the genitive ; wp w'mi ypifQr
five days since.
(i) If not a solecism, it does great violence to the plainer princi-
ples of grammatical Analysis to consider it a preposition. Habit very
naturally , as in our own language , leads to the Offence ; but it
certainly is a great offence against precision and perspicuity, wliicll
are virtues of the very fin>t rank ; in writing and speaking.
u&
It has in composition the same sense: TfopQdw, I antici-
pate, arrive before, get the start of.
Tlfk, towards, governs the accusative only ; Ttaydlm tt(oq :
xvtov , I am going towards. ( to.) him l£id , nfe t*"Iq&% x&^'oe,
on the right, going towards that Village;
It has the same sense in composition : nfwrxakS' , I invite^
(call towards ); i Yly.rfic o-«c tt^kxm:, your Country invites,
you ;- 7rf07Tfixo % 1 run towards , I have recourse to.
rVsf, governs both genitive and accusative : With the-
genitive it signifies, ^c^/or the sake of, in favor of: b kfoc
%'oX Q s ciTTtfavi v?nr. Tve woLTftlog , the sacred Band ( Battalion ).
died for their Country :. u?ri ttokko. jVep £#«., he spoke much
( said many things.) in my favour; In this sense , it is tfo&
inverse of kutcI.
With the Accusative , it signifies beyond , above: dvrh
to' '(coov £# unlf 7vV ^riila. x$'o™t ; r l us animal lives above thirty
years ; ^->y>i J/rsp rd Itxz/avjvx he exceeds his limits, he goes:
beyond his Sphere ; It preserves in Composition the same
significations: ^^aanilpuxai %v F^kkclIoc, they defend Greece;
liTnopxird rx oftot ; he exceeds the limits.
Other Prepositions are , amongst V/riters., in use in
Composition of Words , and are sometimes met with,
detached; but these all savour of Hellenism , and their
senses, and governing influence must be sought in Hellenic-
Dictionaries and Grammars,
CHAPTER XLV.
Of ADVERBS..
i. Many adverbs admit of two modes of construction, ac-
cording to the nature of the Words with which they are-
united. I.° When they are followed by a substantive, or pro-
noun , not monosyllabic , they are connected, by a preposi-
tion , governing its usual case : II. ° When followed by the
monosyllabic personal pronoun, the pronoun, without pre-
position, is in the genitive, and as usual enclitic ; Such
are pxty , with ; noyrd , near ; irxva upon ; vttokxIco , un-
der ; oV/<r<» behind; e/^oV, before: Thus ; with the aid of
a preposition, we say 0a tray a petty pi %v <p,t\ov pv , I am going,
I shall go, with my Friend; h cuthybg ^ nrov ttovrd t/'c ipi* my
Brother was near me ; To o-Kctpvl uvea vTrokofia tig ro r^ot-ni^i ,
the stool is under the Table; otariva. i*i rh w^tm , behind
the door ; rh ^hkira iurrfog tig tpivot 7 I see him before me ;
with the enclitic , thus ; Qx vrxya petty r« , I shall go with
him ; tth*-<pk p* Irov xovroi pv. My brother was near me ;
etvTvi yi KC7ri\hcilh tvef K"2ppta.v x*? iv >i7r 0LvQ ty}q this Girl has riot
a charm about her ; rh w$w vvroKctra tk , I found him under
it ; asr' o'sr/o-fi) r« , behind it ; ph irt^xatg aw tpvrfa pM , do
not go in front of me: the two last preserve the preposition,
but it precedes the adverb,
2. Tf/yJfv, or Tpyv^Q around , is, with pronouns, con-
structed in the latter mode only ; r$iyvox pv , r$iyv?v p&g ; it
may, with Nouns, be constructed with an accusative, pre-
ceded by a preposition; Tf*yy$H tig. ro" vttyiti, tig ro dpTrtht p* ,
around my house , my Vineyard.
3. E w wf , till , unto, requires the accusative, with a pre-
position ; lag tig rh xfcivby , unto Heaven ; though sometimes
before Nouns, and invariably before other Adverbs , the
preposition is omitted ; "tat <w$ior , till to morrow ; tag r'ort,
till then ; "tag vrbri ; till when?
4- The indicating Adverb vol, there, lo ! behold ! is
followed by both Nominative and Accusative ; by the fpr_—
mer , when the word is of more than one syllable ; by
the latter , when it is the enclitic personal pronoun : v&l
b dliKtpbc o-y , there is your Brother ; m rov , there he is.
Followed by ©■«, it marks astonishment ; p Wx^x-itxKtutg
rbtrov, \tl <r ro %a<ro- t o-y ro t$aKot\ vd Try liv ro Q'lhtig TTktov , you have
so often begged me to give it you , T have given it you, and
now forsooth you no longer wish it. ( will have it. )
5. The adverb of time vrort , never ; with what strikes
me as singularly happy brevity , and a most graceful
energy, assumes the monosyllabic personal pronoun, as an
enclitic ; l\v rh ilia wort p* , I never saw him in my life ;
J ox*
We arrive , perhaps, at something very near this energetic,
turn , by reversing the natural order of the Words « In my
life, I never saw him ; and in our impassioned stile , by a
beautiful reiteration ; Never , no , Never , shall I see him
more. The Greeks would here like ourselves , reiterate ;
vot\ 7TC76 {am , lh $d rov tRS. Again , never in their lives did
they harm him, lh rh 'Ifihz^av -nonk r«c, the sentence com-
pleted would run , as in English , ttotI tk th <W tw? .
6. The Privative Adverbs x u Vs > $''X?>fi > without; take
the Accusative • li^uc vmv , without judgment , x&fii Tre ¥ K
without Talent.
•7. The Interjection oIkkoi^ovov , Alas ! is followed some-
times by the preposition tk , and its case: olkkoIuoyov i'k i^ha \
woe is me ! to ye ! bravo ! sometimes by file enclitic personal;
pronoun ; wy'i qm\ bravo! well done! bravely! and in the,
plural, ilyi TWf ! English the same as in the singular.
8. Met is used in oaths, and solemn asseverations, and ne-
gations ; ju.ee 7vv TriaiLv {am } Um rh fio$m % t ^ Faith, I'll, support
( stand by ) him; /ud rh Gm Ih rh %Bol , On my honor, As,
Heaven is my witness, I have not seen him.
9. a'c is constructed with both the Indicative a.n& Subjunc-.
live; with the latter , independent of its imperative import^
it indicates permission , consent to something that has not
yet occurred ; with the Indicative , adherence , assent, to,
something already effected : thus , when I say , ai rh ndpy ,
let him do it, I signify that, without being much interested
about the matter, I have no objection to it \ but if I say , h
to iKCLjUi , let him have done it , be. it so , suppose, him to,
have done it, <^c. I imply that I am not against it , I am**
not displeased, though I do not approve it; «V , with the*
present of the Subjunctive, indicates consent to, the continua-
tion of what is taking place at the time we speak: ac rhlii^n
let him beat him; ( set about beating him, ) ac toy li^,
let him continue beating him. See Chap/ l\i , § 2.
10. A'V is also optative; «c a&aftS v% rov ^otvmtco f kolI ti&ufc
«f cLTroQy'vu ; the optative of the pathetic language of Jacob ,
on regaining a sight of his Son Joseph. ? let me but se&
flint before I ( and immediately ) die x
*i. There are, in Greek, three negations, l\v and 'o\t » t
Vulgarly 'cyitKi , and the prohibitive juf, , vulgarly ptiV
l\y is always connected with a verb and is never used
independently , or alone ; lit fchu , I will not ; cyi on the
contrary always, and it answers to our adverb No ; to Biiiit^
do you wish it? 'o\i % No. Ah, is used only with the Indi%
cative, and ^ with the Subjunctive and Participle \ )M rh
Wyjv<~<;, dont praise him; ySiv ovrat; ^a^aercc, not being accus-
tomed. Thus in negative Imperative i. e. Prohibitory Phrases,
it is always requisite to use the Subjunctive after /uvi ;
ufa T9v xtittcIs, dont beat him i. e. leave off beating him \
Uiv rov kTVTrwrx dont beat him i. e. dont set about beating
him. See Chap J 42 , §. 2.
12. d'yj and { un form Negative Conjunctions , S'r« , yMri, x
neither, nor; \h 'ix u * 7e n f° > * T * ^jfi'» I have neither Water-
nor bread. In such Phrases as these , where the Negative
is conjunctive, Custom is in favor of ^n , even with the
Indicative: thus, it is most usual to say, llv i%v nfo r f/.y\n
^uyJ , I have neither water nor bread ; and with a dou-
ble negative , thus ; Xh \yv y.v\rt va^'o , juvn -^uyJ' though are
would be more correct. With greater reason, in the subjunc--
tive , lh G^'aw voi rh ila , film vx rov o^ihwco , / will neither
see , nor speak to him ; and with a double Negative, lit
$ko , yvirt vol toy ilco , p.hn vd -rov by.iKy,<jo.
i3. From these Negatives are also formed , *S* and yull,
in which the particle os answers to our, even, so much as;
lh rh ytto$i£ii , $e rov t^fe, he neither /mows, nor has ever
even seen him, ( So much as seen him. J Instead , of,
these Intensives , it is very common, however incorrect ,
to use the conjunctives «h and /uyP,i , particularly the lat-
ter : Ih \x°^ y p*> Ti n f° £/ V to ennTi. IFe have not even (wot )
Vv T ater in the House.
i3. The Affirmative Particles Na/ , Na/Vxs answer to our
yes ; 's'^e/c -^uiai ; have you Bread? Na/ , yes. Mcu/o-ra is
much in use as an affirmative , particularly intensively.
1 4- It is considered more elegant to answer by re-
peating the Verb in the Question , particularly , if affir-
122
matively ; thus , t^c/c -^opf ; have you any Bread? e^<y ,'
I have ; i%us ro £i2h!ov ; have you the Book ? % ^x Q t
I have; ayJhwu; rlc <p/\«f /uac ; did you speak to, or have
you conversed with our Friends ? r«c auiKwoi I did ,
I have; %ft& rh dlih^'ov ^ ; Did you see my Brother? rov
tlloL , I did; When the Noun governed is definite , the
Article must accompany the Verb in the Answer ; thus :
'ix^s '^ol(tI ; Have you any JFine ? ep^o , / have ; tyi* T0
Kfuaf ; Have you the JFine ? To lx w > I have.
lb. "law , perhaps , when referring to a future time ,
is constructed with the Aorist of the Subjunctive ; 't'troo; 'l\h y
perhaps he will come ; /W rov iS»c , perhaps you will
see him.
1 6. The comparative particle cjo-ar , Vulgarly <rdv , like",
just like, is followed by the accusative, though preceded
by a nominative ; ol <p/hoi cry uwi adv tx$ kqkvs , your friends
are seemingly ( just like ) fools,
17. Many Adverbs such as nowd , much , xa,\a , well ;
trvyyi, often ; 7TfUTct, first ; wkokcl , easily; Ivmokol , with
difficulty , are compounded with Verbs , particularly if
employed negatively, lb % cvxvo£hZ7ro, I dont see him often;
ctv -lov xxKoyvopilu , I dont know him well ; y.h fd noxv^cL-hilrc
dont worry me, pester me, turn my brain, orav rov 7rfa>Toul%
when I first saw him ; avrb ro g$y£w« Ivcytohoavofyti , this
trunk opens with difficulty, tuxoKoayofyu , opens easily.
CHAPTER XLVI.
OF CONJUNCTIONS,
1. The copulative koli , and, is sometimes substituted
IOr VOL' TTCuC Yl{A.7T0$U KXl KCif/.CiTCil fit T0<TW l}-(JTY t </ ; llOW Can llQ
sleep amidst such heat ? aal is here substituted for m , in
appearance only ; for it imports much more : since, if vet
were used, the Verb would imply merely the possibility of
the thing , and would therefore be in the Aorist of the
.Subjunctive , ttco; iuTSfil rl mfinftqi instead of which it e.^
presses , not only the possibility , but the actual or present
occurrence, which is its principal force; xu/mi, he sleeps;
the possibility , 7tq$ riyyroftT, is but accessory.
The Particle teal, has a very nearly similar acceptation,
in certain elliptical Phrases , demanding an explanation,
of something unpleasant ? or questionable : ti wxyx , y.at
iluai aifAikm ; what liave I done , that I am ( should be
called ) idle ? rt kolkov ry.xy.iv h UtfixKyc , koli hrov tv^xwoi; ;
What harm did Pericles do , that he was ( should be
deemed \ a Tyrant ?
This Particle is also employed as the correlative of
y'ohiQ , hardly , scarcely, when the Phrase indicates two
immediately consecutive events ; y'oxi; tov tTlxv vM toy
izTixvzv. They hardly caught sight of him before they
seized him,
2. Mlv , and ll , mark opposition between two Phrases,
two Ideas , as our indeed , it is true , / grant , 8$e. ,
followed by but , but surely , fyc. ; yixfov yh , x*? hv ^ ■>
small indeed , but lovely.
3. a'V , if; or™, when; gtotolv , whenever ; «V I , as soon
as , from the moment 8$c. : See Page 109 , § 5.
4- A/or/ , because , compounded of Irx and v,n , an4
kwnlyi , whereas , since , inasmuch as , are causatives ;
rov ayot.7rc0 h'on tivxi kslkoc , I love him because he is good *
to Ukq &-arul)i jx cLpiu I wish it, or / will have it because >
( since , inasmuch as ) it pleases me.
tfift&H , answers also to our for ( french , car ) which
is a stronger expression than the former, and implies a
1 md of appeal Xlv tov yvuffid, e^eiSw Ih tov uIol srore^ I know
him not, ( how should I ) for I never saw him.
On and vac both mean that ; but the first is simply
l\ trrative , or affirmative ; whereas vx must be used ,
whenever any influence of one action upon another is to be
indicated; xtyn on l phos yxs iTrviyn, he says that our Friend
Las been drowned ; Ktyii oti to Uku , he says that he wishes
it ; vo. could not be used in either of the above Phrases :
but , I fished that he should see it , I ordered lnai not
is*4
to come ; lie did all in his power to arrive in time ■ are
Phrases that must he all translated with vd : n^Ka. va. to ilH,
tcuTo; , izor^oara^cc va /xhv USr, Ixxy.i to Ivvxtov vol <p(ix'<7)7 t/'c kik^,
Instead of in the Vulgar very commonly use ttjq- kiyu
htJc thai x.*hQs , he says that you are good.
6. After Verhs signifying fear , ^, and yn^ru; are sub-
stituted for on , with the Indicative , if referring to any
thing present or past ; with the Subjunctive , if to any
thing future ; yofrurai fwvus x^V 7 *f 7r*fdltc , he is afraid
of losing ( lest he should, that he may lose ) his Money ;
fop>t7Txi y.YiTTQQ b Qihoc; ts \h 'tkh he is afraid that his Friend
rnay not come ; <pcfiuTai (ifa^ ?wc lx u!Ji > he is afraid that
he has ( may have ) lost them.
7. Thence it is , that ymwQQ , at the commencement of
Phrases , is expressive of fear, approbation , conjecture;
fxy.woc lh ifJ.ya.7ra, perhaps ( I fear ) he does not love me ;
&fimw da; iwiifa^ci, perhaps, ( I fear ) / have disturbed, mo-
lested you.
Instead of py-rcds, the Vulgar say ^<£c kui ; ttu; v.a\ Xh to
foV ; Would you not wish it? perhaps you would not
wish it,
8. The particle art forms a remarkable Idiotism (1), when
prefixed to a Verb in an independent Phrase; for it in-
dicates , that the action expressed by the verb has just
occurred at the instant of speaking ; on fann^M , I have
this instant risen ; on 'iyvyi , he is but this instant gone out.
In analogy with the above sense , it has that of phm? ,
hardly , scarcely , and answers to the same correlative
*ai* oTi tldi rev £^9^or r« , kou t^JQjf t7rclvQ % , he scarcely
saw his enemy , before , he rushed upon him<> similar to
the AncientPhras.es utvidi, ut peril \ dg tllov , os/tppm.
(1) I fear this Word may appear pedantic ; but Idiom and Idiotism,
m speaking of languages, are of such very different extent in their
Import , that they never ought to be confounded. The idiom of a
language is its general distinctive character : an Idiotism is a sin-,
gular exception, a departure from that character, either partial ? g*
originating with the Vulgar.
h5
C). Aid rot ( lid indicating the final cause ) signifies td
the intent that . for the purpose of : See page 1 1 5 $
iqrijyt t/f rm TclXKixv bid vl ux^v ifa icttotiLW , he IS gone tO
France to study Medicine.
10. Ml to id , by means of, is very little in use ; it ig
belter to form the Phrase either with the participle, or with
the particles hon, fjre/Sw ; thus instead of /ul to yd u(xxi a^«fff#c
lit lyu bftZir f heing indisposed I have no appetite, it is
better to say , oVtclc a p fez tot , or kTruw , hhi upon kwu-
vtqs , x. T. K.
ii. Independent of its other meanings, the particle yd
constructed with the Imperfect of the Indicative is expres-
sive of desire, or regret of something wanting ; rx Jtw %i:
rvto to ttotfsohi yJx KaBotfd £fu'<wc, that there were a clear spring
in this Garden ; vx r,rov v\ E\aj«c §Aeu9loot, 7/ ey aoopof 'ct^ if8f*t
ytvv. What a beautiful place ( Country ) would Greece
become were it but free ! This Phrase shews its close
analogy with ay.
12. This Particle forms with the verb 'i%a , joined to
iSouns of number, and of time , a very peculiar Idiotism;
*X W T f e?c *f**t«K '& rh ila , it is three days since I saw
him , or I have not seen him these three days ; t%ii
T^7f tCbo/idltz yd ea-0h , he has not been these three Weeks.
For such phrases , the following turn , with dp I and the
negative Sir , is preferable ; thou TftTc y\A^xir dy y lly toy ulx.
1 3. fi'ati ( to the degree ) that) is a correlative ttf th-3
adverbs 1mm , to such a degree; xtco , So; and the pro-
noun TOMTOC > SUcli; thoU TC70V XTXlliVTOC , UTTi o£K V%tV PU flYl i
yd Six^m , he is so illiterate that he knows not even how
to read.
i4- The Vulgar use b-arv instead of 2«t*. As to /ay) , Sea
the preceding Chapter § 11.
1 5. A"»a, Ac/Tor , then , and the latter with the Article, '
to koivov , o6t> (therefore , wherefore , whence, on that or
on which account, ) are conclusive particles ; dtxnmi , «fa Jy ,
he breathes , he therefore is alive ; tL*irri{v , olohl v. xUi
it smokes, it $ therefore , burns : Komh is more in use it*
\a6
longer Phrases ; q KXifa tTvai ttok-Atiucv vr^dyixi %h TfsVo \oirh
vd rh x^ VC0 H iU Time is precious we ought not therefore
to waste it.
1 6. A'yzuhd is used in resuming discourse , and in mo-
difying what has been said ; kxkx nd^yuz kol) puyftdnig y.i-xv
rtytwr , dyKcchd lit art xgu&fyroit , faii^i WtKiig '£%ii yd (wm , VOU
are right in learning a Trade , or Art , though, indeed
( rigorously speaking ) you need not, since you will have
wherewith to live.
in', M' okov on , /uoKoy hm , although , is an Italicism $
contuttociocche ; \h (2 dfttr'tt y okov o7tm iTthu ivuoopis , lie
does not please me , though handsome ; dv kal although ;
(A aV'ffe/, clv nil curxHfLos ; he pleases me, though ordinary ^
Or plain. The Verb may be used* pafto-u , %» kx! uvol-. *fx*ifMc*
though the former turn is more concise and elegant ;
P okov ry to , vet , notwithstanding , however , in spite of
all that ; tlrcu &k&&iqg , (/.l okov %to llv (Hkco vd Toy ftdm ; he is
rich ; but yet I will not have him ; we may also say ( ul
'Skol tx Id h-kxtyi lb Ssku yd Toy vrdyoo, notwithstanding, or in
spite of ( or with ) all his riches , I will not have him.
18 KaV , rx\dxi?Tov , at least; yfd^i rov y.dv y.fx ypfitp/r^
write him, at leasts a short letter ; kxv is peculiarly ap-
propriate , after the conjunction »• tt^ttu td rev b/uiKwrg ,
ri vJly yd rov yfd-^rig , jou must speak to him, or at least ( at
any rate ) write to him.
19. u Oao>c, But , however , often commences, butj more
elegantly, closes a Phrase ; iTvxt clvtiIoq oycog lly ul ytd/xvn vd
yiKa , he is smart, ( sprightly , quick at repartee , )
but yet he does not make me laugh ; also, l(v y\ adyvu vd:
ytKoJ ou'jjc.
20. AKKa, TtKiu , but * tTvoii ibfiop<p6C~j d\hd llv 'i%it Grtgvjud,
he is handsome , but he has no talent ; yl dyx-n-d ? 7tkv\y lit
QihuVov vdftt, he loves me, but I will not have ( marry ) him.
•21. TTf/V , 7rfo rx vd , before, till, require the A 'oris t of
the Subjunctive', %h QtKco yd rh oyiKwu, Trfiv hx&daa to fitp>K(ov tk,
or &fi rJ vd haficiea k. t. k. I will not speak to him before,
( till ) I have read his Book,
*li. eV « , tk xcLtfbv ot*-, cVra; , while, whilst, meanwhile,
meantime , are both conjunctions and adverbs of time ;
Ah f/dydTTxc h u d kglt fives + you do not love me , whilst
I adore you ; the two other conjunctions are considered
less elegant ; ih xoujor ecr* hro? tlr T o •GrtpiQohi ry , i^moty ot
xteflou , no.} cthtzo-oiY to (TTYjn , Thieves entered , while he
was in his Garden , and stript the house ; oyrae It€^4^5w
vs t° yu&& i wA0e to K*t?xGi tv , whilst he was walking along
the beach , or shore, his vessel arrived. It is unnecessary i
I presume , to notice that otrac is the undeclinable participle
of the Verb Substantive. This being known, the Reader
will , by referring to page Ii3, § 2, see this turn of
Phraseology explained , and the principles on which the
participle otr-xs is substituted for a conjunction*
APPENDIX.
SECTION r.
What in the following remarks, particularly on accent, may to
fiie learned appear superfluous or trifling , will, I an (old, be
very acceptable to those who know nothing of Ancient Greek, ani
study the Modern for practical purposes only.
ALPHABET.
-As some of the forms of Letters in use are, in the Alphabet,
emitted , it will be necessary, as far as the means of printing .will
allow, to add them.
After l read another form £ , after , 3- after 77 , <& , after ? , p.
The Letters and o> have no exactly equivalent representatives in
English : they have both one sound, between the o in bond and bone
English •, and as nearly as I can represent it , that of o in bonnet
French, or bonnie Scotch.
SYLLABICATION, s
As the Nouns and Verbs declined and conjugated are divided with a
view of* distinctly marking the variable part of the Word , and the
accented Vowel, the-Ruies for distributing the Consonants have not
hztu there observed : they are the following.
A Single Consonant is to be written with the following Vowel 5
as cps-fto, Xo'-j'OSj a-vc-ixo;.
Doubled consonants are to be divided between the preceding and
following Vowels, thus, 3x-Xoi ^Xwc-ca.
Compounds when, divided, are to be divided into their component
parts, thus, ££~flX6ov> cuv-s»-^svo{iai , Kuvo'o-oupot , Trpo-s-Tarra, »£-re.
All combinations of letters found at the beginning of Words ori-
ginally Greek (1) when in the middle , are to be written with the
following Vowel , as M-r.tu £-t$cp.o?.
All other combinations are divided between the preceding and
subsequent Vowels, as 07-^00; ? ai^-ao?, eVto; 3 wcp6-»os.
ACCENT.
As some idea of the Ancient quantity of Vowels is necessary for
readily determining the change and movement of the Accent, I sliail
subjoin the Ancient Distribution of the Letters.
(l) o£ cX 'Zi 7X 7? S[j. oi 3~o 6>, 6v 6p *X m y.s xr {iv tz\ izv tcj ttt co
t3 ns. <s>.\ V'j, ott s~X <s~ era co citf cy^ tX tii. Tp <j-3 <?X op yQ •/}, m £i x,P»
9
VOWEIS \1S*D DIPHTHONG.*?, $OUSONAS$£
Loilg Y! W (J ( Soft * *
Short s o
Doubtful a i u
Diphthongs long (i)
9 Mute I Middle p
( Aspirated <p ^ 6
4 Liquid X pt v ' f
3 Double £ ^ V 4s
i Called Solitary §
The Accent should always be placed over the iast Vowel of a
Diphthong.
There is an error of the press , page 6 , 6 £a(3o$ instead of 6 Xfl$'<k
which affords a fair opportunity of explaining more distinctly the
circumstances in which alone the grave accent is to be used. All syl-
lables are accounted grave that have no mark of Accent ; but the
sign of the grave accent is never used ? unless as a substitute for the
aeiite , when acuted Monosyllables , or Words acuted on their last
syllable , are followed by other Words (2) in the course of a Period:
a^£}/po'ij p.vj £sv ef^ev tov dd'eXtfov too Kupioo (3 , aXXa tov tou Koptoo A
athXaov , My Brother did not see M> B's but M. r D's Brother -J-
iififi to [3i[3Xw ; Who took the Book ? T ( el^e ; What did he say ?
In the first instance achX^o? retains its primitive sign of acute accent,
being followed by an enclitic ; in the second it assumes the sign of
the grave , being in the midst of a period , and not followed by an
enclitic ; in the third it resumes its primitive ■ sign , being at the
close of a period!
GENERAL RULES FOR ACCENTING HOUNS. (3)
r. a OXYTONA Isosyllahic become Perispomena in the Gen. S. and
PL /see T.ii.i p. 16, and in all cases ending in vj of the" 3. d Declension.'
See euXa^T,?.
2V Imparisjilabic of more than one syllable (4) become paroxytona
m all increasing cases. (5) See -r^u-piv, and perispomena in all cases'
ending in %\- and ey. See BaatXeu? p. 24.
(1) Except a.: and 6 i final, and, in the Fulgar Form of the Imperfect
Tense Passive go, as e^pcfyou-jAouv , coov , etc.
(2) The Interrogatives T t? ti, and acuted finals followed by Enclitics
are the only exceptions. The above Rule , and the exceptions prove
most clearly that the variations of tone must have been very nicely;
observed by the Ancients.
(3) See page 8 , line 6.
(4) For Monosyllables increasing. See page 28, §. r.
(5) Except "-yuvvi irregular. See p. 1 35, and Nouns having their final
long, which, in all cases, circumflex a long penult before a short finaL
See creorrip page 23 , §• 2.
3. PARQXYTONA Isosyllabic become Perispbmcna in the Gea. 5.
and PL if contracted by synezesis , as <pa£-icu-'.6»v in the G. S. of
p.«t (Bta?,and in the G. PI. i.st(i) aad 3. d Declensions,
4. Imparls yllabic (except of the a.a Declension which never move,
nor change their Accent ) advance their Accent one syllable in th:
Genitive Plural. See Sppts, •$$*». P. 24. 22.
5. PROPAROXYTOKA Isosyllabic become Taroxytona in all cases
where the final is long. See avOjxoxo? P- *7 > unless that final be con-
tracted by synezesis, when it must be circumnexed. See >. w xo*ai^o, p 17.
6. Imparls yllabic advance their accent one syllable in all cases
increasing, or ending in « § , except the G. PI. of the i.st Declension,
where they advance it two. See cubist;, odpe^a p. i5. 22.
7. PEPJSPOMENA Isosyllabic undergo no change (2).
h. PROPERI3POMENA Isosyllabic become Paroxytona in all cases
ending with a long syllable, n , y$, ou; , a*, <x- ? except in the Gen.
PI. i.st and 3. d Declensions, -where the final is always elrciraiffexed.
See Mcuca teIx«s P- id> . 20,
9. Imparlsyilablc become proparoxytona in all increasing cases,
except the G. P. of the i.st Declension, where, as well as in all case^
endiiig in £ -. ? , they become paroxytona. See «p«f t a«, ^»u9^p. 22, ?.5.
ACCENTUATION OF VERBS,
In addition to what is said page 71? it is necessary alone to add
that the participle past passive, in the Masculine and Neuter, is aeuted
on the penult, and that in Dissyllables, an incipient Vowel ©r Diphthong.
preceding a short final Syllable, is, on general principles , circmn-
tiexed. See ii y a p. 47 , and £ Tu. a . fao p. 71.
I.St DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC.
The Vulgar mode of declining has here nothing peculiar, either
as to Accent or Termination, beyond what is noticed, p. iG and r-
except with respect to Nouns in tyi ? , which, whether oxytona, or
paroxytona? are, in the plural, accented and declined like oet-yac p. 26,
li ? [<-y, ;> a Builder, M%Hrr^ a PupiL
(1) In the 1 .st Declension, if the penult of the N. PL be long
a:- a' owolai from ^ 67701a 3 it is circumflex ed.
(2) Ileterociites becoming Imparisyilabic in the plural ■> according
*jj the Vulgar mode of declining, can hardly be called exceptions
to the above: However written the penult of their plural is always
■ euted S?* p. 2 6 , 7.7.
. 1 I
F.
Kr/crr-aoa/c MfJ
dloctc
cihaic
a.d DECLENSION XSOSYELABIC.
In ordinary language some Masculine Nouns which are, in .lie
singular, declined after the first Declension, are, in the plural, declined
after the second, as ^aoTopvi; a master work man , chief Artl&eer ,
xopcupa; *- a crab or oray fish.
S. P.
Maa-Too-j-.'r . — • £2 01
• ' jj or M(X77C$\i ' — v ' &jk
. — ' - — ^ or w - — — ' ov;
SL
1 .
K-r/crr- wc
(0
G*
8
or v
A;
VI
V,
n
N.
M*(&fT-»K
G.
n
or 5
A.
n
V.
n
Ka&ci/p-ac
a>
a or on - — — ' cv$
Nonris of two terminations are, by the Vulgar , dec'ined with
tl.rete, and often accented on the syllable marked with double lines.
M.
tfos£ oz
SINGULAR,,
F.
V
u
■ — — OV
■ — — - ii or w
)l
(i) As' 7i t u et ci are all pronounced alike, «. and e alike, and •
and 6> alike , and the three accents have precisely the same force
in enunciation, they in letters, and in other writings of the Vulgar,
are indiscriminately interchanged, as xi; for tq, and rr^ i$» uq? ei$, for
each ether.
ro3
PLURAL.
F. •
(/}
jj
Cttf
tv
ss
< 01 C
eve
>/
— cue
01
— i'
— ■ ate
M, N.
The following Hetcrc elites belong to this declension : 6 Xo'^o; the
Word or Discourse., T « Xo'^ta ; • puaXo'g the Brain, T a p^aXa, o ttacutc?
Xiches , rat frXoutvf 6x?-' v0 ?j ^ e y ea! *j T # j^po'via. G. twv -/^q'vcov- to aXo-yov
the Horse ?a aXo-p, or aXo'^ara' to irpocttrcov, the face, ra Tcpwxairx CL
Tr^aiOTTaTa" froovfeipev* the dream, ra Sveiaa, or ovsioaTa-
3,d DECLENSION IS0SYLLABXC.
Nouns of this Declension are very little in use among the Vulgar,
They, in a few instances,, form a feminine of adjectives such as thkx^r,;,
by substituting 5Wst for the final $, euXaovi<SWa , and decline it after
the i .st Declension of Nouns in a, pure.
I.St DECLENSION IlgPA&XSYLXABXC
In ordinary Language, Masculines and Feminines of this declension
become Isosyllabio, by substituting the Accusative Singular unaltered
for the Nominative of Feminines, and the same case with ? added
for the Nominative of Masculines. They are, except as to Accent,, de-
clined like Nouns of the i.st Declension Isosyllabic , thus.
S. P.
Ni
V.f
OVT
CLQ
€?..
a
A.
cc
V.
s.
«
y.
r r
■yoy ^
a
G".
— .
'
cue.
A.
— .
'
a
v.
S.
a
>:.
<pKoy
a
G.
'
CLC
A.
■ '
Ci
V,
- --'
a
yift
u; or cue
, - — cjj'
— — ■ ac OF cue
, ' — t; Of atf
P.
Tfvy'ov ec or a/£
fhoy
«C
or
a i
H
cr
C'.i
or
ait
ac
or
C'.i
f .r
■or
«.'
a.<] PECLENSIOU X?IPA1».IS\*1IABIC.
In the language of the Vulgar, Nouns of this Declension are tei,.y
variously declined and spelt. The following examples will suffice, to
indicate the pronunciation.
S._ P.
K. yyvc K Or # yvaxr t(
q. --— u^ i — t - cov
Ac — " * or iv • — " €<•
V. i — - I ' if
$onie in eu; as AyOXsu; i I?peu; thus.
S. * t.
G. £-« * - QV
A, i'X or m tic
v. «■■?* *~c
Mere by Syndesis, thus, as Sac^odfe* $efcu£c > ex&x$rti4$ f SawtXeist.; ,
*Or Saaeus ccveu; cxix^ei? £aciXeu$.
S. P.
jf. /Sap €'/a'c /3<*p c/ada/f
6 V net t tailor
A. if2 Or €/a/ uaociii
\r. eta tia.acc.se
Adjectives in uq tla. u thus. ,
SINGULAE,
3U
F.
f*
N. £aG
UC
Ca0
1
ux
e*e
V
G.
e/7
t/itC
n*
►— «
»-•«
#
7"*
A.
y OF vv
11%
or e.w
tt
*
V.
V
act.
V
PLURAL.
SN £a9
not
fre
nous
6rf
ill
*-~
T*
~*a
G.-
imv
flUV
ttu*
*~~* /
f~l
*""""/
A.
licit
tl'Mf
V.
not
aa?$
ita.
1 XJ
Anomalies.
P.
N 7 or f yvvciiK
W
s..
or
jvyolTk
a
yvfccix.
Of
or
yVYOUK
^
yVYOtTx
e
yvvcLi
or
yvvoitK ay
yvicux. $£
yyvotHx. H
ywoux. *
singular:
M.
F.
N.
N* 7T0K
i
5FOA *.»
ETOA
t/
G.
Ay
A>&
A*
i
A.
vy
plural;
P
M.
F.
m
5
N". ffoA
KOI
•ETC A. A£*
or
A*7f
7TQK
JU*
G,
K'jOY
AW/
AUV
A*
fcofcC
kco;
or
Aa£
h&
i36
SECTION II
MOODS AND TENSES*
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
$£ the two English Modes of translating this Tense , the first has
reference only- to Action, Passion, or State of Being , indefinitely,
as a habit , without regard to Time; thus, he writes yv ell , ht
reads badly, he laughs heartily, indicating habit, may be said of
persons whom we have not seen write , nor heard read or langh for
Months. I am writing , the second form , is necessary (i) whenever
we would express present action ; and it is an error to say , as a
Foreigner very frequently does , I write ( instead of I am 'writing )
to your Brother, have you anything to say. I sleep goundly indicating
habit is a very correct expression j but I am steeping soundly would
be ridiculous.
i XJSIPERFECT TENSE. (2)
1 have added to what many Grammarians give as peculiarly the
(1) Except in cases where, though in actual exercise, the act is con-
sidered as always equally complete , I hate , I believe, never 1 am
hating, I am believing.
(2) If a Name should designate what is named, our Verb has, in se-
veral instances, beetroften very unhappily managed, as must be evident
en comparing the force of our forms of Tenses with the Names
attached to them. I have been writing all day , though it seems to
have the form of our perfect , may be , and very often is said , while
the act of writing is still in progress, and must be translated with the
Modern Greek Imperfect as above , or with the present -pa'epw. I have
written to him this Week, indicates indeed a completed Action , but in
an unexpired , and therefore still present period of time , and yet have
written is given as the peculiar expression of what is called the Perfect
Tense. I wrote to him last Week indicates a perfectly past action in a
perfectly past period of time , and yet most grammarians give wrote as
the peculiar expression of what they call the Imperject Tense. Another
error very perplexing to Foreigners, studying our Language, is that did
is very commonly in Grammars of Foreign Languages peculiarly an-
nexed as a translation to their Imperfect Tense only ; whereas it
is equally applicable as a translation of their preterite, and is used by
us merely for emphasis , or to obviate an awkward arrangement iu
negative and interrogative Phrases, in the same manner as do in the
present Tense. While in the treatment of our Verb such confusion
prevails , our Language must needs be difficult to Foreigners , and
their Languages much more difficult to us than they otherwise
would be. See page io5, line z<>
.. l3 7
form of our Imperfect, I wrote, a second form , 1 was writing, whick
rJone gives a distinct Idea of the force of this Tense in Modern
Greek, and in all the Languages of Europe derived from the Latin ,
that of continuation , admirably expressed in the Greek Name
or Definition of this Tense irapaTaTixo;. Modification of Action and
not of Time is its main scope : it always implies habit , or con-
tinuation of action , whether the time be perfectly or imperfectly
past; thus, I have written or been writing all day, and have not
finished, must be translated with the Greek Imperfect , cr Conti-
nuative i^pa^a oXyiv rfc "naspav , xai <^£v IrsXeccdca. So , Cesar wrote,
elegantly o Kalcrao £yp»5s xaX&£. Alexander conquered wherever lie
appeared, 6 AX^av^c; oww&tonn e^atvsTi, evtxodris ; My Brother wrote
while I read, ev £ &ux$a&L fy«?8 6 K<hXcp©',- pew.
AOtUST.
To express distinct , completed actions , however numerous , un-
der precisely the same modifications of Time as above , it is neces-
sary to employ uniformly the Greek Aorist , I have written one ,
two, three letters to day , f<yp«,<J>a ev<z •> M»* Tfta 'YpaujjwiTa or'p.spov.
Cesar wrote the History of his own Campaigns , 6 Kaiaa? Bypass Tr,v
fccpiav twv sx^eiTetwv tcu. Alexander conquered Darius , 6 a'a;;*^-:;
evixrae riv Aap;Iov. He killed him in his flight rbv ecpo'veucEM £'v w Eipeu-ys.
This last example in which both the Imperfect and Aorist are used
is a striking illustration of the very different force of the two tenses.
As to Modification of Time , we have an advantage i ) in not con-
founding a period of Time perfectly past with a period of Time yet
unexpired , as last year , with this year , I wrote last year , I have
written this year; but our advantage is of very inferior moment ,
compared with the admirable Modern Greek distinction of continued
from uncontinued , completed action, in future , as v. ell as past
time, in the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods ? as well as the In-
dicative. (2)
(1) It is singular that though, like ours, the French and Italian Lan-
guages have separate forms of expression for these distinctions of
time , they are in numerous instances confounded ; thus , je lui ai
parle hier , gli ho parlato ieri , though not correct are common
expressions , yet I have spoken to him yesterday, a literal translation ,
is inadmissible in English.
(2) As specimens of this extreme nicety of distinction the follow-
ing examples may be useful for exercising the Mind of a foreigner
on a subject, which, however abstruse and recondite it may appear
to him, is comparatively familiar even to the Vulgar among the
Modern ^Sxeeks Verb? that intrinsically include the idea of ccnii-
i38
PLUPE&FECT*
This Tense, -when used, which is but rarely , exactly answers
to ours of the same Name; the Aorist is much more usual even iij.
an anterior , or relatively perfect sense ; as I had closed my letter
before he came in, eccppa^tcia to «ypau.|xa (iou Trplv oQacrr. /fe had gained
the fort before his Enemy arrived, exupuuos x6 eppooptov rcplv (pOacryj
o exSpo'c tcu. This confusion in Modern Greek is certainly a defect ,
because the distinction is occasionally important. Thus , partly
through the defect of our own Verb, and partly through that of
the Modern Greek, the Aorist is to be translated, according to cir-
cumstances, sometimes with what is called our Imperfect, sometimes
with our Perfect , and sometimes with our Pluperfect.
FUTURE TENSE.
Declarative^
Interrogative
I shall
Shall I ?
Thou wilt
Shalt thou ?
He will
Will he ?
We shall
Shall we ?
Ye will
Shall ye ?
They will
Will they ?
The English Language , as it is universally spoken and written in the
South of Britain, has a decided advantage ©ver all the Languages ai the
South of Europe , both Ancient and Modern, in its expression of
simple futurity, (i) A little attention to the original meaning of the
Words « shall and will » will afford an easy solution of all the dif-
ficulties about their appropriate use ? as auxiliaries , as wen m inter-
muation,, such as £5 , £taTpt3&> are exceptions , and are used in the Aorist
when continuation is intended to be expressed : thus tuTb? avOpwTro? Qa
liar> 7toXXou? xp°' vou ^ &* s Man will live many years, Q a ^larpt^w £6ca xpo'voug
tic, TaXXtav , I shall spend two years in France. 0a jokimo ^s'xa xP 0V0U S
rpotTuoTvn;, I shall serve ten years as a Soldier and not 8a £rj , ^laTptSw,,
x&p.vu. Verbs implying commencement, continuation, cessation, and
phrases implying habit naturally require Verbs dependent on, or
qualified by them to be in the continuative form, as apx,i£st, axo-
aouQeIj wauei va ^pacpyj he is beginning , continuing, ceasing to write,
and not va -ypa^Tfi', 7Tp£7T£i eva i-upacpt va xo'tttvi xaXa. A Razor should
cut well 1 and not v « xo'^. For further illustration of this very curious
subject , see David's Parallel of the Ancient and Modern Greek Lan-
guages. P. 92 — 99.
(j) See Mitford on Harmony in Language,
i'^gative as in declarative Phrases, TVill originally was , and , when s
used as an independent Verb , still is expressive of volition; shall ?
no longer an independent verb , vyas expressive of obligation or
necessity, and indicated a duty, wish, or intention to compel, (i) As
no man can be supposed to force his own will , when speaking, or
writing of himself , shall therefore , as an auxiliary, can have no
ambiguity, but must have a simply future sense : as again no one
can exercise volition for another «, will , when used as an auxiliary f
is free from ambiguity , and has merely a predictive sense, The
reason for the use of shall in the 2. d Person in interrogative Phrases
is plain , for , without emphasis , the very act of asking a question
is inconsistent with the idea of an intention to compel the person
questioned , though not with that of an intention to compel a third
person, therefore shall thou 7 shall you? are questions about simple
futurity , whereas shall he ? shall they ? are questions implying an
intention to compel. (2)
The Modern Greek has no anterior , relative , or compound future
in general use , which is certainly another great defect. The Greeks
sometimes indeed form one compounded of the future of g^a and the
Aorist Subjunctive of the conjugated verb: See page no, § 6
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
As this Mood necessarily implies futurity , without considering
the Modifications of continued and uncontinued Action, it is impos-
sible to understand the appropriate use of the two Greek Tenses,
particularly referring them to the Tenses similarly named in the
Indicative Mood: The Present is confined to action etc. , to be con-
tinued , the Aorist to action etc. , not to be continued^
(1) Whenever Volition on the part of the Speaker, or his intention to
compel the Person or Persons spoken to or of is included in the Mo-
dern Greek or other Foreign Form of the Future, instead of the i.st
English, or Simple - future Form, the 2.d English Form page 47 ,
must be used. This is equivalent to, Sing, i.st lam determined as
to my writing , 2.d I am or we are determined as to thy writing
3.d , as to his or her writing - Plur. i.st as to our writing 2,d as to
your writing 3.d as to their writing.
(2) Will I ? Will we ? are preposterous Solecisms , because it is
absurd to ask others about our own volition. Wilt thou ? Will ve? are
questions about the willingness of the person spoken to. When ,
without emphasis , as in writing , we ask about a third person's
willingness, we either by some adjunct , or by resolving the verb p
make it clear that will is not used as an auxiliary , but as an independ-
ent Verb; is he willing ? will he bo willing? etc,
i4o
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Considering that relative futurity, under some modification or otheF ?
is also always necessarily implied in this Mood , the limitation of the
Tenses in Modern Greek to two is easily accounted for , precision as
to the Modification of Action being, under such circumstances , by far
the most material. When hypothesis is referred to past time , the
indicative answers every valuable purpose ; as indeed it seems to do
with us ; for we have nothing to distinguish our pluperfect Indicative
from the more general form of our relative, or anterior perfect
Subjunctive , « though 1 had been possessed » equivalent to should
have been possessed , See Note to page 107. Even when referred to
future time , we may substitute the future Indicative for the present
or perfect Subjunctive, both having a future sense ; thus , for
« if he come » « if he shall come »for « if he have supped before ten»
« if he shall have supped before ten, i>
SIGNS OF HYPOTHESIS.
I have given may and should only as auxiliary signs iu this Mood ;
for, after a close examination, it appears to me, that , in hypothetic
phrases, all the others given as signs , when purely signs t distinguished
from independent verbs, are resolvable into should. Even may when
purely a sign of hypothesis is always resolvable into shall or should.
Tills seems to me for an Englishman translating into other languages
the readiest mode of detecting a sign , or intrinsic part of the con-
jugated Verb , ( i. e. ) its being always reducible into shall or should.
Iu hypothetic Phrases, when not so resolvable, the others indicate the
hypothesis as merely possible or prob.tble , and if translated generally
require some adverb equivalent to perhaps , or some independent
verb, as it is possible or probable that I shall etc. , that I should ete.
In this restriction I , of course limit, myself to the hypothetic part of
the conditional Phrase , whether it be placed first or last. Where
nothing of the hypothetic or contingent character appears , it requires
not a thought , to translate may or might as independent Verbs ,
expressive of ability, permission, inclination , etc. Should, whenever
it includes the idea of duty , is an independent Verb., equivalent to
« ought to y » and must be so translated.
CONDITIONAL FUTURE.
Declarative Interrogative
I should Should I
Thou wouldst Shouldst thou
He would Would he
We should Should we
Ye would Should ye
They would Would they
t4*
The above' is , in all respects , analogous with the simple future ,
and is the correct form for expressing necessary consequence ,
whenever the hypothesis is expressed with a past tense. Might
if not resolvable into should . implies that the consequence is
merely possibb or probable. Could, when properly a sign, and.
not a catachresis , or abuse of Idiom, is optative. Can, in correct lan-
guage, is never a mere sign of Tense, but is always equivalent to a m,
or should be able, etc,
COMPOUND CONDITIONAL FUTURE.
English is formed by adding have , to the above , as I should
have, etc. The want of distinct forms for the sense of this expres-
sion and of shall have is perhaps the greatest defect in the Modern
Greek Verb, (i) See P. 107, § 6, and note: also P. in, § 7,
and note 2. The last line of the Note refers to the Paragraph 10
lines above Rule 6 , beginning « When &tov « , the figure 6 being mis
placed.
(1) Except the loss of the Ancient Infinitive and Participles, so
singularly precise with respect to Modification of Time and Action,
and so commodiously , and so gracefully blending themselves in
substantive and adjective forms with the current of the most har-
monious Periods.
*4«
s^z^ts^x^ss^&s^tstssi
DIALOGUES.
A I A A or 01.
A.
JJo you speak Greek ?
A little (i) , very little.
How long (is it) since you began,,
pearly six Months.
"Who's (2) your Master ?
One of the Deacons of the Public
School.
Is he a good Scholar ?
I think so, fcvut I'm not a compe-
tent judge.
Does he know Hellenic ?
They say so : he is one of O^eono-
mus'(3) Pupils ; and, being a
Man of application, and of good
intellect , he must have made
considerable progress.
What is OEconomus' Opinion of
him?
He speaks highly of him , and
recommended him to me.
How do you think I speak ?
Tolerably well for the time; butyou
still with difficulty pronounce
the aspirated consonants, and
O
MIAEITE pwpaTxa ; ( ^yuanx) ;
OXt'yov, xcp.aart , xop.,u,aTa>a .
'Awb tco'te toc apyj. aere ;
Eivai 7T£pt Ttou e£ u.viv£$.
nolo; elvai ^ic^aarjcaXo's aa;;
"Eva? ^taacovo; «t:o rd ayO-zic>,
Eivat 7:po/.oti.{x£vci; ;
Eroxafr/^at , £ev el 4 aai ap? isca~
vo? va xpivtt).
H^supEt. sXXvjvtxa;
As'^'ouv on ra v)|s»pet" eivai w.aflvr
tvj^ tou Otscova'v.ou, xai e-jv£i<5*ri efva*
ETCtjarsX'fl?, acal e^et xotXd xa^xX;, nae-
irei va ercooV.o^e icaXa.
Tt Xe'^ei Oijcovou.cs nzfl aurcvj
Tov E-^aiveT, xat jjls rev IcrSg-Yiffe.
Il&s oas epatvetat va SfuXw ;
Slq Tkpo; tov xatp,iv> dpy.&Ta' wXr ( v
^uaxoXeusaSe axo'p.Y) va tcog^eosts t«
^acs'a ou^wva, xai gcpaXX&Ti au^vi
(1) See Note Page 4. Type confines me to one Accent for the
English , but that will answer my object , indicating to a Foreigner
the obligatory position of the English Accent generally, without any
reference to its nicer modifications in refined elocution. The lev;
slight liberties I have taken in the Translation for the purpose of
making the Phrases tolerably idiomatic will very little interfere wi*h
a due appreciation of the Greek Words severally.
(a) See Note Page 10.
(3) Pronounced, OEconomusis.
&M often wrong m accent : you
paroxytonise, (i) as the Vulgar
say. ( i. e. you throw the ac«
cent on the penult. )
AH that will correct itself with time.
I ought for the moment to be
satisfied withbeingable to speak
so as to be understood. I wish
no more.
II.
Good Day.
Good Day to you.
How do you do my Friend ? How
is your Health ? how are you ?
Very well thank God. God be
praised.
Where ( whither ) are you going.
Into the Cottntry.
What business have you ( what
have you to do ) there ?
I mean to pass a few days there,
as I have now nothing to do ,
and wish a little recreation after
my late close application to
Business ?
Is there any Society ?
There are several Friends of mine,
with whom , I walk out during
the day; and in the evening we
play at Cards.
How can you walk during the
day , hot as it is.
It is not so very hot : indeed the
day before yesterday it was
cool.
Have you then a different climate
there from what we have here.
We are suffocated with the heat
here in Town ; how can it be
cool there ?
143
OXa Taura <hop0o'vovTat p.s i tov
xatjftv 5 x.ara to frapov rcpe'ikSl va
euxaptrnGw, av vijjKXt' kkXo? va c[juX'3>
V6uv. A 67 Znroi alle,
B.
KaX f.'jJocf, c&q,
KaXs qol; •fyxepa-.
Ti jcauveis <p(Xe; itm; e^ecs ei's ttqv
u^eiav cou ; 7ra? ey.eic ;
Kc.Xa , £o'|« sot OsoV 6 0;dj
va e'x,T(l ^oljav.
IloCi wYiYatveis -
Et? to x&>pio.
Ti va xap.YK IjcsI ;
Ey^ci) ar>to i-bv va irepa^w (xepixx^-
Xe(«t;, xat 6£aw va £sy.cupaa3S KOfi-
p-aTt cb;o reus aitep!xap.£VG'j; jco'ttou;.
Eivat auvTpocpia, EJcet ;
Eivai ttaptjeos <jnX?t, (i.e tou; -otto''-
o'j^ "jrspiTkaTw tyiv Tnp,;'pav , }C3t.'. T3
(3pa£u ^a-'^oaev yjxpTta.
n5>; rarropElre xae Trepi7raTcTT£ tviv
r.fAi'pav ui TOfftfv fcVtfv ;
'Aae S'vt elvai woXXvi fc'cn » p-aXt-
<ra Trpcr/9s; Yrrev Jtxl ^poaca.
' AXXo etvai Taxa to xXip.05 exei na<
d'XXo erSo> j et£ tyiv ywpav ^viYo'[i.j9x
arco tt.v xauaiv, ttw; •va wai ^poatx
(1) Where Words of more than one syllable are not accented the
aceent is eitbet on the Capital Letter or the letter y.
1 44
So it is ; corne and see ; you will
pass your time agreeably : you
will meet with real friends, who
lore you with ail their souls.
My Friend , I like Men's Society
very well ; but that alone will
not do; I should like to have ,
a few Ladies among them 5 or
the Country is to me a Desert.
Dont be alarmed : you'll meet with
Ladies : Do you think we are
so many Monks , and live in
solitude. We have , among the
rest , a Lady of Constantinople,
(1) a late arrival, who is the ad-
miration of us all, for her ta-
lents , excellent education, and
graceful manners.
Is she handsome?
Not very; She's little famed in
that respect : Beauty is not her
charm ; but she's not plain ; her
countenance is rather pleasing.
That's not enough for me , my
Friend. A Woman to be per-
fect must have Wit and Beauty
united : in my opinion , this
latter is the essential ( the chief
excellence ) of the Sex,
Ton talk at random, like a hare-
brained boy: however come with
nie , and , after you have seen
her , you may judge. ( for
yourself ) Grace of expression
emanating from an amiable
cast of disposition, and a highly
cultivated Mind often throw a
charm over the Person.
Fivxt oixw; , sax vi 10 r t ; , S •'/<;:;
w'spasst -nroXXa xaXa' QiXzi; aupet cpi~
lo'j; etXtfcp'tvstg , ot orroTot a' dqanrouv
$tXs
tgus cpsXou? rw-; i'yj*
fltoXXv.v uwoXrj'l'iv , irXr,v S'h \jA odd-
vcjv , »al aYX7v5> va cruvsupiflouv xat
oXtyats '<ptXat?' ti $k 4 avj ?) ifyxh jw
©flfctVcTai taaav epviiua.
' Evvotx coo, Qs'Xct; svpei xiat yyto~r
x=;. Sappst; w£>; &tue&3 JtaXo'^c-pot ^
xct- £oujxev ei; rnv y.ova£''av , avoy.-M
xt' 6'Xa; jxiav ■jvoX'/rttfoav.. si vat ve'ocpep-
p.s'vyj Y.cr\ tt,v Go?jy.oc£op.£v oXot cXitx, to
■77v.tiju.3c-r,;, TTJv xaXr.v ttg; avaTpocp/jv,
Elvat xcfl wpai'a ;
"Ojk to<tov , x«,-a tout© £iv vj-
froxipzl' 'h MpatOTY]; ^sv si-vat to itpo-
TspYiaa ty!; 3 irXviv <^sv stvat aa^r/iaV
to -nrpc'soirov txs utaXt^a stvat euaps<rcv.
Auto <^sv \j.z <p8avsij a^eX©£. Trpi-
irst p,t-a •pvatxa , <^ta va vrm svts-
Xr,; , va evo'v'/j xai to •jcvsVju.x xal ty;v
siaopcpixv' e^st^ri et; touto to teX'su-
ratov TipoTspYij/.a, <ruvi'caT«i xaTa tvv
■vvwar.v y.ou, oXn r, custa tou JUnXuxoi
-yayou?;
Asv ojAtXet; cb; cppovtw.ee, rap a &>$
vie;. eXaopop.uaXo?' 6>; toVov £Xa y,a£u,
x.a»! enrav txv 1$y& Ss'Xs-ts xptvai. H
/apt? t5)v Xo'^tov iro^-a^coax arrb ty,v
xaXoauvYiV tv}* $ux*i?"» &** TW[ xeXait
TviTa toO voo; * ^tv&Txt cFU^va 50X10"
p.o; tou Gtop.aTO;.
(1) Long Words in English , as in Greek , have necessarily two
strongly accented Syllables. I shall , as in Greek , mark only the
more prominent of the ty/o.
i45
in.
Heartily welcome , Friend : pray
walk in.
1 salute you. ( the English never
use such an expression , but ,
always, instead, employ some
specific salutation ; as, Good
day , I'm glad to see you ,
I hope I see you well. )
Sit down. Boy , bring the Gentle-
man a pipe, and tell your Mis-
tress to send in cakes and Coffee.
1 am delighted to see you. I've
not exchang'd a word with
you for several days.
Do you bring us any News ?
Shocking , a dreadful Business,
r.
What now
r">
IV,
Have you made the Bed,
I have made it. ( Yes , Sir ). See
Page 121 , § i4.
Give me my Tobacco Bag , and
bring me a light.
With pleasure.
This Tobacco's very strong 9
where did you get ( buy ) it.
Where I always get it. Is n't it
good?
It's good ; but I'm afraid'? will
affect my head.
And suppose it does ( should )
a little, that will do you no
harm , as you are going im-
mediately to bed.
Bring me. a cup (glass) of water.
Will you have wine also ( with it,)
Ko : bring me rather a glass of
spirits to mix with the water.
As you please.
Have you been to the Tailor.
I have C Yes > Sir)-
Has he finish' d my Goat?
K«X<d? CipiSETS , <pl)« > KOTClflCffSTS
2a? jratper*.
KatKffETe. ITai^ta , (pspeti tt; vj--
•yevEia; tou i'va t£ijjhm6j« 3 ka\ £?7T:re
ty5; y»upa$ va <rs''Xv) to rXuxo >cal rev
xa^cpe.
Xa:pou,ac va c«? t^ai, v/u to'exi?
■yip-jpsct; ao ou osv aa; couur.cra.
Ma; we'cete tiitcte ( x^ve'va ) v3ov;
Tpcffcepi /.cd cpptxra repa"yjfc*T'a.
Ti rcaXiv ;
A.
"E$-pto<s*s to xps££au ;
To ^pcii«?a.
Awes p.cu to xairvoi?c'j'YY l » xa ^
^>spe u.(a (pcotia.
MsTa x,apas.
Aut«5 6 y.aTrv&s eivat wcXXoe a<J>u?*
ttou Tsv £7fVipe; ;
"otto'j Tiv Tce'pvoi iravra" eHv eIW.
xaXo; ^
K«ao; eivai, «Xwi <po(3e3aca ftKjitwf
pi £aXiT{h
"A; aa<; £aXttfri y.cfmaraxt* ds«
ca; x.a|i.v£i y.7.)cov) e'ttekJ'ti SeXets we~
cei ( irXa^iacjci ) dp.E'ato;.
<J>E'pE UAOL KCXiTZO. VEpO.
Opt^ETE xat xpacri j
Ox,'-" xaXXnjTEpa va jae (jJEpif; sva,
-7TcTr ( pa!<.t pawcl, va to aia^artocra) u.e
to vepo*
"(>,Tt d-yarrixTE.
'Eik^'ii et? toy pa^TYiv ;
'E<TTi-i'a.
'ivreXsicotfE to pouy^o p.ou;
Not yet ; but lie says he'il bring
it to morrow at noon.
Bid you see it ? What does it want.
He has not yet put on the buttons,
nor are the button holes made.
(There's no believing the. fellow ).
The fellow's all falsehood. He
had promis'd to finish it in
three days , and a week has
pass'd without his having yet
brought ( come to bring ) it
mc. What excuse did he make.
He says , as usual, ( the old story )
that lie has not had time; there
have been two festivals , and he
has not been able to work con-
stantly.
Be it so ( Well , well ). Tell me :
has the person [we were speak-
ing of been ?
J V horn do you mean. That Jew
to whom you. owe Money.
The same, to be sure. What other?
Yes ; he has; and he waited some
time f he went away out of
humour,
Burn him : hang Turn : so much
as he has robb'd me of
(made by me J with his exor-
bitant usury ; but however ,
having once agreed ( passed
my word J FIE give you the
money to morrow , and you
shall go and pay him.
You'll do well.
'Tis time I shou'd go to bed : light
the night lamp, and take away
the Candle.
Good Night, (r)
To elth; ; f{ Xs'iim'';
xa.'. at QnlzioJi; Sh alvai )caawp.$vai..,v
Auto? 6 dsvflpwicc-; 6'Xov 4 r£ ^^ £Tai "'
Tfc't; r.uipai? , dhc/paun pfa'Jf&tfLx-'
<^a ,~ x,%\ a»o'[xvj ^sv $X6e va pi to
^pe'pip. Tc irpo'jpaaiv co r J ^uxs ^
A'yct to cjv£^(}tC[xevov , ttcu; £sy
ctjrs xatpov* *^rav xal <5uo crx,o'Xat? f
xxl ^ev' ^jjtrb'pso'e iravfa va iSVjXsot*.
As' £vax. nV; {j.ou ,- r*X9e:v 5 Xs'^x*
p.tvc; 5
IIoTov Xete j txslvov tov *£$p!iTc;v
ei; tov orcTov xps^celTe Trapa^e;.
Au-ov , j3iSatx* d'xl woTov aXXov ,
MaXt^-a yJAQs , jtal ca? srrjoffixEive
Jcaftwo'<r^li eop'av" e^u^s j&sGKdStt£«p'i£Yi >
p.e'vc ?.
<£ama va tov xxy'f &i ttayip vi
xv/ifxvtG^/i' To<ya pi ex-Xs^e p.s tH
^tacpspsv tou to U7?sp£oXuoV £7rei<H
cp,co> eVjfiipuvYiaa p.td ^opa , aup'.cV
ecu £t^u itapa<hc Hal &a m^ftif va
T&tf TrXripuur.;.
©& jcaasTe' xaXa.
Twpx TrpsK-et va rXa^iaorw* faxfyi
tb JcavT-Xi , xzl Traps. t6 ^oj; Sf©S
KacXr, v'JKra ca;,
(i) I here relinquish Mons. r David's Dialogues for several reasons^
and , among others , because the* Phrases are generally too long, too
political, and too marked with National prejudices and Antipathies r
to be suited to an elementary Work like this, His Anti-Angiacaitf
1 Mr Lady.
P. What is it? (What's the matter.)
L A Visit.
P. Fresh congratulations ?
I. Yes , My Lady.
P. Did n' t ( i ) I tell you, I wou'd n't
see any one to day.
I. Six are gorie away , but the
seventh wont go.
P. And who may he be ?
I." Sir W. Arnold,
P, Precisely the Man that annoys
me beyond every other : beg
him to excuse me , as I'm
engaged , and cant see tym
to day.
I. Yes my Lady,
PHRASES FRO^ PAMELA"?
PAMELA AttD ISAAC,
I. MtXe<W:
*4?
II. Tt eivai J
I. Mia iisia-AvUq}
II. IfxXiv x at ? £ ' rtQr f' c ^ 5
I. Nat. Mt/.e^i
II. Ac'v cot (a) eirca on <Piu,jp&v (H\)
fls'Xw va &v/Qo> xxve'va ;
I. "E£yj ga-u-j-avj 6 e'Sd'0^05 <?sv (SeXs; v«
avax^P^^?*
II. Kai 74's eivai aura's ;
I. 'O I1T7V6U5 E?V0X<?,
II. Exitvo? jxaXt^a , ottou p, evoxXst
urrsp >:a8e aXXcv. Eirts tou va as
cufATraOricri , <^taTi i'xw CwHiJlaiii
tTveO a' c'u.tc &<%Et . xai a?3|6spov ^i»
r,j}/r?G(>S va tqv (jTJs^exOco,
IOED B. AND SIR. W. A,
W. Well met.
B. Stay, ,
W- Eh ! let me go : L:d Arthur
does not alarm me.
15. Tell me plainly.
W. I neither want courage spirit
nor dexterity. »
B; Answer.
E: KaXri avrauoats.
B. Sraorea.
E. E ? a<|e? as va u^a^to. *Q 'Aprolijj
^ev pis gq(3i£s«,
B. EtTTs [xou eiXtxpivcos i . ', . .
E„ Asv p.ou XtiTrei p.r,T3 xap^ix, Orifts
B, *Ai?Gscp(Qr,Ti;
Spleen could be very advantageously answered, if it were at all
worthy oLan Answer. I have much too high an opinion of the
Author to think he would in a second Edition repeat it. He wrot*
in haste , and seemingly in anger , and he wrote in Greece s at
a very critical moment , though he published in Paris. This may
excuse him ; but would not excuse my re-echo , whieh could do
him no honor. Even if competent instead of attempting additional
Dialogues of my own, I should prefer offering, as I shall, the" Greek
Language of Greeks , short Phrases from two Comedies, the last,
Ivloliere's Avare translated by OEconomiis. The few Phrases of a Ser-
vant , at the close , I have selected for the purpose of giving some
Idea of the great irregularity of the Vulgar in spelling.
(1) Pronounced didunt, woudunt,
[a) The Genitive would he more in conformity with present usage.
i48
"VT. I who have travelled.
B. Answer me.
B. Awcxgt8v5Tt jiei.
W. What would you wish me to E. Etc tJ 8 £ 'Xec? va cc\ **ox«te.s
answer ?
What I asked.
B. Etc o, ti ae epcaTr'aw.
LORD B. AND HIS SISTER.
B. I had better speak to Lady B:
she will communicate to Sir W;
in my Name what I intended
to say to him.
M. My Lord , may I come in ?
B. Walk in.
M. Are you willing we should have
a little conversation to day ?
B. Yes ; indeed , I want to have
some talk with you.
M. You seem discomposed.
B. With reason.
M. I feel for you( I enter into your
feelings ) Pamela seems, from
the moment she changed situa-
tion , inclined to change her
manner also.
B. What reason have you to speak
to her disadvantage ?
M. Sir W has made me acquainted
with every thing.
B. Sir W is a blockhead.
ST. My Nephew is not to be thus
contemptuously treated.
B. My Wife must be treated more
respectfully.
M, If you do not keep her within
prgper bounds , you'll find
her a Woman like the rest
of us.
B. Her conduct is in no way
blarnable.
M. Pru lent Women allow no room
for suspicion,
B, What suspicion can any one
have of her?
B. itaXXwepx vec cuiXraju pk tw
MtXe^ri Aaiipro/. Aut^ fle'Xet ' Aver
9=pip e£ evo^aTc'? p,cu tiq ifo
KapaXtc'fvjv ra caa dyjx. •popm
va ?£> ei7ra) e-v^*
M. MtXop^e, ^a) rr ( v a'thiav va &ta> r
B. 'liXOe.
M. 'A-yaira; cvifxepsv va auvejxiX^ffu-
B. Nat , paXi?a ty® xpeiav va fyr
Xrlffto p.a^Yj (joy.
M. MoO ^aivecrai' ffUYXUffftevOf.
E. Me £i'xatov.
M. 2e ffUfAwaes. H ? Hap.&« , a/
oo r'XXai-g xaraVaaiv , ^aiverai
6'tc 0eXet / aXXa^ xat to yM;:
B. Xlo'av atTtav e%£is £ia vie trW
«fca0aXv>« ;
M. O Ka|5aXu'pvj; {/ ewXvipo^opvjcsV
ei; ra ivavta.
B. O KejjaXis'pvji; eTvai p.fc>po'$.
M. O eve<|i:o$ jaou £ev wpfe'wit va
xaTacppovrirat cutwij.
B. Ttjv pvaixa'^ou Kpixzi v« ttjv
TtfAOTS.
M Av <5*£v tav xpannGr); ei£ ri xa-
e^xov , etvat. xat auryj -pv?) xar
6cb; xa) aX Xoiuac,
B. H ^la-yo'p tios ^ev cftcu &\<mm*
tvi'YopstiSj.
M. At cpso'vtp,o; ^watxe; «Jej» <ft£doj>.
atTtav Qtto$ia$.
B. Ilofav Oira^iav viiiwcpsl Tiva; \fs
$t She is too intimate witli Lord M.
Arthur.
8. Lord Arthur's my Friend. B.
M. Ah ! in such matters Friends M.
have more in their power than
Enemies.
B. I know his Character, B.
M. And might he not deceive you? M,
B. You wish to rob me of my p«&ce B>
of Mind.
M. I am jealous of your honour. M.
B. Have you any good reason to B.
make me feel alarmed about
my honor,
M. Sir W told me. M.
JBo Don*£ speak to me of Sir W. B.
I have no opinion of bis pru-
dence, nor d® I believe what
lie says.
M. Allow me to communicate an M.
idea of my ov/n.
B. Well! let's have it. B.
M, Do you remember with what M<
zeal and earnestness Lord
Arthur dissuaded you from
marrying Pamela.
B. I do ; but what would you infer B.
from the dissuasions of my
excellent Friend. Were they
not well founded.
M. Brother, Lord Arthur 's Arga- ivl.
ments might have done very well
elsewhere. But in London a
ISobleman loses nothing hj
marrying a pennyless Girl, if
oi reputable character. I was
not incensed against her , on
account of her supposed mean-
ness of condition ; but was
displeased solely with that
lurking ambition, which I fancy
I see in her. Lord Arthur ,
not being related to us, could
149
"E/ji -jrctpi ttgXu Sacpo? pi tq^
JVUXo'p^ov Aproup.
C MtXcp^-c; 'Aprcup eivat (ptXog
fxoy.
E, ei? *apou.ota -rcpa^para q!
<piXot ^livavrai rcsptaffo'teppv <xt:6
toa>$ i^Spou?.
TvoptCco tgv ^apsoir^pa TOU.
Asv >5u.7ropcua=c va a.-na-^f,; ;
2u £*ite!$ va pi xapv/is va yjia&
ttiv Y,a'jyjav p.co.
IMe tcovsi <5\a tyiv Ttp-Tflv ffou.
'E^ei; )cav£va inQavov Xo'-ycv <^ta
vi [is xap.vis va c^cpri8a> tS'ta tt ( v
TIU.W p.OU J
O Ka^aXisp7)c p°3 eiotsv . . .-♦-.
M'fl pou avacpe'pvi; riv KaSaXts*
pvjv" <5"£v eya> et; xap,p.tav uwo-
Xr,ytv t« eppovr'aara tcu, x.ai ^ev
Tbt^cuo e-i? tcu; Xc'-ycu; tcj.
Na coy Etirtb sva g-o/aap,dv, ©ttou
Nal, EiTcs acu tov.
'Ev6yp,siaat pi Tro'cr.v (T^cy^riv ,
/.at pi 7to'g7,v £uvap.tv 6 MtXo'p-
(S'o? 'Aprcup <Ji E-rrapa/.tvEt va art
vum.^su8t[)5 TTiv liajteXav ;
Nai to Ev6yp.cyp.ai. AXXa rt <jyp.-
weoatvsis a.7ro tou; dwveTpEMTtxoys
Xo'you; too KaX.au p.ou oiXcu ; Asv
ri<>av dpa ^e OipsXiwas'voi sis to
otxaiov ;
'AeSVA'js pou, ol Xc'vct tou 'Aprcip
■ripiropoyeav va rvat ^p-nctpci ei;
aXXov ts'ttov. Ec; TW Aov^pav
eva; KapaXu'sr,; <5iv yjhti t:~c-
te; , av vjixcpsuOy; piav 'Kxiayr^ ,
aXXa Ttar ( i/.svviv >co'pr,v. Eyco ^ev
•ftyavaKTOUv y.ar' aurru <^ia ttiv
6-iPOTt9ep.svviv eyjiXstav rfi; tux*)?
tyi? , ap/r) eXowoufMiv iv.ovcv cJ'ia
exewiav T'/iv *pu77Tinv Jtsvo^c^tav ,
d-rrcD p.ol e^aivsw) va (BXetvo)- Etc
auTW. O' Il'Ao'p^o; 'Aprcyp, w?
U.Y1 ^x fJN ' xap.p.tav ou'Y'Yevsiav ps
i5<*
not enter into tliis. Indeed if
we reflect on his earnestness
then, and his intimacy now ,
we may believe that he per-
suaded you to relinquish her
from his desire to make her
his own.
B. You are exceedingly acute.
M. Believe me I'm very seldom
out ( mistaken. ).
B. I hope for once you are.
M. I hope I may be ; but I think
Pm not.
^iaa;, £h i^uvaro va QWS'fSfi ri
toioutcv" p.acX'.ra ccv cc-ict.oQuu.lv
rov rite Troflcv-TOU - , xai to -rrapov
Gappo- , ry.Topvju.Z'j va Tcf^e-uoaw
p.ev ou as erit&e va tyiv a^aTj?,
<ha T/iv £"7rt8utjt,iav too va tyiv
aTjoxrir.ar, afrro?,
B„ O voi>5 ecu sfvat irapa ttoXu offlijj
M. U\ri\ja£ p>ou 6- 1 cX/yai? (fopaTs
a<pxXXw.
B. 'Eatti^co on Teutvjv tyiv cpopav a-
wara^ai.
M. Tb eTTtOyixw, aXXa ^£y to TEt^eu©^
P. My Lord I am here at your n.
command.
B. A Style like this no longer suits B.
the lips of a Wife. |
P. Well then, my dear Husband, H.
what are your Commands ?
B. I have, determined on gratifying B.
you.
1*. Your whole study is to load me EL
with favours and kindness. In
what way are you now think-
ing to afford me pleasure ?
B. We will in two hours, set out B.
for Lincolnshire.
P. In two hours ! II.
B. Yes, get every thing ready that B.
you yourself may want , and
leave the rest to Mad. e Jevre.
P. Alas ! he thinks no longeF of IL
my Father. ( Aside )
B. She is confused ; it seems to B.
displease her. ( she does not
seem pleased. ) ( Aside )
P. Mv/ Lord. ' XL
B. You have changed your Mind B.
about leaving Town
P. I shall always do whatever II.
you direct, (as you please. J
B. She awakens my suspicions. B.
P. I have n't courage to give H.
him uneasiness
Kuf :e , l£ob eijiai ibta tig rh$
7rpot.rTa'va< ecu.
Autos OTpcnro: $h apu.o'£st ttXe'ov
ei; roc yj.ily\ jxta; au^u^ou.
Nat a^a-moTs k acu avep , ti $k
icptic&iiq ;
'AT?e^aai<ra' va at ey^apKptau.
'(■OXyi cou •& ^povTij £ivat vx p.e
i-nvop^-cV^cq oltzo eOep^soia; , xal
^apira;. Et; ri ^oyjx(z<ta.\ TMpa,
va, p.£ t\>xoL^cr,cr,q' ;
Msta (Jyo &pa- 6iXo.fjt.av Vjuiaeuait
<5\a ttov KovTe'av rou AivxoXv*
Met a £uo wpac;
Nat, £Toip.acrov ra -rrpbc x?"^ a: ' v ^'-^
<ha c^e Ta Xotrca , cppcvTi£st -h Kupx
Te'Ppvi.
( Otp.ot I $£v evOuasTTat ttX^'cv tov
•rraTspa p,ou. )
( li/pa^TOi* 9^ v£ "*& oti ?^V
£ucaps<r?.L )
Kupi£ . . „ o "
Ficat ^.ETavonafvw va d^ap; tt,y
fto'Xiv ;
©saw y.ap.-j) fravTOTE £, ti xatl
av pi 7rpo<ra^T,c.
( Me {S&Xe* ei; UTrc^'tav. )
( Ai'* -r&Xp.w vd tov papuy<i). }
& Wtiat means this change. A
few days back London dis-
pleased you; and now yon have
n't heart to leave it
P. As you wish it should be so,
let's go.
B. I have no wish to go, unless
merely to please you
P. I am obiig'd to you for your
kindness.
B. I am quite perplexed at this
coldness of yours
P. Excuse me , my heart is ill at
ease
B. And why my Lady
P. On my Father's account
B. On your Father's account; Ay?
P. Yes my Lord it would dis-
tress me to leave him
B, What can be wanting in my
house that your Father can
require
P. While deprived of liberty ,
he feels he wants the best of
tilings.
B. His liberty is deferred for the
moment.
p. I know it very well.
13. Who told you
P. Lord Arthur
B. Have you been talking with
Lord Arthur ?
P. Yes my Lord
B. Who was present
P. ]Vo one.
B. No one ?
y. On the subject of my Father,
it was requisite that our con-
versation should be private.
B, ( She's right ) aside
i5i
B. TlZJ.lkQ,, Tl X9UV3V stvsMi touto ;
e^uo;*f€5ou<i£, T<6pa (?£y as £a"
era -h x%?&ix v« t/jv &ipriGr,<; ° 3
!J. Eirstff^ depsaxat apt ( crcj , sa; (cc)
ps; u,o'vov (J'ta vk <r£ su^apt^cca,
II, Eiuxt UTTo'xp.sco; 545 t/iv /.aXoo6*
viQv crou.
acv.
II. SuLtTcafeiae p.s l^o rw xxp<ftav
jxci c«vox«pv;u.svy3v.
£. Atari MtXe<% j
IT. 'E£ at'tia; tou xaTpo's uoy,
B. Ata tov ftatipa sou « ;
IJ. Nat, MiXo'p^?" , jjflsXs ^ou »caxa»
cpavT] va tov aepvicu.
$. Ti %«-rrcpsT vx Xst'^ri ei's t3v ousm
jaou £ia T* ^oetoj^Ti Toy -rra-
too'; ff&y j
IT. Tcu Xci7Tii t$ xaXfiTspov , et<p' cw
to'u Xeiwst ii sXsuGea.'x.
B. H eXeuQspta tou &ik t^v iao«
dva.SocXXsrat.
H. To r,yeupo> iteXXa xxXx.
B. IloTo; <yoi to £ir:jN ;
n. 'O MiXbg^o; 'aotouo.
B, 'ftjAl'XlQCSS pi tov MiXo^ov 'Ap~
to'jo ;
II. Nat, Kupte.
B. nolo? tjtov Tvacvv j
If. Kavs'va? ;
B. Kavs'va? ;
IL Ata TTiv uwo'ScCTtv T?3 srarpo's y.oii ?
itpeirgi va "^iVcTat oiuXia {avci/.w^.
B ("E^ai ^«cy, )
(a) Sou , ck; before the Verb more vernacular, and y I may say „
at present, more correet.
P. Are you displeased at my* n
having conversed with Lord
Arthur ?
B. No, I am not displeased. B.'
P. He is the only Man I esteem , IL
for I think him honourable and
sincere.
B Yes, he's a good Friend £•
P. He is truly worthy of your II.
Friendship he speaks nobly and
with sincerity. He has all the
characteristics of nobleness and
( correct feeling )
B. ( She 's lavish in his praise ) B-
aside
P. He has great regard for my IL
afflicted Father
B. ( There's no harm , in her B-
speaking well of him on that
account. ) aside
P. My dear Husband is n't it n.
possible to relieve his mind ?
B. Yes we'll set his mind at B-
ease ?
P. But when ? IL
B. When ! When ! as soon as B.
possible.
P k He's easily discompos'd , how IL
sorry I am for this little failing
of his.
^. Prepare yourself for our de- B-
parture
P. I am ready, whenever you n.
please
B. Tell Jevre to come here B.
( hither. )
P. You shall be obeyed. II.
B. Don't go, unless you like it. B.
P. When with you, I cannot but n.
be pleased.
B, Shall we invite any company. B.
2b 1 xaxo'fa'v^at on toatXYiffa u.2
xcrv MtXop^ov 'Aprcup ;
Ox,t? ^s'v p.ot (u.c. jagu) xattocpaivsrac'
Eivat 6 jao'vos ap/ow, orrou Ttp.tb,.
xa: jaou cpaivsfxt di-iocrEJ3a<70<; xxJ
Nat, e'tvat xaXb; cp<Xo$.
Etvat a^to? dXr,0tva tti;' cptXta^
oou. AaXet jcaXw; » xat ja£ etXi~
ttptveiay. E-/,et 6'Xa rot flrpoTSpinu.a*
ra ty}; su-ye/etas , xal ^>tXc<ppo-'
cuvvi;*
( Tov e"YX.oip.tcxCet wapa -rtoXu- )
' Ey^st - jae^sXviv d-yaTrYiv «po$ ■ tov
raXat-irtopov -rcare'pa jaou.
( Av t3v eTwctvvi ^ta touto , edos
(S'ev eivat -rcovripia. )
'A-yaTTViu.sMS jj.su avep, etvat <$"uva-
tSv va jayiv T{i.7ropou|/.ev va 7-ov
Ttapvi'yopviffcdfi.ev j
Nat , 6i'Xoaev tqv irapn^opTisst.
*AXXa tto'te;
IIo'te Tro're' csov ra^^a r^airwe-
«JWJX£V.
( Zuy^u^era't euxaXcac' IIoctov jaoij
x,ax.ocpatv5Tai tcuto t6 juxpov eXar-
Tfa)lXa tou •
ETOtjxaaou (ha va dva^tdpr'cwp.f.v^
*Eip,at erctju.vj orav Oe'Xv;;.-
Eire tyjv 'ieSpviv va eX6?5 e£w«
O ptajAo; cou*,
A"v <^£V J/ cat. e'ux.apiCVi'AsvYi , [jx*
eXO^.
"O-rav eTjxat p.a£fl sou, $ev i5{mfg-
pw va y;p,ai ita'pE? e&-/aptg7){/.5vy».
©eXsi; va TCpoc/iaXsVoy;^ guv*
P. As f*r as I am ccucerned, I
care not for any
B. Suppose we ask Lord Arthur.
P. Lord A would be less dis-
agreeable to me than any one
else.
B. Do you like the Society of
Lord A.
P. I have no wish for it; but if he,
were with us , it wou'd n't be
disagreeable to me ( it would
in no way discompose me,
B. ( She appears to me innocsnt
Let me not suspect her ( aside
For the present we will have
no one. If you find it irk-
some ( get tired ) we will re-
turn to Town
P. I am uneasy about my Father
B, Talk to him. Assure him that
I keep your wishes in view. Get
ready for setting out..
P. I am ready, whenever you
wish to set off.
j53
XI. "Ocov to xar' e(xe, £ev {/.s'Xst p.ot
B- A? ^pccxaX$'cwixev tov MtXs'o^oiJ
'a P t:u ? ;
IL O' MtXo'fch; 'ApTGup rOeXe (xs dV
oape^via^ 6Xt^'a>Te?cv dnrb xaQs
aXXc; •
B. 'Aps'axsi est (a)-h c'JVTjo'f'a Toj3
MtXo'c^cu ;
IL Aev TYiv £-rri3ya5> , aXX' av $tov ,
<5"sv rlSs/.e act ^apu<pavvi.
B- ( Ms cpaivsrat aOwa. M« tyiv'
PaXXouev etg uirc^tav. ) Ata tvjv
wpav £sv OeXsi eXSfi xavEvets- "Av
PafeG^, es'Xoitev iw.sptyzi ilq tviv
IlaXtv.
II. IIcvco <ha Tiv Trar^fa u.cu«
B- 'OpXviasTO'j, peoattoasTOv o-t e'xw
irpo ocpQaXp.oiv tg'v ^g'6cv coo xas
rev t^txov Toy. 'ETOtixacou £ta tov
fAr,csuaov^.a.;.
IT. ©e'Xo> elp.ai. eTOtavi otav. O^cr?
va dv-xx^pTiccofjuv.
PHRASES FROM THE AVARE.
EXENTAVELONES, (i)
ZQITZA. (2) AND CLEANTHES.
In conversation at the back of
the stage.
E. ( thinking himself alone conti-
nues.) I riont know that I have
done right in burying in my gar-
den the twenty five thousand
piastres they brought me yester-
day. My Gardener is careless
enough, and never goes into the
garden, unless 1 drag him there
withme Somuch the better. Ne-
E^vTao£X(.ovTQ? ? Zwr'r^ xal JQsav%)5
( cuvojjuXcuvte; etc to eaurepov
TOO GsaTfG'J )°
E, (voiu^wv ort £ivaipt,ovo? s^axcXouOsT)
Aev e^cupto cu.w? av s*y<y sxap.a, JtaVa
*■ tt' E^WCTiC St.; TO TTEOtooXl p„0t> Tat?
ety.oct7r='vT£ y^Xtao^s; "Ypoaaa 3ca0a>?
p.ou Tobcpav I^Qe'?- O rap^oXapYis
p.cu etvat dpxsTa cLu,eXy;; xal <5"ev
TCOTfEt '? TO TTSpSoAt CXV <Kv TOVS
G'JOCD {/.OT^t JAO'J. To'g-o) jcaXniTEpa.
M' oXov tc/Uto £UocriTr£VTe y^Xtscch;
(1) Sixty Needles, Pinhunter
(2) Diminutive of Zwn\
6kinfli:
i54
ver the less, twenty live thousand
piastres is a considerable sum
for any one to keep about him.
(He sees Cleanthes and Zoitza ;
hush ) Hola ! I shall betray
myself! My warmth has de-
prived me of my wits . I
thought I was alone, and was
making my calculations aloud.
( To Cleanthes and Zoitza. )
Hola! what's the matter?
€. Nothing , Father.
E. Have you been long here ?
C. We are just come.
E„ Did you hear ?
€. What Father ?
E. Here , now. ...»
C. What?
E. What I was saying.
K. No!
E. Assuredly ( You did ! you
did! )
Z. Excuse me.
E„ I see you heard something.
I was saying to myself how
difficult a thing it is now a-days
for any one' to meet with
money, and was saying happy's
the Man that has twenty five
thousand piastres about him !
K. We did n't venture to ap-
proach you , lest we should
interrupt your calculations.
E. I have done well to tell you
all , that you may not mistake
the matter , and imagine that
I was speaking of myself, that
I forsooth had twenty five
thousand piastres about me.
K. We never meddle with your
affairs.
E. I wish I had them ! twenty
five thousand piastres ! ! ! !
K. I dont believe thai
E. That would be a glorious thing
for me.
«YjJo'ciffa, v'« va $a£fc xavs?<j fi.avC(
tcuj eivai (xta ttoctotyi; apxeTa* • • »
( pXsrcst rev KXeavfrnv xal Ttfv
Zwtivfrxv' ot^a ) AtSot ♦ 'At^c p.ov
01 ya wf o£o0a> ! O* 6u[ib$ (xou 'wtipe
tov vaiv ! @ap£<&<?a tto>$ elji.au fie-*
vc; ftou x' eXo^apia^a &{>«• ( IXfiy
xiv KXeav&nv x*l tw ZamrCaN )
E" ! ti elvou J
K.. TiiroTe Trot-rep fui'j -
E» Ei<j8s ttoXXtiv wpav e£$J
K- Tcopa or' iiASa^ev*
j£. H)co6ffar?. • • • • »
K. Ti Harsp p.ou :
E. 'EcSVo, Trepa » • • "
K. Tl;
E- "Oca eX^a.
k. "oxt!
E- 'E^a~avvo? ' £i-aivav7o<; !
Z. Me euu-rraSaTS '•
E- 'E-^co ^Ae'-nrca , 6'ti Tkeuaare x^rj
Tt. fifuXeuca pi tov ept,auTo'v {icy s
-reo'ffov eJuaxoXov sivat va eufvi x&e
vcT; aa-nrpa rriv <rr,u,spov. &ai e'X««
-ya' KaXoTuxc? , oeri; £'x a ttxoatT
W6VT6 X'^ao £S 7p9<JflF* H$~|* T0U ?
K« K* ^aei? t^sv EToXu.O'j<raas; va «a$
-rcXr.-siaaafxev , {atiww? J'laxo'tj'wfuv
T&i>; Xo^aptacp^ou^ era?.
E* E f 'xap.a xaXa , xai <?«? ,ra eiira,
p'Xa, ixr.-rroj; &xa?£T6 '£avcfcpocpa to
Trpsq-fxa, xac cpavTaaOyj-rs? qti eXe-
yz <ha t6v sp.a'JTo'v p.o'J, on t«x*
e'X<j> jxaT'Ct (aou tixocu^TS "^iXus^s?
-vso'craa.
K.. 'Hjact; ^»v ep^ocCvofxsv tt£ tc<;
uTro0?a:£'.; oa$.
E. "Asatcots va toc Etxa ! Ebcoatftsyre
viXt^*5 700'GGa! ! •' '
1C- 'E-/w ^b -n;t<r='^ ^'- • * • •
E- Tsuto -flTCv iToXXa xfeX'n ^cuXetflj
-yta '[is'v* •
K- Eat the?* it* things. - . - K.
1^ For I am in great want of E.
3I6ne".
K. I think.. .. K,
E. I should be quite at esse if I had j;,
them.
K. Yon are. ... K-
£. And I should not complain E-
as I do cf the hardness of
the times.
For Heaven's sake ! my dear K-
Father , there 's no room for
--our complaining of the times !
All know that you are rich
enough !
E. How ? I rich enough ? All E-
1? say so are liars ? A
greater falsehood can't be. All
who spread such reports about
me are mischievous Yarlets.
: il disposed. )
Dan't he angry. Z.
E. Ah ! it drives me mad. My E-
vn children betray me , and
become my enemies.
K And is every one your enemy K
that c::ys you are rich ?
E. Yes ! These reports of yours , E-
your extravagance will
be the cause of my ruin ,
( being betrayed ) or of their
coming at night , and cutting
my throat, ( haad off) thinking
me made up of Florins.
Aura S'x ewok •Kpjqp.xza. . « . «
K iyjj itoXXr,? ecvcfyutv a~o acrrfsJ
*Eya <r:7x^cy.at. ....
' HO =Xa s I a a : rt $XXa fa ax ski y, U c ; s
T !
av -x t:/y. •
KcC: cil; E?or&e .....
K*l ^iv r,9ilx va x}.xio)!i.x'. , 34*-
Qla; xaavo , yx tov xa-.piv , cr;
civ a: ijoXXa ^j^y^x; •
Av a-ya-ra; tou Gsov ! Ks)i ITaTr-
reason , ^cv «vci. Toy to'ttcv tou va
xXa-isSs a~; £:a rev xa'.oov ! "OXot
to '£eup6UYj ort evSTc ttX'vUtc-v a;-
*etc*!
IKk ; 'E^-cb ev/j ttXgutcv apxsTo'vj
"Oaci to >.s'-;;jv tlv?-. i^sv^at ! 3k-
faXpTspov $£U[&a ^sv euttc:-:: va
•yew. KaawTpairoe elyou oqct Sixa-
tccioow Tsroia Xvyia fia t' eaeva.
M? oi 8'jptc'vsTe ■
"A ■ tcutq as ^aiuov&st. Ta (<^'.a
u.cj rexva va ui Trccc3 v :c^cuv ? xai
vi ■yivcwreu ix®? i gtou<
• Kal iyfj?6? ca; eiva;, c^--.; Xe^eip
0T1 EXBTS ^XC'JTCV;
ZNa-sxs ' Autoe ecu Ta J.o'y.a x.x\
Ta ;;:ji orou 6e va ^aOouv av?!3
va [is -rroo^coccjv vj va e*X-
6:jv tw vjxto. va usu xoicuv to
xs9aXt , votct^evre; ae ffaxxj "Vii'.a-
t&v (jpXaoi.
SYESTAVZLOrfES A>'D ZOITZA.
E. There , so much for our lady
like beans ( Dandies ) they have
no more strength than a gar-
den stick. There my child.
s what I have decided on
for myself. For your Brother,
I have fix'd on a "Widow ,
E. Tux '$k Ta Capuptxa v afxcvTcTsf/.s.
Eivat fioa xxt\ ^uvara lax its nx~
Aouxia. Et& ^a xo'pr, jjtou. TouVo x~i-
^acica, £tx tov eaauTo'v ptcu. Aia Tcy
a^EA^c'v cou £^'.a/.2;a p.vav xa-ctav
^T,5av , Tree! tx; c'rrcta; u.e 'a'Xr.aav
i5o
they were talking to me about
this morning , and I'll many
you to M r , i*.
2. To M.rB.
E. Yes! a shrew J, prudent, mid-
dle aged Man ! he's hardly
fifty. Every body 's loud about
his Wealth
Z. I'd rather not marry, if you
please Papa.
£. And I my child, my sweet,
my darling had rather, if you
please , marry you
Z. I beg you'll excuse me Papa
£. I beg you'll excuse me, my
child.
2. I am Mr. B's most humble
Servant. If however it be
the same to you ( With your
leave however) curtsies, I'll not
have him.
E. I am yours most humbly ; but
( bows ) with your leave you
shall have him, this very e-
Z. This E-
srenmg
E. This Evenii
Z. ( curtsying ) that can't be Papa
E, ( bowing ) that shall be, my
child.
2. No!
K. Yes !
2. No, I say
E. Yes I say.
Z. On this point you will not
force me.
E, On this point I will force you
2. I'd rather die ( kill myself )
than have him for a husband
Jl. You shall not dip, and you
•shall have him. Did you ever
see such insolence ? Bit! any
one ever see a child talk in
this way to her Father ?
J ixxv$pl§to fie r'av xupix^viv Bap£a>
Xa[AT0UjU.7rav.
Z. Me rov xupiT£nvB^£aXa{A7rouf/.irav;
E. Na(<j*s I A vSpwrrov -snXw.tofi.Evov> y-ou
cfipdvi^.ov , xal 'ptixrao'v • Mo'Xt; e^ei
tou; TCevrivTa. Ta wXcvtyi tou ^a
oAot ice 9Y)p.i^cuv.
Z. E'^w, Tvdrep p.co, $h urav^peuoaau
av eivat dptcjAo; ca;.
E. Kat ''yw , x-o'prj jxcu , xo>v/.fc>vd pou f
yacWfjisV/i poo , 0e va as Vav^ps^co ,
av eivat optcrjj.es oa?,
Z. 2a; £yit£> cu'YX," l ? y i <Itv ■> iraTspp.ou*
jE. 2a; £/jto> <Ju^x«p7)Giv , jco'py) pou 1
Z. Elfxai Ta7r£ivo-rarvi £guXyi tcu Bap£a°
Xap.7vo6{X7va."O k u.cd? — (xau.vei cyji~
p,a TrpocrJcuvTioecoi;) ae tyjv ac^stav ca?
t^ev Se'Xw tcv ewagsiv.
E. Etaat TairsivoTfltTO^ £ouXg<; aa?. *»-*•
"Op.ti)? ( zafivst xat wires oyr>[ 1 - rL )
pi tyiv a^etso oa; > 0e va tov eirapvi;
Z. *AivoiJ/e :
E. 'Awo'ijiei
Z. ( Kauvoycxa g'/tiM. ). Tooro £sv -p
\erai ivdTSp p,ou.
E. ( xaavcov »ai auTo 1 ; cyjip.a ). Toutc
8s va ^ivy) Jw'pY) pou '
z."o r J
E. Naujxs !
Z. o-yscrjes , aa; Xc'f to.'
E. NafycG&s > oa; Xs'^'co.
Z. Et; to'jto to rcpa-yaa o sv fliXsre ft*
Kva^Jtaastv.
E. Et; touto to irpa-/iJt.a fls va ca;
dva'yx.aacD.
Z. ZxoTo'vopat xaXr.repa , xapa vx
'-rjapw TOicuTou avapa.
E. Asv ax-OTo'veaai , xai tov &-rracpsi;. ;
Fta 'c^s? d^tavrpoivia ! £tc?£ xcW
X7.V£l? JCOpJT^t va 'puXYJ TOlCUTOTpOWtd?
tov watspa xcu ;
2, And did ever any body se«
a Father marry his Daughter
in such a way ?
£, It's an excellent match. N6-
body can find fault with it.
I'll engage, all the world will
commend my Choice.
Z. And I'll engage that no one
in his senses will commend it.
E. ( seeing Demetrius at a dis-
tance ) There's Demetrius ! are
you willing we should make
him our judge.
Z. With all my heart.
E. Will you abide by his judg-
ment.
Z. Gladly ! I'll abide by whatever
he may say.
S. Tis settled.
SS7
2. K* e!c?e itork Kdve't? war spa, , va
'frav^t'Sip TOiOUTOTpOTTCd; tw xo' d
pnv tou-;
E. To pspo? sTvat TtoXXa jcxXc'v. Terrors
^"ev Ij^ftt vd VJj Jtavet?. 2toi-/yj|ao,
€d\>eo , #Xo? 6 xo'cp,o; 81 va "rtaivsav)
Tflv exXc-p |j.cu.
2. K' s-jfcl) s-cr/r.aa (3dv<i> , ore fcdvst?
cppo'viao; <^sv fie'Xst t*/)v &7ratvs<rsiv.
E. ( SAc'tfmv tov AtiuYjTpaxviv d-rco JAO."
xpcrt ). Nd 6 AY)^.y!Tpdi4Yi? ! Oe'Xet; vod
•rove >td k u.o)p.QV y.piTviv jx,x; ;
Z. Zrep^w.
E. As^eca*. tyjv Kp'atv tcu ;
Z. Mara x*p«S ' eu^api^ayjiai £t? o,rt
etTvf .
E. TeXetworel
Demetrius Exentavelones akd Zoitza,
E. Come here Demetrius ! we
have chosen you to decide
which of us two is right, I or
my Daughter.
D. Your honor no doubt.
E. Do you know what we are
debating about.
D. No; but your honour can't
be wrong, for you are justice
itself.
E. I wish to marry her this e-
vening to a steady, rich husband
And this madcap gipsy has been
telling me to my face that she
despises him , and wont have
him. What think you ? What
say you ?
D. What do I say ?
E. Yes !
D. Humph. ! Humph !
E. What ?
E. 'EXa '$& Anforrpaxn ' ff' e<hdXe'£au.stf
vd icptvip? vie, ck-no rou<; &\id [iz; iyj-i
^(xxtov , e-ya) , r, r, xo'pv) p.cu.
A. II suyevia ca; , AuQs'vra. ' xwp^
dj^oXiav !
E. -Eljsupei; -rcspi tiv&s elvac 0X6*^0? jxa^
A, 'OvV tcXtiv V] su-yevia ex? ^ev eairo-
peiTS va e^'/its athjcov , rS'isTi eia9s
E. 'Aitttys 82XM va rr.v UTrav^ps'^6) p.'
evav' av8p.co7rov /sat (ppo'vtpov x.cd
r.Xouctov iv rauTM. Kiaurfl "h (rp-'-fXa,
^ Top'p'va, p,l TW77S jcarx Trpo'cro)-
7T0V , OTl TOV Jt«Ta?ppOV£t, Xai $SV
tov liraipei. Ti ce <patverat j T4
Xejsic ;
A. Ti Xs^to J
E. Nal !
A.E w !e?
E. Ti ;
»S8
D. I say that, in the main,
I am of your opinion for your
honor cant be but right ; but
the young Lady , however is ?
not altogether wrong; for....
£. How ? Mr. B is a man of
great worth. He's a Stran-
ger it's true; but he's of good
family, respected, mild and a-
miable, and in good circum-
stances. He has no children
by his first marriage. He had,
as he says, two, but they were
murdered together with his
wife while on one of his Jour-
nies. Whom could she meet
with better;
D, True I but the young luadj
may say, that you are a little
hasty in the Business ; and that
a little time is requisite, that
she may see whether their
dispositions suit,
E> Humph ! this is a chance that
any one ought to catch at with
open arms. I am here of-
fered an advantage that I shall
never again meet with. The
Mans to take her without
Dower.
D. Without Dower? (fortune), (i)
E. Without fortune.
B. Oh ! Then I have nothing
more to say. There indeed;
that's an argument that at once
convinces me
Ec And as for me! it is a con-
siderable saving for me !
D. Assuredly ! the matter don't
admit of ( is past ) contradic-
tion. The young Lady indeed
rr.v •yvwti.Tiv <ra;' i-^v^r.-h EU'ye.vta gx;
^ev ejxwopeiTS va p.T|v zynre «?ixaic<^
OU.W? — scat aurr, r, xa-tj/o'jXa <?:>»
t/ti oXcv to a^txov. ETretcJ'Yi.
E. IIco;; O gupitTfl? Bap^aXaiATvcytt- x,
eivai av8po)7rog d^io'Xc-jo; ' Ss'voc elvat
dXriOiva, eivat 6'u.ai; Eti-jEvr^j 7;iOQp,svo;)
"jfXuxo;, r'aspo; , xal ircXXa y.oj3e&<*/r
ju.s've;. A it 6 tov 7vp&70v tou ^«u.oV
£ev e^si 7£*va. AOu ei^s > xa6o;
X^ii , y.oX row Ttvqwav v ua^i p.i
TTiV *p va tX3C T0 ' J 1 £ i; ^ a T&u T ~-
^El^t. II&IOV SXXoV £{Jt.T;0feT &J7T1 VflC
e3pT) xaXiiTeoov j
A. AXvjSiva • IlXr,y ^ x'oxxava 'jMrepst
vaoa? £i7r?j, ort *(Jav v.a .pia^f
©Xfysv 7a i7psc-j'u.a7a" xac or* yjieia-
&TCLi o)Jrpq xaipo? va tVKi xai autr 3
av ri y.Xtoi? tv); sty.TTopsI va 'ratpetacwj
p.£7GV.. .. ■
E. E"! AU77) elvat (*{a eyxatpia, t*jv
<57rc ; iav wpe'iret JCavEts va 7>)v dcJ'pa^n
pi 7a <SVo 7cu x s 'f '•#• 'E-ycd £upi<;x*>
£(S"u tuav £U7U)(,iav, 7r,v circ'av aXX«*8
TCU 7TC7£ c^EV 6e VCC 7^V eUpft). O «V
flotowe; rr,v ETraiosi vwpl; ^pclx.:*;
A, Xwpl; Tvpcua ;
E. Xcapt; -rcpoTxa !
A. £}" ! E<Su 77AS0V £s? 4/0 717TC
eitco). BXeure7S <$a ; Na sva;
: v*
E. Kiajlu-s ' toIjto "yva t' dalva Eivai
xajx^can oiJtovoata!
A. Be P a.i3Ta7a ! To Ttpavaa (^i'v sr.iJ'i -
X&70'. av7tXo , y.'av. , A>.Yi6iva,r) xc'py) ca;
ep.7Tcp£i va ca; &v6'J k u.ia*/3 , 07!. 6 -•;»-
(r) The former is the legal term, the latter more usual in con-
versation..
?3ar remind you that marriage
is a very delicate subject, and
requires consideration: that one
may thereby become happy
cr miserable throughout life :
that a union, that is to last
for life should be form'd -u ith
great care and circumspection.
E: Without fortune!
I). You 're right ! that settles all.
I don't dispute the point. But
some may say that in such
cases one ought undoubtedly
to consult the inclination of
the Lady. And that great dif-
ference of age, disposition and
sentiments frequently exposes
marriage to distressing vicissi-
tudes,
E. Without fortune!
D. Humph ! You need not repeat.
1 know all that. Who can pos-
sibly resist. But some fathers
■would think more of gratifying
their daughters than of their
pockets. They could not endure
the sacrifice of their children
to their own gain, but would
rather endeavor by every other
means to establish the union
on the congenial sentiments of
the parties ( espoused ) so as to
preserve uninterrupted its ho-
nor peace and joy , and. „ ,
E. Without fortune,
D. True ! this stops every one's
mouth. Without fortune. How
can any one resist such an
argument.
E. ( looking towards his garden,
hush ) Hark! I think I hear
the dog bark. Perhaps they're
after my Money ( to Demetrius )
Dont stir, Til be with you
instantly. -
uc<; eivxi TTfafua a&XXa 7u£/)Xcv ?
XXI X? £lJ ^ £Ta « TTpOCOXY.v' OT» , U.3
Tsjro •j.-xozil ik fivri xxv=T; euru-
on, y.ix crjvTpcpix, -fir;; 0='Xii £tap--
xiaiiv p''x?* Osvx'rcu, irps'wet va,
cuu^uvrirai p.l usyaXriV ffxr^w xal
•^acaTTlcr.T'.v.
£• Xoop I- Tvpotxa !
A-' Exsre ^txai-.v ! TcSto r« Xcr'?rrst 8Xa.'
Ai\ era; avT-.7ixQu.at. 'E^TrcpoCv Sjwas
tiv«5 va ca; ecrauv , cri ei? waso-
p.o(x; Tresirxcs'.; , avaacpi^^toc wos-
«sr y.ivtT? va Traparrjp'r; rr.v x-Xectv
T?fc KoTriXa*. Kai , on *j p-s-yaXn
£tx^op x rris 7jXix'x<; , xal tv;$ ^.^
0£C3u^ , xxi Tcbv cpovmy-aTtev xaiAvet
rev -yap-cv va uws'xsitom iroXXax-.; etj
GX«£ep« cypfk^xo'TX.
E. Xwct; ttocTxx !
A. A' i £e l v xpJ'-a^rai va pi to '{-avxet-
t^t£. To '?s'j;u ^oX>.a xxXa. ITo'cc
^capoXo; Ep.irop=i va evxvTto>6vJ 5
IlXrv , eivai xxurocxoi -jrarepsij t
etnve; -poxp'vouv xxXr-cOX va eox cZ>i
p(C«»v Tr.v x-Jpjv twv, ivxpa TW
caxxcOXav :wv. Ol Ttco^TOi (5^v utto~
^s'pcuv v* 6'jcia^ouv tz ts'xvx to>v
e«? to c£tov xt'ooo?' aXXi gnrfiShi 77s-
ptoad-repcv aro ^rav aXXo rrpx-yjix ,
vx GeasXic'vwjTi to auvotxsVtov et; tv!v
cK»«^pwvtav too av^popvou, yj 5«ot"«
dta'fjXsTT^i d^taxowov tviv tiit/iv ?
xstt tyjv £ip7ivy,v , xxi Tr ; v xafav tcj,
X4I 7) eivoia. . . .
E- Xwpl; TTfoTxft .'
A. MaXs^a ! touto xAsUi xo <?£u.m x%»
ftiVo;.- Xwpl; wpolx* ! II5>; v'«WT4-
C<x9ti xivel; si; evx toioutov Xc'-yov !
E» ( x-J7Ta<^)y -?rpo5 to 7cepiPoV-r«»j
cc-ycc )• A'l^cT ! MoO 9x^x1 v'axouo
tcv uxuXXov vx -yau^T). IIx; xxl
Treipal'cyv t ajTTSX ixoy ; ITpo; tov
AttavrrpaV/iv ) M"/i c.".X?^.' Na tte
x' e'fQxoa,
x6o
Exexitavelones , Demetrius , and
Master John.
J£. Come now Demetrius and lend
me your assistance here. Hola
Master John, I have left you
till the very last.
J. What's your pleasure.
E, I am going to give an Enter-
tainment this evening.
J. Marvellously strange ! how's
this. ( how now J.
E Come tell me , will you give
us good fare ( a good dinner
or siipper. )
J. And why not, if you give me
plenty of Money.
E. What the deuce ! Nothing
but Money. These Men talk of
nothing else but Money ! Mo-
ney ! Money ! Nothing runs in
their heads but Money.
B. Nor I , in my life did I ever
hear so impertinent an answer.
Humph ! A mighty art forsooth,
to provide good fare with plenty
of Money. This the veriest clown
.would do. Nay our old Cat
would do as much,, A good
Cook should know how to
give good fare for little Money!
J. Good cheer for little Money !
D. Yes.
J. Faith, I wish your honor would
let me into this secret. Other-
wise , take my place, tie on my
Apron , and do Cook : you
meddle (and make ) with every
thing : you're like Garlic in
every Dish.
E. Peace ! What shall we want
John.
(l) Kup TtavvYK-.
E. EXa To>pa » AY,ar}Tpa)aj , va \ki
GorMay; £<$«• E" xvp I\avW] ! ecs'vtf
g a.yr,xot. &Xov x,' u<tepa.
F Tt *vt) cuptcmo'; <ja; ;
E. 'E-fa), *op Ftavvn, 6s va xa|i.oi inotyt
r° Mci'y^Xcy. 8a\i/.a I ttco? xrav aura '
j&. Ficc 7T£s ja£ 6s yx p.2; xap/ps jcaXa
F- Mua apt, "ytctTt" <?a p.ol £oJ<re wouX-
Xa "yptfeia.
E. Ti ^iaScXo •' 6'Xo "ypo'aora. Tlut* oi
avOpwrcot £ev s^ouv a>.Xo t:ttot$
va 'ucuv , -{Aova^a •ypo'aaa, •j'oo'aaa ,
'ypo'aaa ! Toutov tgv Xo'ycv . g^ou«
-rravra'? to vou rcftv «ypo'<7cra '
A. M/zv^' e-yco ^sv Tjjcoutrasis rov friWv u.ou
toVcv ao^iavTCCwov aTPo'xpiciv- A -
Ms-yaXv} Te'xvyi p,aflc, va xaa\j xavets
xaXa cpa-yviTa p-,s rcoXXa ^po'crta.
Touto to xau.vet xat 6 nrXe'cv oupio?-
^ociaTr,;. To xoqxvet. x 7) "/ara [/.a;-
O xaXo; ou-a^-tp^ Trps-jret va xapvvp
xaXa (pa-ynTa u.s oXuya 'ypo'sia.
r» KaXa t^aia p. el Xi-ya "ypoata ;
A. Nat !
F. Ma tv aXr'Oeta cra'^-nroupsi; 7) acpeiv-
^ia <y (xaGet p.st x etp.sv auro rob
p.y^txo. Ei £el (at; , wap' tv a£;'a
p.' xat Cwjou ttjv «ou£ta p.' xal ■ys'-
vsi pt.astpa;. 2i 6'Xa Ta irpaaaT
avaxaTcoveta' ei^S piica , aav tou
Kpou|i,a6^ 5 '? Ta tpa I a,
E. 2uotcyj! ti 8s va p. a; y^eiaoQoOv xl>p
Fiaw?} ;
i) Usual in speaking te an old Servant.
jf* ; "Let vour Steward look to that;
he knows how to give good
cheer for little Money.
E. Pshaw! I wish you to an-
swer.
J. How many shall you (sit down)
be at table?
E. We shall be eight or ten : say-
eight: where eight can mrtke a
meal , ten may (will find some-
thing to ) eat. (i)
D. Certainly.
J. Well! say ten pounds of meat
for Soup and Bouille , ten
Fowls, a Lamb for stewing.
E. What the plague : this would
be enough to feast (entertain )
the whole Town.
J. Roast. . ..
%. ( Puts his hands on John's
Mouth ). A Murrain on you I
You'd eat ( me out of house
and home J up all I have.
J. Saltfish ( Sturgeon J Salad. . . .
E. ( Stopping his Mouth ) More
still ?
tbt
V. Ap,' V5C £l<5a> V] TTlTpOUTTC.'? Qv.; (a) !
Auto; '£s'p' va xi[x xaXa ©al'i p.si
Xi^a •ypoaia.
E. 'nfpou 1 'E^w 6c'Aw va p.' cc7;c/.pi(to;;
ecu-
F. HoV 6a vac? \ tou tpawef;
E, ©i va 3 pa<r6e bV/rw , r, &h%. Ba'Xe
c»tw , TPta^'cuva x.ai ^sV.a.
A. Bs'Paia !
r. KaXo ! BaXet si; ouxat^&t; fcpe'a; (Sou-
£tvb <ha cou-rca >oo Spans', A^&
•pviSsi;. "Ev' apvt S'ta p,a*ystpY!t>7d...,
E. T*. <fra(3oXo I Au~a cpGavouvs va
atXsucwa oXyi 77jv TroXireia !
T. 'Orcto
E. ( fis&si to /ipt rou at; to co'pa tcu
x-jp Fiawm ). A' xarnpajitvel 'Ecu 6s
va ok; oXo to 4 ©id; p»ou.
T. Hypi^ta * 2«XaT ....
E- ( psexa tcu opa'Cci to sou.!z}i %xj\j.&',
(a) ©ETTaXtxov i'6o; va Trpccpspwaiv u; sttI to irXsT^ov tk dpcsvt/.a ova'para
jAS.apSpcv 8vjXuJco'v. H' <juvr<Qsia sp,eivsv a770 tcu; waXaiou; Acoptst; pa;. 'Ex.stvei
aX6«yov,« *n TapTapo; , ^ $60770;, 7j Ia8p,o; », )tal 6'Xa tk ouota^txoc twv
cjcauTo);' t'-^e wept AiaXs'xTwv IaV.&a©'„ Zu^/.epov. OEconomus.
(i) It is difficult here to give, in English , a correct idea of the
different senses of the Aorisl ©sfycuvs , arid the Present Tpw^ouvs.
O NOMAS TIC ON
OR
LIST OF WORDS OF MORE IMMEDIATE USE
UNDER DIFFERENT HEADS,
t
N. B. This Mark * indicates Words to he of Hellenic origin not y«t g&*
nerally in use, this mark § Words of foreign oiigin very generally ia use*
Of Heaven and the Elements.
lisp: tcu cupocv«u xa\ tuv soi^dm.
(.TOP , o ftelifi , gen. cu.
Jesus-Christ, 'incrou? Xpico§", ou.
The Holy Spirit, T d &ytsv iw*3fA«.
The Virgin , ^ wavoqia 5 t'a? , Vj 0so-
The Angels, ei- #YTsXoi, mv-j
The Saints , 01 07101 , uov.
Heaven , 6 eupavo? , ou.
The Heavens or Firmament , to
^ep^'w^a , «to?.
Paradise , 6 7rapa£st<r«$ , »u.
Hell , vi xo'Xa<r.? , s<o?,
Purgatory, to xaflapTTiptov GrCp), iou.
The Evil Spirit , © ^ia(3sXo? , ou.
Fire, ^ cpwrta, ta;. to wup, t&u Twpb?.
Air, 6 aspa? , a.
Sea , Y) 6aXa<j<ra ,. vis.
Earth, -t\ «p5, r?. a ( to x^M*** <xto? 3 )
Land opposed to Sea, ^ cepsa,
ea<;. v) £vipa , a;-
Sun , o y.Xio?, t'ou.
Moon, t« cpe-^?epi , toOY vi eeXrvv), *i$.
Star , o a<rvip , epos, to a^pov.
Ray , Beam , % * farls , Tvc?. Sun
Beams , ar *jXta*sai kxtTv^,
Cloud , to «6we<pov , oi>. it clouds, is,
or is becoming cloudy, ffuwe^ia&et.
Wind , o av2{xo^ , ou. d dspa$. it i»
windy, ©usx.
Rain , $ (3poy^ , $;, Heavy Rain #
pa-^aio, £pox*- Drought , dva-
Pp°X l *« * avcfiPpia , a?.
Thunder, Clap of Thunder, ^ £pov*
rri , r;- It thunders, ppovra.
Lightning, ^ » T paicyj, ifc. it lightens,
a<rpaiTTet«
Hail, to x***&» l °y. it hails 9 xaXatfa*
O/" ptTTTSt x a ^*C'*
Thunderbolt,* 6 xspauvbs , ©u, a ? p fl -
•jteXekc
Snow, tox^o'v?, too. it snows, ^tovj^«K
Frost, 6 roryo; , ou. it freeze* , iqi.-
p'vst.
Ice , ^ jtpu?-aXXo? , cu»
Dew, ^ ^po'ce? , ou. ^^pcffta, t*s*
Fog, Mist, x xaTaxvia, ta$.
Earthquake, £ seiff^o? * ou.
Deluge, Flood , 6 xaTaxJw^s ». «&'
Heat, Vj £eVr,, *>;.
Cold 7 TO jtpuov j «0*
t.6'5
Of Times and Seasons.
Bays of the TVeeh.
Slept tc2 xaipoij xat twv uswv tguetoU?. JlI Huipa;? r?i; E$£oaa^G$«
Day > 7) 7Wpa, a;.
Night , v] vuxt« , a;« * tv:; vwere$.
Pnooii , 70 [££<rousp(j iou.
Midnight , T a uicavyar*.
Dawn , r, au-p , m\
Daybreak, T a ^pap^aTa. ra £v)ttsp«-
fxara. it dawns, or is dawning-,
Sunset , -jn J'ugs?. -ra PaotXsua* TOU
4Xi«u. the Sun is setting , pcwi-
Xsuet 6 rXtc?.
The Morning- , to* woupvo , ow-
Evening, T o 3pad\i , emu- adv. a<rro-
Ppadfis* This evening , alroye.
Hour, % wox. half hour, gu<ra Spa.
quarter of an hour, T o * Ts'raprov,
cj. to § jwuap-ro , »u.
To day, cr'aepov.
Yesterday, E 'xSe«- fyis-
To morrow, auptov- the day after
to morrow , T7jv £fti» %ip»* ,
■rijv i^aupiov-
The day before yesterday , wpoxOs?.
The day after to morrow, uegayciov--
Aiter dinner, T & etovynipa.
Week , r, ip^oji.a<5 , a , bf.
Month, c p. viva:, * tou u.vjv»V-
Year, 5 xpevo; j cu - ~ : -> c"tc:, cj;.
t, xpcyia , ta<;. I wish you a happy
new year , <j« ; sfigopn aaXw
a?y;.JCpcvisc.
Moment , r ^i^ar) , %.
Spring , r ( afootfe , r,;,
Summer , T k axXcxatpt , io».
Autumn , to «p8ivs'?rcapev , ot>.
Winter, 6 y^taava;, a. 'Tis winter,
y_c'.a«viaa£.
Festival , ^ £ pT7i , ifc. Holyday ,
r. <ryo'Xri , n;.
Working day , r- -^.Hur^yr. } »j$.
Monday, rj foutepa, a?.
Tuesday, -» T piTV>, *;.
Wednesday , ,, T*Tpa£« , «;.
Thursday, yj ««pni , w;-
Friday, V) Trscpxcrxrjv: , -/:;.
Saturday, T o'§ <ra££aTo,cu.
Sunday , yj xapiax^ , rfc.
Z%e Months.
January , § b iaveuapto? , iou.
February , § b oeSpouapto; , tw»
March , § 6 fiap-to?, iou.
April , § 6 dwcpiXios , wu.
May » § o p.ai'o; , ton.
June, § 6 louvtoc , iou. 66epig , /)?» %
July , § 6 106X10; , toy. 6 aXcavicp/;?, n«
August , § £ a5?o<j<rc; , cu.
September , § 6 vsirripppcoc > &»"
o rpu-y^'vi; , vi-
October , § o 6*T»]3pi©$ , icu.
November , § 6 voep.€ptos , igu.
December , § 6 £fexep,£pcog , fcuw
Fasts and Festivals*
At 2y,o'X7.t; , a! 'EopraTs*
New Year's Day , to* vs'w ere;- 7j
( r.aa'pa ) tow av(cv BaatXeiou. r.ai-
Circumcision , ■£ "respire^ j ife.
Epiphany, Twelfth day, 7 a 0eo'f«-
vsta. ra «pwra«
Carnival , v\ dr:ox5£ta, et«;, piur.
oti d-rvo/.peiat;.
Lent, r, casaxs^fl , vj;. v^ Teffffa^a^
Fast, r, vvj^eto, eia?. to fast , to an-
stain from flesh, vyiceum. Tpw-y«
vr.q-'.'ia'.ua, - aapax.o<riava.tO break
1 64
fast voluntarily, xaraXJoj. - in-
voluntarily, dcraivojAy/.. aor. {,0 riV .
To eat flesh, Tpw-fta x;ao-/aXtva , —
Passion Week , ^ pe-foXi] i^oaa^a.
Palm Sunday, T a ,3ai'a , afwv.
Good-Friday , r, u^-aXY) Trapao-y-suYi.
Easter Day , V) Aauwptt , %.
Easter, T o fla«x«.
Ascension, ^ava>w|>i;,* ews-
Whit j Sunday, « wevrwKos??,
All Saints, ■« soprin twv a"y'wv Travrwv.
Christmas day , T a xpr^cu-^evva, wv-
Harvest, 6 Sepierito? , so.
Vintage , 6 Tpy-yc; , ou.
Ecclesiastic Orders.
IlcOt ey//6Xr,aca^tx£)v A'^iwaaxcov*
Patriarch , 6 warpia
ptapjno?, cu
et*.
Metropolitan ? c ^rpcwoXtTus , cu.
Archbishop , 6 apxiemaxases , eo.
6 ^ccr-irr,; , ou.
Bishop , 5 e ^'eraoTro? , cu.
Legate , 6 Ii«pxo£ , do.
Presbyter, Priest, 6 7;peo-guTepo; , cu-
& -^a-a; ; 5- c Upeo; , s'w;.
Archdeacon , 6 ap//.£tay.cvo; , ou.
Subdeacon, uire^tajocves , ou.
Deacon, 6 £ta*ovo? . ou.
Archimandrite , 6 apx l pww£piT«s, y
or r,.
Curate , a sV/iuipto; , tou.
Prior, 6 v.-vcuucvc? , ou-
Monk , 6 >wcXo-fssQ; , ou. o * [xoysc^ov,
CVT0?.
IVun,^ x.aXo-j'p£'.a,i'.5;-r,*(jt.ovaCcuca,r^.
Preacher , | Upw^pul , usee?.
Hermit , 6 ao-y^r/jc , oo.
Convent , Monastery, to {xova<r>ipiov,
iiu- t. uiovt; , ?i;. t$ p.sTc'x,i , i&u*
Customary Articles a/ food,
Ta irXeov covstOiapivs cpa-^TaV
Bread, T o ^uul , too. — new bread,
fynetpo*. I gain my hread — *-
my livelihood, £j5«ya£«> ~* t^F" ! xc '- 1 *
Water , T q vspov , ou. clear , pure
water , aaOapo* veoo'v. — thick ,
disturbed ftoXo'v- — cool , yux,poV
hot , £ e <ro'v. lukewarm , tepid 9
XXtapo'v- — boiling, 3pa<rc'v«
Wine , to 1 >waal, tou.
Meat , to xpsa£ , eaTO?.
Fish, to $apt, tou —fresh, § ta-
fe'Ttxo. vtoTuo'v. — stale , cayXov.
Boiled Meat, to €p.a<ro'v. to vco>-
3p«?o, cu.
Roast Meat , to iviTov , cu-
Cake , Pie , to § ftizciu^iKi , iou- '
to -Xay.cuvT'.ov , tou. r, /xixct, a;-
Soup , § ri acu-ra , a;.
Broth , to £(Ofv. , wo>
Salad „ § r, axXx-ca. , a?.
Sauce, § r, caXT^a , a;-* to eu^au.-
p.a, arc?.
Ragout , Hash , 7 b £prup.x , octo;.
to y,xpu*£uu.a ; aro?.
Dessert , § roc cppcuTTa, wv- ra orca-
ptxa , civ.
Cheese , to Tupt , tou-
Table Articles.
Ta wepe tt,v Tparr^ocvv
Table , to Tpa~e£t , tou.
Chair , § r t joapeaXa, a?. »«(M>cXa, «£.'
Table cloth , to Tpas»&>{AaYTiXo, cpu
or oy.
Fork , to xvipouvtj t«.
Knife , tj fiaxatpe , tou.
Table-napkin , § $ tcst&tt* » a;.
Spoon, to xouT&Xtj tou- to j(ouXtapt>tflu-
Gravy spoon; sauce-spoon, bootccX**
Plate, § ri iriaTTC, eu. to rciva'xtcv, tcu«
Dish , § to irtocTTO , ou. Vj cbrXa^a, a?-
Candle , § to xept, toy. Taper , to
K*yt6xe'pt , tou.
Lamp , § $ XouT^spva- * o Xuxvc?.
Night, Lamp, § to xavTtXt > tou.
Wick , to cpuTtXt , »u-
Candlestick , 7 b Xuy^vapt, toy.
Snuffers ,- tc i-aXt^oxspt- t» xepotpa-
Xl^C , IOU-
Chafing Dish , § Vj ^ouJ3ou , ou;.
7j OYJ^OU.
Basin , § % Xexavy) , y;.
Water Jug , to xoup.dpt , iou.
Cup, Glass, TJjcou^a, a?, to 7roTr'pr,tou.
Bottle, § ^ p.rort'XXta. to {/.-nroxocXt, toy-
Large — , p.7roxaXa.
Tea or Coffee-cup, § T b ©XtT^a'vt, toy-
Saucer, § T b £dp<pt , tou.
Porringer , 6 § TsvT^pe; , s.
Cover, § rj iroo-a^a , a;.
Large Basket, T o xo^ivt iou. Large
hand basket , yj xaXa'Sa, a?. Hand
basket, T b xaXa&t , toy.
Bread tray , % ™vax«ATY! , ri;.
3 ^ Pints, § r. dxxa , as , plur. at
sxxa^e; , oc^cov.
Animals etc, us y d for food.
Z»x e^woVta, xal t^ixcpopa sI$yi twv
XpSOTtoV.
Ox , to pco^t , tou. Ox-beef , T b
Co^ivo'v , ou- understood jcpea$;.
Cow, xd^cXa^a, a?. Cow-beef, to
a^sXa^ivov xps'a;.
Calt , -rb t/.ca^apt, toy. \ eal , to
(xocr^apictcv.
Sheep , T o irpo'Pa-ov. Mutton , to
TTfc'SctOV, etcu.
Ewe, 7) TrpoSaTtva , a?.
Lamb , 7 6 dpvt, toy. the Meat , to
apv:a',ov , tou.
Hog 3 Pig , 7 g -ycupouvt , iou- o yor
i65
ps? , cj. Pork , to yct'ptvov s ou-'
Fowl , rt cpvtGa , aj. § to jco'ra , a?*
Hatching Hen , yj xXcocrffO. , a;.
Cock , 6 ttjtsivs; , ou.
Hash, Mince, xpe'a; dpfSeXtirov , -*«
xeims'vov.
Sweetbread, T a fXuxa^ta, t5v.
Tart , § ^ ^t Ta . Must-cake , %.
u.ou<raXsupta , iaV-
Ham
, to ^otpojxept , iou.
Sausage, § T b Xouxavtxo, cu.
Smok'd meat , 6 7rx<roup{/.5c; , a.
Force-meat, § 6 xscpTs? , s. § 6 vtoX-
y.a; , a. 6 cap(i.a;, a.
Caviar, T b ya£tapt. toy.
Salt fish-roe , 76 au-^OTa'pa^o , ou.
Pilaf , § 70 TctXa^t , tou.
Sweetmeats, § ,5 X aX6a; , a-
Melon , 7(5 wsTOvt , tou. Water
melon , 70 ystjAcvtxo , ou- § t&
xap?rou£t , toy.
Cucumber, T o d^cupt, tou.
Gourd, to xoXoxuvOtov , tou. to xoXo-
xuOt , tou.
Chicken . to wsT?tvo'wouXov , ou. § t&
xotottouXov , ou. Chickling , to
xXcoacoxouXt , tou.
Pigeon , to wsptce'pt , tou- young
Pigeon , to ireo^reGaxt , tou.
Woodcock, yi 6pvtO&«xaXi£a, a?. § yj
[AiTcxaT'Ca , a; , tq £yXo'xoTa , a$.
Partridge , 71 irep^txa , a?.
Thrush , V) x( x Xa , a;.
Figpecker , 6 auxo^a^oc , ou.
Lark, 6 xopu^aXb?, ou. "h ^aptflpa, 0,5.
( y\ auTaptGpa. )
Quail , to opTu^t , tou.
Pheasant , 6 ^aatavo; , ou.
Turkey , § ?! xoupxa , a?. § t$
VTtvTto, tou.- ^tavo; , "j-aXXog. ou.
Go.ose, Ti /r.vcc, a?. Gosiin, to W
vaxt , tou.
Duck , ii iraTTirta. t<J -sraTTTrt. ic«»
Duckling , T o -na.Txi:dKi , tou.
Hare , 6 Xa^'b; , ou.
1 66
Rabbit, § to xcuvs'XXt , tou. young
Rabbit , to xcuvsXXaxt , tou.
Beer , to £apxa<h , too.
Wild Boar , to a-yptcpupouvo » toy.
Stag , * v) e'Xatpo; , ou. to eXacpi> tou.
Game, to a-yptfu , teu. to xuvy.^i , toy.
Fat , to 7raxc? , oug.
Seasoning for food,
Ta etpTUGTtxa.
Salt , to «Xccc , ecTO$.
Pepper , r d 7rtTs'pt , toy-
Pimento, jj «MMpt&-, a;.
Oil , to Xa£t , tcu.
Vinegar, T d £t'ch , tou-
\erjuice, ^.apupl^si.^ a?.
Mustard , to eivcfari , t«u< S "h JW
^a'p^a , a?.
Clove , § to ^apcucpaXo , oy.
Cinnamon , * to xtwau.cau.ov 9 ou*
§ r> xavs'XXa , a?.
Caper, ^ xxTnrapyj 5 w?.
Laurel , vj <5a<pv>i , v»?.
Mushroom, to u,av.Tapt , *eu.
Onion , to xpojjtu.u^t , tsu.
Garlic , to 1 cxc'p^o , ou. to % ctao-
go^ov , C'J.
Orange , to -nopTcyoXXt , toy. Se-
ville Orange , to 1 «ep«v?& tou.
Lemon, to Xtu,dvt , too.
Parsley , i p.av^ctvt;, oa. ?o p.ax£-
^ovtot, tou. ii u.upwd N tsc , ta;.
Celery , to cts'X'.vov , ©u.
Purslan , vj -yXy^t^* , «c-
Endive , mxpaXuh? , i<$W pa^t'xt.
Lettuce, to u,apc6Xtj tou.
Cress ? to x«p^ap.ov ^ ©o- tk x»p<5'a i -
p.a. Small Salad , eaXarct «;wo v
xap£ap,a.
Butter , to SouTupov * eu.
Lard , to jrotptvov waxo?.
Mui ? T o -yaXa , tw •yaXaxTO.;.
%g , to «u76v ? ou- bard egg ,
Poached egg, au^a t^*^«-
Omelet ^ to ©-90077070 > ©u.
Fish*
Shellfish , fa 6r?.*xo'£e»u,a » wv.
Cray- fish, * xapaSufa, ©;,
Prawn , VJ -yapi^a , «?.
Lobster, 9 d^axo? , ou.
Muscle , to p.6o\ » tow.
Oyster , T d q>i&'» tou.
Scallop, TO XTSVt > tou.
Razor-shell, i cwXYjva, ««.
Sole , ^-yXwffoa j v)$.
Eel , to xs'Xi > tou.
Roach , y, T^Xvi. § to p.irapu.wouvn
Pilchard, § yj cap^a'XXa , a;.
Anchovy, Smelt , % caapt^a , aj,
Vegetables,
XopTaptxa.
Peas , § tk Trt^'XX'.a. Chickpeas,
to pepiet, tou. Parch'd peas , i
Tpw^aXioc j i«£.
Artichoke , ■« dTxivapa , a?.
Spinage , § ta ciravaxxta, twv.
Sorrel , V) ijuviOpa , a;.
Bearss , ra xouxta , twv.
Kidney - Beans , tcc ^>ai?ouXta> to)v»
Turnip , , to 70776X1, tou.
Radish
•0 ps-rravt 3 sou-
Carrot, * to ^auxo; ? ou;. Ta peuxta.
Leek , 70 irpaoov 5 cu.
Asparagus , to cTvapa^^t, tou.
Cabbage, to Xa^avov » ou. to xpap.-
-ttI, tou- to xpaprfieXst^avcv.
Cauliilower, to xouvouui<Ji » tou.
Pickled Cucumber , -/} ^oupapu/a*
Sourcrout , r, X&xavap k aia , ta;.
RlCC , TO p'.^t J t&U,
£ke Dessert
Tk 0170) pt>i««
Apple , -• jxrXov ? oyo Apple Tree ?
X u,»Aia , toe?-
Pear , to Air& 3 uu. Pear Tree ,
Peach , to po£axwov , ou. Peach
Tree , ri po^ouuvigc, t«;.
Apricot , § T9 xxuw , tou. § "h t^c.jta'
Xou£a j a;- Apricot Tree , £ *xr
ff'.a, ta;. r T£a?~aXou£ta > ta;«
Cherry, to scspast, ie5* Cherry Tree,
7) xspcwta > ix?«
Fig , to aujcov , su. Fig Tree , r\
crista, ia;«
Plum , to ^aaKffjcyivov » «u. Plum»
Tree , x £a{*.a<T/.7jVta , ta?-
Strawberry , § *j «ppaouX« , «;.
Grape , to c<x<puX'. ? lc ^* Vine , t®
apiciks. j tcu»
Pomegranate , t& fxa^t , tou. Pome-
granate Tree, -fi pco^ta 9 t«?»
Sweets , Sweetmeats, to "yXojm , eu=
Walnut , to xapu^t , tou. Walnut
Tree , r, xapucWa , ia;.
Kut, to XsoToxxpov, tot>. . § Nut Tree,
TO CpOVTGUJCt, tou.
Chesnut , to xa?avov , ou» Chesnut
Tree, r, xa^avta, ta;.
Almond , to ApbyfaXw, ou. Almond
Tree , yj d[rj*y£aXix , ir$.
Mulberry , to sux.aut.tvcv, ou. Mul-
berry Tree, r, cuxau-tvia , tac«
Quince, to xu^vt , tou. Quince
Tree , ■£ y.u£a>via , ia;.
Olive and Olive Tree , $ &aia. a?.
Ztegrees of Kindred,
Baflaol rJfc su^zvii'a;.
Father , s ^a7 = pa<; , e- * tgu -jraTpo;.
Mother , -n ftTit-soa , rri; jMfiTpf's- ^
167
Grandfather , *a*rad$. © tc«7t*
tjouXiq; , 7j.
Grandmother, r, repojATiTMp , epos.
Great , Grandfather , 6 ftpo'ira*.
tto; , ou.
Son, 6 ut^$ , o5-
Daughter , rj roj*}, r,;. yi Suptvs'pa t
tUq {KryaTpo?.
Brother , *" a£ri$a£» ou. — Mater-
nal , a^sXqpe'c a^» {/.rjTs'pa , — *
Paternal , d™ iwrspa. Brother
and Sister , or two Brothers f
tk doiX^to;.
Sister , Vj a$eX<£$ , ffc«
Eidest , fAs-vaXYiTspo? , epvj ,
■jrpsaj&TegfGS , ep« , e^sv.
to'toks; , 6 > vj.
Youngest , pxpoTepo? , epvj , epov.
vscorspo; , spa , spov.
Uncle , Gsig? , ou. 6 {z.:rapji.TP*; , 01.
Aunt , r t Qilcc , a;, rl a^xta, ta;
epov.
Nephew ,
Niece
ave^io? »
ti «ve<j»ia •, ta?.
Grandson, — Grand Daughter ,
? "^ e^'vovoc, ou»
Cousin , 6 ei-e^sX'f 0$ , ou-
Brother in Law, •yuvaHcawJ'eX'p*?, eo-
6 ■yap-Spo? , ou- § 6 jccuvvoiocto; , ou»
Sister in Law, ^'yuva'.xaiJ'cX^, n;-
^ x.ouvvotaTa , a;.
Stsp-Father, 6 refispb? , ou- 6 u.y)"
Tpuio? , ou. Step-Mother, r, iveecpa,
a;,v\ u/flTpuia, uta;.
Son in Law , 6 , ■£ wpo #, Yovoc , ou.
Step-children, tx vgcf&M , tav-
Daughter's Husband , 6 ■yau.^po?, ou.
Son's Wife , ^ vuftwyi , n;.
Parents , 01 -vovcT?, ecav. 01 Y 0v£t ^'-3 £iwy»
Husband , Wife , 6 , r, au^up;, ou.
Bridegroom , 6 wupf to# tcu. 6 «yapt-
£ob$ , ou. Bride, ^ vu|A<py) , yj;.
Illegitimate , V o'9o?, vj, ov. §p.ira<rap-
^o ? .
Godfather, § 6 xcujiTrapo; , cu- God-
mother , yi xouanra'oa , a;. AIs©
Persons giving away a Bride.
1 08
Sponsor, b ava^e;? eu. % o vovo?. ou.'
Female, Sponsor, -ft ivo^ex©?, *> V0VK '-
Godson, God daughter, 6 , •/) ava-
<^jxt6? , ou y 6 |3a7rTtGtpMo'(; ou> vi
Woman in Childbed, r\ Xe^tiwa, a?.
iNurse* ^ (3uSa<rpfcj a$.Yiirapa;j.avva,a$.
Relation ,6,7) (ruyyevvi; , ou;. Rela-
tions ^ oi awfyiizTi; ? &v.
Friend , 6 cptXo; * ou. - — $ cptXvi , n;-
r <ptXsv<x£a, a?.
Enemy , expo's , a ,. o'v.
Widower, Widow, 5 yrn?o$ , -h y^'pai
Heir Heiress ^ 6 , -h xXnpovo'[/.o?.
Guardian , t Iwtfpowos * ow. Ward,
* e £7riTpo7reuo'jj(.£vo? , y\ lwtrp-6w6U0jfc6*
vvj . o j tq j avnXtxo?.
Betrothing , 6 appa£tovia,o-p,os , su.
Marriage , yj uivav^peia , siaq.
Wedding , 6 -fapif? > ou.
Alliance by Marriage , -fi o-utiitsOs-
gesa , stag , The Persons so al-
lied , to cuu/rceGspetdv. t« cup.7f&"
fispiaaa.
Different States of Man
and IVbman.
Atacpopet jtafa^ao-st? tou av^'po; Jcal
>% fUVaiKOS;-
Man Mankind generic , 6 avfloW-
7rr^. Man specific , husband ,
6 av^pa? , tou av^pe'?.
Woman , Wife, ^ -yuvawea, a?.
Old Man , * 6 ^s'pov , ovto?. Old
Woman , i fpata * ata$. Old ,
syspos , -ypsia, eta?.
Young, new,veoc , ea , e'ov. Young
Man , youtli, 6 vsc<j, Young
Woman, ^ via.
Lover, Sweetheart , & a^awViTticos ,
cu- 6 epa<po? jou- o epwfjisvo; , r oVya-
■jTYlVucii. *!0 epa^-pta: vi spwpivY].
Infant , to 3pe<^j , oos. ChHd, to
wauJ'l ; t*u«
&oy, tS otyo'pt > f«J- ^^ > ■« K^l
little Girl , to xopaatov ? tou-
Bachelor , 6 avuirav^poij*, ou.
Bachelor , Spinster , 6 , yj wasS^vos.
Master , Mistress of the House ^
6 vGixo&upy};, Yj. ^ votaoxupa » as.
Man-Servant , Maid-Servant , •
<^ouXo$> iq e^ouXa.
Maid-Servant , § $ ^owrMxri. Vi £cu-
XeuTpa> ac«
Peasant , 6 xapiarvi; , n. Peasant
Crirl > "fl x^P 1 * 710 ^ •> a s*
Stranger , Foreigner , $ ? ' v *> , », ov.
Pauper, cpT«x5? , ri » o'v.
Mendicant , Beggar , 6 friTiovfts , e».
^WIAO^TV)? , CO-
Thief, 6 xXs'^tyis j yj or ou«
Of Dress.
Ta TSspl t« evouu.flifaJ
Cdat, to 90'pep.a 9 aTo;. § to poux-> ou^
Hat , § TO -ACLTzillo. * TO CX'.OC^tOVj tou-
Wig, § vi itspouj«ca, i'j.
Cravat , § Xat^o^eVfl? 5 vj oi* ou.
Cloak , to e^ftxpo'pi j tou- fi £7kavto©&-'
pe'0.a j ccto$"*
Waistc6at, § 7 b ^tXlxSi. § to cw+~
xap^t j tou.
Smallclothes, Breeehes,§To 6pa>4tjtoui.
Drawers , to eo'w3paxo , tou.
Stocking, ^jiaXT^a. § ToxaXT'Couvtj to3»!
Shoe , § to TvairouT^i , tou.
Shirt , § to uTT&xauacovj cu.
Sleeve , § t b aavtxt , ou.
Cap , § 73 cxoucpta , ta?.
Scul'lcap, to cpecrt , tou.
Packet, § i tCe'tcyi, toc-
Ribbon, String , Lace, >j jtop^sX-
Xa ) a;.
Button , to xoixirt , tou.
Buttonhole , ^ OviXeia > eia;. also
slipknot.
iLtlot , c Ho'iatcc? , cu.
Glove , to jretpoxTi » iou.
Handkerchief , § to p.o.vriXi , .ig3-
Chaplei, string of Beads, to xep,-
TToAo-yt 3 iou.
Watch , to iopoXcfyov , iou.
Buckie, § ri oiiATTia, ta$.
Garter , xaXT^cch'r/K ? w or &«,
Ring, t3 £axTuXt£i9 iou>
Comb , t6 xts'vi j iou.
Razor, to Sjupacpt > joC
Sword , to eTvaGl s wv». Sword
W ound , 7i oTvaSta , ioc?
Cirdle , -h luv/i , r, ? . Waist-band,
Pistol , § 7) *iff4a ? «?. Pistol- bail
W ound 5 rj -ju^oXiet 3 ta;«
Bridie, § to ^ipx , iou. * * x a ^ lv °» ?
cu. r& -/aXtvapt , iou-
Halter, § to" xa:nsrpi , iou.
Saddle , * to £cpi-nriu*v ? iou, S ^ <*&-
Xcc> «?.
Stirrup , ^ TraTrjTpta > ia§- S f«
&"fXtj iou.
Whip , r\ p-c^ifa ? a;.
Switch , to pafi^i , iou .
Boot , to uro'^yiaa , ar&?«
Spur , TO <pTSpVl<7TiGl , tOTJ-
Bead-dress , § to exoucpcoact j aTO?.
to y.T£%tc 4 u.a j aro?.
Petticoat , to /jucroooucavo , too.
Apron, r) src^a, ta;.
Gown, Tocpcuq-avi; iou- vi § pop/rca^ a;.
Pearl , to p.as^aptTapt , iou.
lieeklace, r\ apfx«.3ia, ia;. tf toocx^'-"*
Ear-ring , to GxoXctpiai ■> %yi'
Curled , § xar'Capb; 9 ti ? c'v- cyoopo? 3
7) , dv. One -with curled hair ,
c7oupcaaXYi;-Hair-bar.d or buckle,
to xor^aps. to ^ou-^po'.
Fan, to av B p,'.rvipi 3 iou.
Busk , § o p^ou^o? ? cu.
Bracelet, T 6fJpaxioXij tou<
Pin , vi xap^ir'Ca , «g. ti &sX#r
169
Pincushion , § to xou|3apt , iou^
Scissars , to t^aXi^i , tou.
Thimble , 7) «S*xn>X"fi6pa ? K£»
Needle , to 1 peXcvt , iou.
Thread , r\ xXwc^ » vfc.
Paint, to <pTia<st£i , t»u- t» xoxxtva^tj
iou. I rouge, (p-riavcfAju. Rouged,
cp,£vc<;-.
Beauty-spot , •$ sXaa eta?.
Rose "Water , pc^oVap.o , cu.
Hair-Powder , r, cxo'vyj , vj?..
BOX , TO XGUTl , IOU.
Jewels, T« cS'to'p.avTtxa 9 6>v. tk «£*
Tpa^ta 3 twv.
Diamond , to £iap.rm 9 iou:
Emerald , to cpaooq^t , tou.
Paiby, to pGUpvrciVl 9 tou.
Toothpick , * $ o^ovTe^XutpU , ihg.
Cloth , to wavvt j tou.
Distaff , ii po'xxa , a?.
Spindle , to" a^paV/rt , iou.
Silk , to p,£7a^i ? icu.
Worsted , to p,aXXl 9 tou.
Starch, glue , § ^ xo'XXa 9 a?J
Soap , to ca«ouvt 9 tec,
Sheath, Needleease, ^erixTi,^. *
^eXovo6rjxYi 9 yi?.
Ta p.€py) to$ cwp.aT0s„
Body , to xopp? , tou. Shape , Stae
Height , to avaqr«{j.a 5 aTC<j. S to*
p.Trct, , tou. Waist , r^ u.£jti ? vi?.
Head , -re x£9aXt ? tou-
Face , TO* WpOClOTTOV, CU. VI {XOup'fl 9
»>c. Vulgarly, toc p.ouTpa, «v.
Forehead, to xoutcXXo ; ou. * to y.£-
TtOTTOV 9 CO.
Eye , to part 5 tou. Glance, ^ p,a-
?ia ? ta?.
Eyebrow , to <ppu^t , tsu.
Eyelid, to gXs'^apcv , cu.
Eyelashes, t« p,aTo'xX6c^a 5 twv,
X3
Pupil of the eye , i X o>n , # j
&ar , to auTt , toO,
Hair , >i rpfya , as. Head of Jfaitf,
the Hair , rcc p.aXX*.a, tfov
Temple , * 6 xprra^o?, o'u. e j^JXcv'-*
Tf*s » f
Cheek , /§ to' ftayouXo , ou.
Nose , a (A-jrw , yjs.
Nostril , to' pouQouvi , i*u.
Beard , ra •yl'vma , etwv. to shave,
£up(£op.at , shaved , ejuvs;.
Mouth, to* co'fta, arcs.
Tooth , to' ^o'vtc , uS>
Tongue , r, -yXuffcra , vjj.
Lip > to' £61X95 , »u;.
Mustachio , to' fx,Qu?& , wS,
Chin
, re wyjyouvi , toy.
Keck , o Xatpi? , ou.
Ihroat , 6 ^pojp"^ , u^o^J
Back , ^ paxvi , vie.
ShcMder, vY?rXa™, *» ? ;
Arm, dj3p«x''cov, evo£. to' £%"j toy,'
Elbow , 6 #ffiwv«s,- a -
Fist , » ^boq , «u. Blow with the
fist, V) YpoQcay a?„
Hand , to' x j 'p e > copuLr
Finger, to ^a'xtuXo , ou.
IN ail , to vu X t , tou.
Stomach , to 1 so\).i%i , teu.
Chest , Bosom , T d qrMi , ouf.
Breasts, T « €ufra , av-
Belly, tf-jfoUwc , tap.
**.ib , vi wXeupa , a?. Side . to' tfX&u-
TfAVel , £ o'^aXo? , ©3-
Thigh , to' fwpl , tou.
Knee , re* 70'voc , tou •yflvaroc*
Leg , Tfi' CKe'XoS , OU?. TO TC0<£l, jeu-
Calf of the Leg , 77 ayrfc, a;, to'
•ya^pojcvvj/Atov , tou.
Foot, ro" tro^apt. Sale , yj 7rar«uva.
I kick , xXtrioto , & kick, x) w0 t-
&a , ta;.
Heel, jf ©rlpva , a;.- Shoe-heel »
§ to* Toxxftdvt > io3|
Colour, complexion, Tl ' tfifUtfMf
rorm , T0 ' ffx^f**»'*r6c*
Gait, Carriage/ w , *pojpfi a |ui,*to<i
Plumpness , T o' wo^o? , ou 5 . * 71 eu-
orMfA'atta , ta?.
Slenderness, Slimnesa, 71 Xi-Yvrfm;,
Brain, 6 p.uaXi?, Brains 3 T « ji.uaXx»
Blood , to' «?p« , aro;.
Artery , *1 ^tvipta , ta ? .
Vein , ti (pXs|3a, sfc.
Muscle, b puuv , o'vs;. 'tV wevT-'txaxi,
tou.
Skin , to* mr?t , too, ro' ch'p^a, arc;.
Heart , 4 w^ix , fac.
Liver, to' cvsxwti , ecu to' ctxo'ti ,.coi#
LungS, d 7TVEUU.WV , ove-.
Intestines, 4k Ivrejct,; «v. t« ev--
To'c?9ia , ttov.
Bladder , ^ cpou<i>ta , a;.
Spleen , VU^va , a;.
Gall . Bile , ^ x *x»\ , ifc
Saliva , to* oaXtcv , tou. Spittle ?
to iTTXtGiia. y o.xq;.
Perspiration , e&>o)Ts;,Teut<$>T^
Cough , 6 g% a? ,' «.
Catarrh , 6 xarappou:, ou. ref crovar^^
toy. affeeted with a catarrh ,
xaTappoTaop.£vo$. ouyaxw{Aevo?.
Breath , ^ avarvori , %. T .» axv«TC#
Ta fl£'!«r6nT>ipia:
Sight, * vi opaat^ ? euc«'
Smell , * 7i ocrcppvie-s , a^^J
Taste , * 7i *yzuaiq , ew;.
Touch , * 7i d<pvi , $;,
Hearing , ^ axon , ifr.
Sense , to' acuQ^rrptov. 4 voy;«
Sensation, Sentiment, 71 ataeTxrc?/
Tt 1 aifffiyjpca , arc?'.
Of Study.
The Study, xo' c-rvo^^x^r'piov , toy.'
Book , y£ [3>.§X:cvj it/j. to' /.aprt, ts3.
Paper, T o' -/.atari.
Quire , r0 ' tetcx^iov , t'ou.
Pamphlet , $ tpuXXst^a , a?.
Leaf , to' cyXXoy ? oy.
Page, to 1 KstquigaTby 3 ou. * r, mX&
the.
*P?n, ts' xov^yXi , toy. to' tttSoov ,
SU. § Ti 7TEVV0C j a?.
Ink , to' u.s>.avi 5 toy.
Writing cr.se or Ink stand , § T o
xaXajAapt i id. n m.6X*vo6w; , rj;.
Penknife , to' xcv^yXcjAor/atpoy > teu..
Twine, § 6 awa-ye? , #u % .
Sana , c aau.05 , oy.
Seal, Wafer, 'r, c^pot^cc. §r ; ptfftMfr
Letter, ^pa<^ > fa.
JNofe , to' yaawfAxney , toy, tS
YpaaaaTKxi, wu.
Writing, ~o ^ad'.acv, aTCi.
Pencil , Black-lead 2 Pencil , T <3
uoX6ct , 10D. TO fioAt>3cJco'v^uXp\i , ou.
Lesson taken , to" [Aataqpac, jcto?.
Lesson given , r, uapa^offt? , eo>;.-
I give Lessons, wasa^t^w.
Translation, ^ jt gT B$p«flris .? s«c.
Exercise , T d es'ux , aror. I write
Exercises, 6e^T<r/p$95 , ii*.
Portfolio , T 3 j^apTO^uXaVaoy.
Musical Instrument?,
Mou
>p*yava.
Violin , § to PtcXl , icy.
riute , ayXd; , o.y. ^Xo*y*?flCj sc;
Bag-pipe , § -/j ^^ a , a; .
Guitar , r, xtMpa , 1x5.
Harpsichord, T q xu^iratXoM , rj;
l^te, ^ x6oa, a,-.
Harp, § i £ ?w « , «??
Trumpet , r 4 ffoXiw^^ ? a*.
Drum, to 1 Tua^avov , oij.
Parts of a House.
T« toy c<jTryirioy»
Ilouse , to* ffrr'rt , toy. * r, otsctaj
Door, §x.-ffo|j«, a;, * lii 6630; , a*;
Room , § 6 ovfa; , a-
Hall , § t, ffaX* , a;.
Court-yard, •£ auX* , %.
Window , to" waaaQujov s toy. to*
wapKO'jpc , toy.
Kitchen , § 7J xsurCtva , ac. to' v " jax-
ysioslov , e£py.
Court 9 6 ayXoyupo; ,. eu. r, «yXr,, ■■?;;•
Well , to' ??v>ya£i, toy.
Stable , 6 q-ay'Xc; , ou.
Wine-Cellar , $ oivgQwmi , vis- t*
yrroyotcv , sicy°
Stairs , §'yi erxjjX* , a?.
Stej>, Stair, 6 €a9uo; , ou- to' cxa-
XcrraTi , toy.
Garden, to' -nrEpiflo'Xt j toy , 6 ///i-rco^
oy. § c (juraxT^es, s.
Fountain , ri ($pu<n} , ?)?•
Floor, to' TraTfoact , aToc»
Terrace, to' £uu.a, cto;. •/. acp«"
xta , ta?«
Granary , * to- o-iT&.So'Xtov , tou. to
§ olij-zv. 5 tcy.
Roof, r ( ax£-'/)) "«([',' .
Tile, to* xeoa|jt.iA, ici3>
Gutter , § rb xavaXt , toy.
Wall , to § TGofj^ot 7 tou. d toTvc,- j o
Chimney, § d ^ou-ppoj 3 ou>
Brick, § t6 t&53Xov , cy. rd afc8i>'iou.
Floor , TO TTXTOiy.a , (XT0?*
Cieling-, c opocpj;, cj. § Td Ta^ocvt, to".
Oven , § 6 qoOovo; > oy.
Beam , § 'h -jpsvTa , a;.
Plank , T9 cav't^t , toy.
Water-closet , $ y.seia, £-'x; , rk
ava*yxaTov 3 aiou.
. x 7 a , 4
Hire , Rent , to v voixi , ijjfi'r
evoixtov j io'j.
Plaster , Stucco , 6 p<^c; , wl
Lime , c ek^e^ns , vi.
Marble , to v fia'cpapov j ou.
Stone , $ 7T£Tpa , a;.
Dovecote , * 6 weptcepsav ,^&h«v
Furniture.
Ta <rxe6n.
Looking Glass , £ xa9o£>rvif , u.
Sofa, 6 cccpa; , £•
Bed, to' y-2e,5part, wo.
Sheet , T fl' o'.v^o'vt j tou.
Mattress, T o' ^wpLat , 1**0?.
Pillow , to- § {fea|tXX«pt , too- to
Trpccrxs'cpaXov , 60.
Bolster , •£ (jcajepuvapa j a;- p.a£iXXapa.
Curtains , Bed -Hangings , * to
7rapa-7T;Ta<ip.a , arc;.
Musquito Curtains,^ J6ooyoo?«spw,a*.
6 xwvwrroXci'yo? , O'J.
Bedclothes , T0 * ^arrXufxa, aro?.
Chamberpot , to 1 0.77210 , ete& to
xaroupXoxc'Ja.aso -j tcu-
Night-chair , to" wfflua j reo«
Tablet , * 6 *{«£{■ , axo;.
Border , Frame , T o v ureoifiwpi. §
to xtvaoi.
Chair , § ^ xapg'xXa. vj xaGixXa,
Carpet , § to' 7Vc6xi , tou. © Ta-
^v;? , yito;.
Chest , § to" yoprZict. , to^J- * ri xt-
(Soto; , W>-
Bnreau, Clothes Press, § to' jfaftdfeu
Chandelier-lustre, g *&XosXato;jOtteo.
to" < !teXu*dvTtX N o > tou-
Tapestry . T * xfrtvpfE , are;.
Painting, yi^pacp'K, i&s- ariiSf. The
art, v] ^to-v'cacp'a-, or -q ^wypaciwc^, ifa.
Gilding, to' ypuc-iop.a 9 aTO?.
Statue, to % «•,'<*) pa, aTc?. The art
of sculpture , * d^dttpaito'ivoifri 5
i'«c° '-'• «*Y«v.ftaTtTca7iTt)eTa ? r*»
Bust , * v; frpsTjsuv; , 7i*.
Pedestal,* T0 ' frecOpov , ou. * $$*.
<T.? , £0>£.
Portrait , •£ eCxe'va, fc.
Cage , to 1 *}xo$i , tou.
Of the Fireplace.
/Ta rcifi TTiv xautvov.
Fire, vi awTifc s ta$.
Fuel , Coal j, to' § xa'?!5ouvo , cu« *
avdpftS j aitc?.
Ashes, Tjf^axTi}, vu»
Fireside, •$ earta , ■cpouyapo?.
Burning stick - Fire brand , 6 £ao-
Xb$, ou> to' £aoXt , tou.
Log , to' £y).cv 7 eo.
BelloWS , to' (pUffGOVt , tou.
Firs-Fan, to' avefitcispw te ^ j
Brasier, § to' jAayyaX. ? k>o-
Shovel , to' <pruapt , toy.
Tongs , § 7) aasta , ta;- r, wopa-
Tp*> a;.
Matches, T o' £a£l, too. to 8sia?o-
xs'pt , tou.
Steel , 6 TEOpo^oXo; , ou-
Flint, § to ^-oopvapt , itu.
Flame, 759X0'^, a^
Smoke, 6 xa^vo; , ou. it smokes,
**«vtCet.
Soot , vj xawvia j ta;.
Of Kitchen Utensils.
Ta <yxeuY) tou ax^tpeiou.
Spit , 7^ a«u(?Xa , a;.
Pot-hanger , « xps^aVpa , a;.
Kettle, Boiler, T o x xaxa'^t 3 tou-
Copper , § to 1 xatavt , too. to ^zX-
xwjxa , aTo;.
Fryingpan , T o Tvj^avt , tou.
Gridiron , r, ioydpa. , a;.
Saucepan , § TST^eps's, e. Pipkin,
b Tapa? > a-
lender s to 4 rpuwvjTev ? oil
Skimmer , to* £ac?pi<Hpt , ioS-
Pitcher, r, cawva , a;.
"Water- Jug pr Jar,§ to [Mrpixt- icu.
Fail , § 6 xcu.Sa; , a* 6 at^Xc^ ? cy.
Pot, § to v r^aux&t > toy.
Chafing Dish, ftwoSw, so?.
Grater , to* *yeuc?t > tcu.
Pestle , to' ^ou^o^spi ? iou.
Broom , -£ cppoxaXwc , ice:, to ffxpou-a j
ttTCc §ri axouTraj «;•
C osier, § r, iNtt&tptfpet , a-.
Of Cellar Articles.
Ta r*nc otvcSw,;.
Hammer , to' cowl , v»y.
Cask , ro €gut# , icy.
Barrel , T 6 BapsXi , tcu.
Funnel , to x*>»« • «$•
Bung , to ^-ourwjjt,* , «to;-
Wine , T b xpacl , iou.
Dregs, Sediment, Vj rpwy« , «-.
beer , * 6 £66o;, ou- § to fAiripo*, a;.
Must, § 6 jmrS^ooo 5 ** To*yXeu<w;, ouj.
Belonging to the Door.
Ta tvI; 8uoa;.
Key, to xXet^t, toy. Picklock or
False Key. , T o dvrtxXe&h , k».
Lock,^ xX=t<$ae'.a, ix;.r, jeXs&Jovia, ia;«
Bolt , 6 wspinusj ». * o fio^Xoj j 3 r j.
Hinge , 6 ps£; , e.
Threshold , T o JMfrwcpXotov , cu.
Beli, § V) x.aurravs'XXa , a;.
Small Bell, xoug^guv. , iou.
0/ &£&/e Articles.
Ta £Osi(j>co'ji.eva etg tgv £«3Xoy«
Hay, TO y:CTCV, O'J. TO £eOT«Sl» »3.
Straw, res a/;jca , uv.
i 7 3
Stubble , r, xaXauia, ta;.
Trough , r, (jparw} , «$. to itos.'/yl, touj
Manger, Rack, § T a xi-yxsXXa*
Bran , tcc TriTUpet j cov.
Curry Comb, $ £u?pa, «&,
Barley, to xpidopi, wy.
Oats , r, Spo'uY) , yi;. * c afyiXo^j (Di»0^-
Sieve, to koVxevqvj cu.
Horse , to dko-pv , cu.
Mule, § to txouXapi , iou-
Ass , 6 vat^aco; , ou. to fa^cupi, wu«
to -ycaa'ct , iou , this last signifies
also a load.
Groom , * d fcrroxo'pog j cu.
0/ « Garden.
Ta Eupidxo'ffsva et? to icspi^o'XtOv*
Bed , iq Tvpaer.a , tao
Scarecrow, to a/.'.aVpovjcu. r sxwcJCTpa-
Trellis, -ft irup-puXia , tag. r, xpe(W
rapta , ta?-
Arbour, * to cxr.vuaa, aTo;.
Ptose , to TptavraepuXXov , cu. f t rptav-
■^aouXXia , ias«
Jasmine or Jessamin, § to ^ias=-
^ (*.! , OU.
Pink j § to ^apo'cpaXo , oy.
Lily , to Kptvov ) ow.
"\ iclet, to tcv, tcu iou. S to fiavoufftj..
iou.
Hyacinth, 6 uasuvSc;, ou.
Poppy , 6 «.v^:c6)v, cove;. 6 XaXe£.
Apple tr?e etc. See page 167,
Box, to ■sculcept , iou.
Pine Tree , S ^euxc;, eu.
Fir , d eXxTo; ? cu.
Oak , y, ^gus , uo ? . ( to ^e'vc?pov. )
Poplar , 4 Xeujog ^ ^ ; .
Elm, y; fljrsXata, etaj.
Lime, ^ylXupa, a;. $ «ptXwpeta> eta;.
Beech, * Tjcpy^o; , cj.
Myrtle , r, ^-joto;.
Thyme, 6 5-ao; , ou.
Nursery, to euTtiptov } feu-
174
Ivy , 6 xt£$$e , ou 6 xiceap'/i; , vj.
Arm , Limb , T 'o xXwMapt , iou.
Branch, to xXk^I, icy.
Wood, Forest, T d ^«' ffo; , cuc .
Shade, vj octa , toe;, d i'<mo; , iou.
Basin , Pond , Reservoir , § $ ^ a -
S3au£a , ac. •fi ^s|«^evn , vj;.
Canal , Conduit ,' * T q aiXoixi , iou.
Ditch, § to xav^eext.
Spade, to Xiavip;, teCi,
Dignities,
A £Ccop,&Ta.
.Emperor , © S«crtXsu$ , fog. 6 ai>To-
/CpaTwp , opo;. Empress , r, fiaov
Ataaa, y;;, or a;- tj auTOxpaTo'picf-
ca , a;.
King , 6 prrya;, a. 6 paatXeu;. Queen,
71 Paci'Xioroa.
Prince, § d wpiyYuJi, wo;. 6 auk'v^jjjvji
Princess , 71 7rpi-yxi7v£<j<Ta« tj ku-
p(a , ias-
Duke , S^av , ovoc § £ou£ ,
ocuxo';. Duchess, ^ TVyefAovl;, .t&c-
Count, Earl , Countess , g d , r ; xd-
[xyi;, tito;* 7) xo'ar,ff<ja, a;.
Marquis , § 6 {Mcpxwco;. Marchio-
ness , y] ttapxeciva ? a;.
Baron, 5 6 SapSvos 3 eu.
Baroness , § ■£ ga.?a.vi<je*;
Knight , iifkehq . s'co;.
Ambassador , § j fl^ , y. * J
irpec&j; 9 eco;.
Governor , 6 sirapxo? > eu.
Consul, § 6 xo'$oXo;, ou. * irps'Cs-
vo;, cu-
Vice L.Onsul , 6 avTiirps^ve^i
Lord Chancellor, Keeper of the
Seals, [/i^a; Xo^oQsrn;.
Chancellor , § 6 xa-YXsXXaptoj , wu.
§ c xavT£sXispn; , yi.
Superintendant Steward, Bailiff,
« eiriTpeiroi > su.
Treasurer , * Syisaupo^uXa^ * axe;/
President, 6 wpo'e£poc> bu.
Counsellor , * 6flouXeM« , oO: I
ouft^euXo; > ou.
Judge , ^uaq-'Pi; , ©u. 6 xbit^; , ou-
Barrister, 6 ouvY^'opc; , ou. 6 £1x0-
Xo'-yc; , ou.
Attorney, d evToXeu;, &*g.
Secretary , 4 w«pjtix-ff6e , lag, 6
Xo-pOsTV);.
Magistrates , ©1 ap^ovTc; , o'vtcov.
Common - Council-Men , ot £vr
jLtO^Sp&VTS; , o'vtwv.
Primates - Chieftains , si wpcc«7a)T£;;
MTCOV.
Notary , § vwrxpic; ^ iou.
General , 6 ^pcar/yd; > ou.
Generalissimo , Commander in
Chief , cipytq-pjcTYi'Yo; , cu-
Cavalry General , Commander of
tl].e Horse , d frnrocpx *'
Lieutenant General, 6 ^tecr^h^ ov*
6 Ta^t'apy 4 0.; > cu.
Major General, d uttccpottyrYa;.* ou.
Colonel , d yj.Xtxp^o; , cu.
L. Colonel , 6 urrsxtXiap^o; y ou.
Major, 6 avuxcXiapxc;.
Captain , 6 sxaTo'vTotpxo;} ou-
I. st Lieutenant, * 6 avdsxaTcvrar^o;.
IL<* Lieutenant , Subaltern , 4 0^-
xaTo'vrapxc;.
Quarter Master , 5 5-016 jio^otvj; , cu.
Sergeant , © ^e^a^apx ? ' cu * ^^ r '
geant Major , 6 wp©To^exa^as&'
^o;,. ou.
Corporal, d ueara^apx*? > cu *
Army , to <rpaTeuu.a ^ ctTc;.
Division, * $(to'pa>«c»
Brigade , * ^ 7ijAi{ioft*> i«Cr
Regiment , to TofyjA* ^ aTo;-
Bataliion , d Xj^o; ^ ou. Square ,
to wXivfiicv , t'cu.
Troop , -^ t'Xri , yi; ?
Company ? 7igt>i[%>z> a;.
£orporai'« party , 3 m^ii , &<*
Hank, <$ frf3«, ou.
File , o cfyo? , ou«
Infantry- Footsoldier , I fffi $¥ , ©5.
Horseman , * fo^us , so;.
Infantry , r b irtfucw. o{ *«&,'.
Troops of the Line , T d foXtTtxa'v. of
cfrXitai. Light Infantry , & l tyXw*
cl eD£&>voi.
Cavalry, T o irrrn/co'v- ou^7rsTj.
Cuirassier, ae»pajco<?opos, w.
Dragoon, o<$\>a X c ? , «u.
Lancer, 6 /.ovTo^opos, ou.
Trumpeter, coXwt^s , cu.
Artillery, § dprttttyi* Cannon,
§ to row.
Gunner, § 5 ¥0***$?* f|.
Sentry , $ ^aw , jfc, PatroS.e
_ Picket , § T o xo'Ui , iou.
Pioneer, e^wedip , vjpo;.
Spy, Scout, 6 xaTccffKoir*?', ou.
Standard a Colours , Ensign , Vj
B %f*ge , ^ dffocrxeu^ , to I am
packing up , cu ff xsua'^cw , aor
Admiral, r ^par^o? , c vauapyo? , cu.
Captain of a Ship of the line, 6 r ? «.r r
( P a P"/.'^? > oy •
Captain of a frigate or Smaller
Vessel, 67roTfriidp«p^o$ j ou.
First Lieutenant, 6 avTtTp«jp«p X os,cu.
Midshipman , I Hsst.^xu^qq , cu.
Pilot , Tvpapsus , SO};.
Boatswain , 6 xeXeusro , cu.
Fleet , 6 <ro'Xo;. § -h apua^ct-
Squadron , 6 fu>cpo$ 5-0X0$.
Flotilla , 6 5-oXi'ffxo? , ou.
Ship , Vessel , to tcXoiov. to xapafc.
Ship of the line , xaoaraxTixo'v.
Three-decker, rptirXou'v. rp-^pco-
Tsv. two-decker , £«s3louv. <ft-
r?wrcv.
Frigate, § ■■ ^psfar*, «;.
Corvette , § T 6 xopSeT-rev > eu»
I*~ig , § ?fc Ppiki'ov , icu,
I75
Appertaining to Porttficaiion.
T« 7T£Ol TflV O^upwffty.
Citadel, * V) dcxpo'-oXt* , s<a;. § x%
<ppoupiov > lOU'j
xacpo , cu.
Fort, Castle, * t j 0,30,5
§ t8 xoi<rpo , &
Arsenal, $ fa\*Mm , to
Walls , t'X niy^ , wv.
Rampart, re | ?Uf ^.
Palisade, to x.apK^w^.K , ara^'
Bastion Tower , 6 irfpj* , ou.
Battlements , 3 &r«X?t« , eg>;.
Curtain , T o jjief awrup-Ytov , £cu.
Siege, ^ TToXtooxta , t«?.
Capitulation, $ »%p|«« ? , ew5 .
Sortie, yj e>c%ofAYj, to
Assault , ^ Tet W *#a, i« ; . £ wpo ^
ffSoXfl ^ to
Professions, Trades,
'En&.fyiXy.XTot. xal Te£vs«.
Printer , £ Turoypofyoc * cj.
Physician , $ £etx-po« , ou.
Surgeon, • xeipoupyoc, ou.
Druggist , Apothecary , i ^^ %K0 -
7:w\nc, , ou.
Barber , § 6 pfeftppi&put , yj. *' 5
xo'jpsu; j e'w^.
Baker , 6 (^w}i,a^ , «.
Butcher, § 6 p-axeXXa'pto; , cou. * 5
JcpetairMXius ^ ou.
Vintner ; Tavern -Keeper, § 5 Ta=3
PepvapTis , yj. 6 5cpa50ivwXTO
Shop-keeper , 6 epya^pta'pTO. »•
lailor , © pa^TV); , vi-
Boot- maker, u-o^ixacra,- , a.
Shoe-maker , 6 w«ivouT?yi? , vi.
Cobler , § 6 (XTraXw^aTas 5 a-
Sculptor, 6 «yaXjAaT0tt8i$s , ou»
Painter , 6 ^wypottpoj , ou.
Carpenter , © weXexavoc, cu.
Builder , Mason , Brick-layer -, &
*Tt5-nf-> vj or ou.
Locksmith , 6 xXsto'apa<; , a.
Miller , 6 p.uXava; , a.
Laundress , % 7rXuq>a ? &<;.
Goldsmith , 6 yp-jcrcyooi; > o'cu.
Comedian, Player, Actor, 6 {J7ro-«
XptTTQ? j OU-
Musician, 6 p.ouar«.>cb$ , oy-
Armourer, 6 oTrXoirotos j» ou.
Porter, 6 (^a^d^os, ou« 6 a^Gowops? , ou«
Cook, 6 {xit-yctpac > a 6 jxa-yEtpo;, ou*
Gardener , * 6 wiroupoo ou. 6 ^e^t*
poXdpvji; , *;.
Vine-dresser , 6 dptirsXoup"p; , cu*
Ploughman , 6 fcu-f d; , a-
Bodily Imperfections.
2w|xc4Tt>ia eXatrtop.aTato
One-eyed , |AovoG8aXp.oc * 5 , •«•
£T£pdcp8aX|A0«j, 6 , y>
Blind , <rpa$6s » vj y ov- TUcpXo?» 7i * ov.
Cross eyed , aXXYiGopo? , v> , ov.
Hump-backed , Kau.7roufY); , a. pd-
jtfrins > taca-
JLame, xout'Cqi; > x > o'v > y/oXb;, r, , o'v»
Deaf , noun's ? r > ov.
Dumb , fkuSos , ri , ov.
Stammerer, TpauX*$,Yi, ov*
Bald , <paXax,pb$ , e , i.
Dwarf , o vavo? , ou.
Giant, 6 -yifavrocs » a«
Accidents Diseases, etc.
'ATUy^'^aTa x.al a^poi^tou-
Happiness, Luck> ■& eu^atfxovta, tots-
r, ejTuyJa : ca;. ,
Misfortune , f, ^ucruyja ? ta;.
Chance , vj tu*/v). to' dutojiarov ? ou.
Invalid, appw<ro<;,- 6, & dvsn{X7ropo? ? y> f
cv. he is unwell , &h ru,7ropjT.
Sickness , Disease , Ailment, -ft dp-
pw^ta j taj. •yj vo'soc ? cj. to 4 ir«-
Oo-: , ou.
OU. 6 tt'jpSTO; , ou.
Ague , rd auyxpua , 6<av. to £"70$ ,
ou;. the fit is on him , to\ yjxOe
to' pt^o?.
Shivering 1 , ac dvaf pt^'Xat?. A shiver*-
ing has seized him , T ov v,X0o,m
dvscTp'.^iXoti-: • dvcitpt^ixcoc s Av«-
Tpl^lcXCJAa-
Gout , 7) ^o^a-ypot , a?»
Colic , xtoXtJco'irovo?.
Measles , vj Kuostyi^K , «?• ?; £$f«xts»
Small-pox , r iutap& , id-, he is
pock-*marked, pock- fretted, fya
tuXo-ytaT?. eiva* euXo^taafisvo;.
Itch , if] <J;«pa , 014.
Scrofula , at ^atpa&g; ? wv.
Abscess , to ! d-jvcV^fta j aro?. to 1 *
cr7rup(»
Swelling , to' Trp*/i<7p;a ? «toc- (
Scratch , to' ^ou^pavtcraa ? ato;-
Slap, Smack , Box , § 6 ^tz^Iq^
* < f »
to paTrcTao. j arc;.
Swoon, r, Xi*yo9u{Aia, ia;. r, XqoadpajC^
Death , 6 Oavaro? , eu-
reptiles and Insects,
epr*Tcc xat evTorxa.
Ffog , Pafpa^o? j ou. |3aOpa;':6c > ^*«
Snail , oraXia^bs ^ ou-
Spider , r, dpa^vrj ? ^5.
Serpent,- T 6 cpt^t ^ tou-
Butterflly , r t ^eraXcu^a ? ac-
Fly , vi p,uqa , a;.
Musquito , to kouvoutj ? wu»
Caterpillar , V3 XdXa , as-
Worm , to <yy.cuXr>-t 5 i*a»
Louse , ri t^eTpa j a;.
Flea, 'iuXXo; , ou*
Bug , 6 jioptb; , tou.
Ant , tj p.uoa^^y.'. ? iou*
Rural Objects
&oad , c £po'tAcs ? ou*
Wain, § o y.afiTTo? , oo. r, iti§i.i§<X}&---
Valley , r , xotXa<5a , a?.
Mountain, to (3ci»dv,oyV* to opG§. cu;.
Wood , to ^ac7c; , o;.
Hedge , 7, «ppafcT7) , y;-
Tree , T o ekv^pov , o»*
lS r est , yj ipcoXaia , etas*
Corn , rb aiTapt . icu-
Turf j Verdure , r, 77pa<nva<5\x , a?.
Meadovr , to X$c$i , tou. * 6 XetpStv
£>vo;.
Lake , Pond, 71 Xtuvy , n;.
Rocii , £pa/_c; , cu.
Rivulet , to puaiei , tou-
ixiver , '6 ?rc-afxoc » ou-
Bridge , to -yeccupt , icu.
Marsh , £ CaXro; , ou- marshy ,
BaX7M(5ViS ? 6 , 7].
Mill , 6 jauXc; ? ou. Wind-mill ,
avsaojAuXc;. Water -mill. vs-
' pc'auXo?„
Tillage, to y^piov to x«ot6 ? tcu*
Appertaining to a Town.
Town, City, r, y.topa, a;. * woXt^ ceo?.
Church , vi sxaXycta , ta;.
Hospital , '" to vc<jo>ccp.siov , eicu.
§ to ciznik'. , tou.
Market , § to ?ra£apt , tou* § ts
T^apal , tcii.
Port, 6 Xiu.iva; > svo;.
Custom House , § to xouuupx.t, ttu-
TO TcXtOVlGV , IGU«
Prison , § 7) yd^n , y;. y epuXaxy, y*;-
Coach, Carriage, T b ka-i, icu-
Shop- Workshop, to ep-yasvipiov, tou,
Magazine , § to ^.a^alt, iau. * r.
avc6TiX7) > y;.
Colours,
W 7 hite , ao-Trpc; , y , ov.
Black , p.aupo; , y , ov. blackish ,
ja&Mxftilii y 5 oV jj.JtuQic£p4c, x, o'v.
Red , jto'jexivoe , vj , cv- Reddish ,
JiOOCtVttTTO; , y , o'v.
Green, irpsfotvcs 9 y, , cv-
Yellow, xtTpivc;, r, , ov. yellowish ,
xtTpivwrro; 3 y ? c'v.
Blue , p.a(3u;> eta, u. sky-blue upa»
voeuH; , 6 $ y.
Grey, ^axToet^sj c,r,. ash-coloured,
Violet , * i'ocic^v,; , 6 , t.
Minerals.
Gold , 6 xpu^o? ■> co. to pa'XatAiiaj
a-c?. adj , [j.aXaa.aaT£vtc;, ta, tov.
Silver , 6 apppc;, cu. Todayui, t2 j.
adj , aay^svto; , ta ? to>>. Silver
Coin ,j Money , T a aairpa,
Plate, Ta acryp.t/toc-
Iron , * au^ypo; , cu. tc c:<hpov, ou.
Lead, to pwXufJt , tcu.
Copper , 6 X aXxb; , su. § t& pira-
xtpt, tou.
Brass, § to xaXdt, i'cu.
Tin , 6 -nrdcpuXa; ? a-
Sulphur , to Setae?- , tou-
Glass , to OaXt > tou.
Verbs*
To Study , awou^octw. aor. <r a , ©?
fa part. pass, apivo;. chapduo ,
aor. aa.. part. pass. cpivc;.
— Learn, p.a6atvw. by heart , —
p.aQaivw airs?w , d^o^yOttw. —
rehearse , Xe'70 aw'e^w. mentally,
dirb jie'ea.
— Read , £iaj3a£o> , dvay.vwcxw,
like, -j'lvwfficto.
— Sign , uwypacpM.
— Seal, § €o'j)Xo'v(o. cra»pa-v'''^<o«
-— Fold , ^iTvXdvw. spread, qa.tXo'vwf
aor. toaa. part, pass, tojxsvo?.
— Correct , <hop6oW aor. <o©a
partic. pass. ^opOcopivos.
lEfiace, c^uvu. irr.
Translate, p.£Ta©p«^«. aor. <ya. part.
pass. «y. w ;,.
i3
To Continue, ij[etx*Xoud$> et; 9 6r«£.
Finish , reXeiovw. aor. w<ja. part,
pass. wf/,svo?.
Do , make , xaavw^ in*.
Know , ^e»p«>. irr.
To be able , * <$uvatX«i. irr.
Pronounce , wpocpego).
Accentuate , rovt^w. aor.><^. part,
pass. fffAevo.g.
Say, speak, Xs'yw. converse , fy.t-
X« , si?.
Prattle , chatter, § Xa*pi£eu&>. Xa-
X5> , et?«
Ba w i , vociferate , cry , <pcDva£o>«
aor. |at.
Open , avofyw. aor. rIvoi<fa. Adj
instead of part: past , avowry,
H, o'v , opened.
Shut , *$ «Xyu , a-, aor. ncrx- part
pass. c^aXvic^£;o?" common in-
stead of pa Ft. past, adj er<p<xXr
<?QS , VI , OV.
To be silent ,. gm-xa , «;. aor. ^orx*
Call, jcpat^o) , aor. £«.
Answer, a7rottptvop.au aor. Oviv-
Of eating and drinking.
To drink , -reivw.
Eat, Tpw-yeo.
Masticate, chew, ymsa , e?$ ? aor.
vjt>a- part. pass, yipivo?.
Swalicw , xaTraTTtvo.
Cut , xoTTTb). aor. ^«. part. pass.
sco p. p.£vo?.
To clean , wash, rjrtse, ttXuvw aor.
sVXuva- pass. swXuGVjv. part. pass.
-TrXup.e'vo^.
— Fast , v73seu&). aor. c«.
- — Dine', -^yep-at. aor. g-ysuS.viv. to
breakfast , 7rpo*y£Uop.x;.
• — Sup , S'stiuvw ,eT?. or 5;. aor. vicra.
— Get drunk to intoxicate one-
self
5 \>
p.£9fi>
>or. ua«.
— Satisfy., and t© be satisfied , airXuTo$,«v
X«?Tatvo. aos. e/ZpTaca. f>art,
pass. yopracrij.Evoc. See p. 88.
To Be hungry , U£lv s> ,- «-. aor.
acra. part., pass. wetvac;p.svo$- y
hungered.
— - Thirsty, £i<J/a>, a?, aor. affa . part.
pass. ^aap.s'vo? , thirsty.
About going to bed and rising.
To go to bed , irXa-yia&w. aor. $&*
— Rise, get up, crjxa'vo^ai.pass-
of gyijco'vw.
- — Sleep, jcotp.S>p.&i.
*»■ Make" sleep , airojcstpC^o , jwr 1
p.i^w. aor. <ya. part. pass, %ct~
p.i<jp,s'vo;.
— Go to sleep , aw©)totp,S>p.at. aor,
tq9viv-
— Awake , or keep watch, a-YpuTC-
vw , si;, aor. r,<ra. £tp.at i'lurrvo; ,
elysrvb? , yi , o'v.
- — Repose, rest oneself, geseoupff-
£op.at. aor. gOyiv-. part. pass, £e<*
XGl»p(XGp.£VO;.
. — - Dream, 6veipsuop.au aor. 6r,v.
— Snore , po-^aXc£o>. aor. ox.
— Awaken , — rouse oneself
^uiwu , a;, aor. y^a. whence,
£uti;vy)t6?, t j o'v , sprightly lively.
- — Dress, Iv^uvw , aor. oa . to dress
oneself, £v£uvcp.at. aor. 6r,v. part.
pass. ev^upivo;- dressed.
— Undress , ss^uvw. aor. aa . mu
dress oneself, £ 'x£uvop.au aor. 6nv*
part. pass, e/.oupivo? , undrest.
— Comb r xt£v(Cw. aor. <ja- comb
oneself , xT6vi?ofi.ai aor. sOnv.
part. pass, jcTEvicpivo?. combed*
oVrsVigo; , o , V) , uncombed.
— Wash , ttXuvw , viSw , aor. 4'oCf
wash oneself, <rcXyvop.au vt£op.ai^
aor. co0r ( v. part. pass, vtp.u.s'vo>
;vt<pTo«, 6 , • ■«. unwashed-
Jo Paint, qma'vo(/.cH aor. G 8r,v. part.
pass. , ap,svo? , from , cpriavco- to
make ,
Common actions.
To Laugh , ^eXw , a?, aor. aca.
— Weep , jc).ct(co. irr.
• — Sigh , ^eva&rt.'avas-Sva&a. aor. i-a.
— Breathe , ava-^vs'co. irr. avacaivw.
aor. ava.
- — Sneeze (jprepviCoaai. aor. eursp-
— Gape , yawn , ^affjioupsiou^at.
aor. ri0Yiv.
— Blow, puff, TOUffto, a?, aor. r,ca,
— Whistle , snp'Zai- cyuoi'Cu.
•*- Listen , hearken, axoozUpzi.
aor. rr^odoHf.
! — Hear , «>ccu0. aor. ca. part.
pass,, a^'vo;.
— Feel , a i<y8a'vop.«t. aor. aicdavSviy.-
■ — Spit, cpt6(j). aor. era-
— Blow or wipe the nose , a ~o-
[j.'jliZ.o. . aor. tea- snuff the candle,
§ Izftikifa. aor. ca. part. pass.
valve'?,
-*- Perspire , t^povta. aor. W ca. part.
pass. i^:o)^3v»;. in perspiration.
i — Wipe^ccfou-p/^cD , aor. ? «. part.
pass, ffjisvo?-
— Tremble , Tp=|tw.
— Cough , (jrr/o. aor. £ tt .
■ — Pinch, § T&fMwS , a?, aor. yjaa.
— Scrape, scratch, scrub, £ug>. irr.
- — Tickle, ^ap^aXCCo.
Actions of kindness hatred etc.
To love , a-ya^co , a;, aor. vj«a part.
pass, r.y.svo;.
Caress , ywJeuca. aor. ca. part.
pass, p.s'v:;.
Flatter , xeXaxeuo. aor. ca- part.
pass. a=vc;.
Make much of , court friendship }
Wcpncoiou {/.at? aor. r,0riv-
Embrace, * fteTr«&it«i. <*-fxaX^o{A«tj
r 79
aor. cflviv. part. pass.,o^)caX:ff^e'voj.
Kiss , cptXcb , el; , or «;. aor. vi«y«.
Salute , ^atpsTia , a;, wpccxuvw , Etjy
aor. y,ca.
Teach , (Svj'a'axct). IpfjunveiStD.
Nurse, nurture, bring up, rps'ftt*
aor. 6 a . part. pass. OpspifcEvc?.
Suckle, po"Cavto. aor. Ha. part. pass.
Punish , wat<hu&>. aor. ca. part.
pass. pivo?.
Commend , praise , l^atvw , eT?i
s-rratvoup.at. aor. sOnv-
Blame, accuse, y.'Azrqopa , etj,
Give, ^to , irr. /.apt^u, aor. ck;
Procure , «po|Arj8s6co, aor. ca. part.
pass. p.s'v&-.
Deny, apvouffat. aor. xGyiv.
Hinder , gp,«o£i£a. aor. ca- part,
pass, cusve-.
Defend, urspac-ju^oaat. §<hacp£vTc£&)o
aor. sa. part. pass. p,evo;.
Beat, strike , <h'pve>. irr. *tuit& a?.
aor. yjca, part. pass. , r,u.:vo;.
Hate , p.iao, si?- aor. visa, part,
pass. Yijiivos*
Drive away , ^wo^vw. aor. £a. part,
pass, -yjins'vc?.
Pardon , cuy/wpo) , a!?, aor. visa,
part. pass. «pivoc .
Dispute, <ptXoveixw , si-, quarrel,
scold , paXovto. aor. w©a- part.
pass, (ops'vo;.
Protect, ^pco^a-cjw. aor. ca uirepa-
qwi^ofiuai. aor. «8t:v- part. pass.
cus'vo;.
Abandon , I-yxaTaXei?*©.. leave 3
acpivw ? irr.
Fear, be afraid of, acpcuu.ai, stoat,
and wai. aor. efflo[H6?jv; part,
pass, cpo'o'.cjxs'vc;.
Frighten, cpo£i&>. aor. ca. threaten^
cpc[jcp ; ^o , aor. ca.
Tremble ( with fear ) T pcus£a 9
a<er. £*; part. pass, -r^opocc^vc^
To observe, see, look at, [5),Ei7w.irr.
joTra^o). aor. \%. 6swf w , £15. aor.
vicra. part. pass. , yip,s'voc>
Move , Ktvw , sT;, and &;. aor. v>ca,
part. pass. , yjpivoc;,
Examine, e£s-a£w. aor. oa. part.
pass. , o|xs'vo ? .
Smell «<:£ and neut , p,upi£co. aor*
era. rt sup.opcpov rptavrdcpuXXov, p.u-
ptas to. what a fine rose, <S7/Z£// it,
p,uj>i£si jco-Xa , it smells well.
Of Diversion and Amusement.
Divert, amuse oneself, ^taotEc^to,
£scpav~o'v to. § s-yXevt^w , aor. era.
Sing, rpa-pxSw, ei? and £;, aor. vicra.
Dance , xopEoo , aor. era.
Jump , leap , m^S , a;, aor, vjcra.
Play , Tral&a. aor. 5*.
Ride, § jcaPaXXiasuco.
Gain , xEpcWfco. aor. era. jcspcfaivw.
aor. ava. part. pass. n\i.Uo$.
Lose , xavco. aor. acra. part. pass.
^apivo?.
Bet,j3d^to q oiyrn&ci.. £ot£Y]p.aT(£io=aor.cra
Risk , javdWuo) aor. era.
Joke, ^topaxeuco- aor. era- [/.sTwpl^o^ai,
Stand C upright) gsxop,ai op8o'?.
Bend, scXivto. aor. va. part.pass. pivo$.
Stoop , aaucpTto. aor. <},«. whence .,
ewjcpTO? , *a » ov , stooping.
Turn , ppifra. aor. oa. part pass.
ertxe'vo;.
Stop , (jajxarw cc'xop.at. irr.
Walk . TFep'.^aTco , eTg- aor. vicrot.
Walk forward , 7vpo7raTfi>., et«. *&e,
TfarS).
Go, TTYi^atvw. irr.
Come, 1'px.op.at. irr.
Remain, pivco. >cd6op.as irr.
Run , rpf/w. irr.
Follow, ajcoXou85> , va , and «?. aor.
r/cra , part. pass, vjae'vo;.
Escape , ^Xutovw. aor. wsa.
To set off, or out , ^tcrsuw. a©r. «*
epsu'yw , irr. ava^wpo>.
Advance , irpo^wpw , si/, aor. r,ca;»
part. pass. y^sW.
Remove from , d77op,a>cpuvio. axop.a-
jcpu\op.ai. aor. uvGviv, part, pass,
divop.axpucrp.svo?.
Approach , act and neut, bring
near, 7rXYicrta£M. eps'pto jcovrd, IV
^ojiat jeovTot*
Fall , iTscprw. irr.
Slide, slip , <yXu<rpfi> , 5«. aor. 73^
Arrive, ep9a'v&>. irr.
Enter , ep^aivw. irr.
Go out , ep-vutveo , irr.
Ascend , dvai(3aiv&> , irr.
Descend , KaTaipacvu. irr.
Hurry act, (Stock*, aor. ff a. hasten
«<?« , |3icf£op,at. aor. <j6yiv. part.
pass. ap.£v55-
Begin , apy tv« , a?, aor. yjcra. part;
pass, vifjuevo?* dpj^ta. aor. ua. part*
pass.. er^e'vo{.
Help , aid, p.aTa7uavo>. aor. era*
part. pass. apivoc;.
Succour , pon8a> , els* aor. ■« era-
part, pass. y)p.s'v,oc.
Grasp, seize, hold firmly, xpara*
ets, aor. vicra^
Cure , tarpeu^. Ospairaueo. aor. era.
Bleed f epXEl3orop.fi>, eT?. eS-yce^eo alp.a*
Of buying etc.
Ask the price , epwrfi) rriv Tip-rlv*
wo'cra e'x,ei- Tco'oa § &tse;i£st.
Measure ; p,£Tpfi> , eT; , and a;.
Buy , dfopd^ta. aor. era. part. apivo^
at a high price , dearly, dwtgi(3a.
cheaply , gu8v!va. for nothing,
for a song, ^aptcrp,«.
Sell , TPtoXS , sis- aor. nera part. pass.
Yijuvog.
Pay , icXvipovu. aor. ©era- part.
pass. ©pivas.
Offer, 7ipoercp£eo>. <p/po)°
i8i
101
To propose, Trpo^ocXXw. aor. inpo€aX<£ To Cover , exiizxfal aor. era. part
hend , £avsi£w. aor - w. borrow ,
<$\xvei£oj/.at- aor. c9r ( v.
Cheat , cajole , fsX£> , a;, aor. act.
xax. pass. oOviv. part. pass. <rtXa-
pass. CU.1V0;.
Uncover', ^scocercaCw , dvaxaXuTvtu ,
Manual Acts.
Work , IfYa^ofjiai. aor. crGv)v. <^ou-
Xeu». aor. c?a- part. pass. pive;.
*cTCta£w , aor. ©a-
Touch, lay hold of, inavw. aor. ex.
ifyiCtt- aor - act - ?«■ aor - pass.
X^viv- part. pass. s-^i^uivo;.
Handle , p,aXacrcr<«>. $¥jXaf&*
Bind, tie , <h'vw. irr.
Untie, unbind , loose, x6<o, aor.
ex. part. pass. ii.evo$>
Leave, dtatveo. irr.
Remove, take away, ip-fateo. irr.
Take , we'pvw. irr.
Draw , drag, Tpa£o>, a?, aor. act.
rj;a. pass, ifyfaiv. part. pass. rpa-
3*^u.=vo;. withdraw , TpaPs'.cojAxt.
Fly, 778-w, a;, aor. a£a.
Rob , steal , xXenro). aor. ^ a . part,
pass. p.u.j'vo?.
Search , rummage , M%w, aor. £a.
Gather , <juva£ia. aor. £%. part. pass.
Collect , paScvw. aor. «$a. part.
pass. , ti>u.2vo?.
Present , Trpocjcpspw. wappvicta^u.
aor. ax, part. pass, euAvo;.
Receive, <h'xcu.ai. oar. iktfw Adj
Sextos, W 5 ov.
Squeeze , ccp-^w. aor. |«, part.
pass, -yiAs'vo?.
Hold , ga^w, a?, aor. a£a. jcoxtu, si? ,
Fiend, tear, C7 vci, as- aor. x<jx. part.
pass, cjracf/.c'vo;.
Spoil , destroy , xa Xv« , a?, aor.
e^aXaffa. part. pass. ^aXa<r 4 u.evo;.
Crush, ffuvrptSo, like rp$».
'Hide, xp-jTTTw. aor. 6a. part. pass.
imsvoj.
aor. ijiz, part. pass. ^5704.
Soil , § Xepo'vw. aor. <a<ja.
Clean , Tra^pe-jw. aor. era.
Rub , t^'!3o>. aor. act. tyx. pass.
srpiSviv and erptcpQ'/iv. part. pass.
Tpia;j.£vo;.
Scratch, £ou-fr?avi£&>. aor. coc. part.
pass cjxs'vo;.
Paint, ^pa^o), oar. iex- part,
pass, cas'vo?.
Engrave , yxXwypxya sv/aparto;
Draw , outline, -Ypjfow. ipcA'pa'pS^sTc?
Sketch , CTyj^ia^o. aor. era-
Embroider, xevTU) el«. or <£?. aor.r.ax»
Gild , vpudovw. aor. waa.
Plate , a<T^u.o'v». aor. ©tya*
Print , t'jtto'vw. aor. <acra.
Build , x~[£g>- aor. ax. part. pass.
Plough , op^ovw. aor. wcra.
Kill , GxoTo'vo). tpoveuto. oneself, ctjmto-
vop.at-
Wound , TrXYiyo'vco. Xa£o'v».
Saw , irptovtC&>. aor. ex.
Sail , tpXsw. ap^£vtCw*
Rov/ , xcoTT'/iXarw, si;. rpa(3a> TOxourcU'
Carry, cpe'pw and <pe'pva>. aor. act. sips-
pa. aor. pass, scpipdviv- part. pass.
py.s'vo;. whence , veoospuivc; ,
<psp r >
newly arrived,
aor* era- part,
part.
ass.
Transport , xoy{3aXi£ta
pass, ci/.cvc?-
Pound , xoiravifo- aor. era
pass, cru-svo;.
Bake, ^vu. aor. vjcr*. part, p
^•niAsvc?. whence , to <j J /5rov.
Boi!, Bpa^co. aor. era part.pass. cras'vo;.
whence , T o Spa^-ov , boiledmedt.
Fry , Tr^av^w. aor, ex- part.pass.
0a?VO^v
I 82
Operations of the Mind.
To remember, ev8upou|jiai, sloai and,
aarai- aor. viOnv-
Remind , IvQua^to- aor. ca-
Forget, Xmo^ovco) eis* £ex,vw 3 a;, like,
X,avca- to lose.
Foresee, provide , irpc(3Xe'7re>.
Meditate , {aeXetco, «?. aor. yica.
Premeditate , apcpeXETtt , £5.
Be willing, 9s'Xco. irr.
Desire , &t6uu$ , et;- aor. y) ffa .
Think , £oyjx£o{/.at. aor. cOw«
Relieve, ?n<rE'jco. aor, ffa .
Doubt , a^cptpaXXw. aor* dtxcpLgaXa*
^JiSpeCt , U7T07TTEUCO. UTC07rT£'JO TOV
av9p«7rov ? I suspect the Man ,
fofoirrEUGJAffci oil Sccyeivvi auro xa>cc',
I suspect that this will turn out
ill , or end badly.
Observe remark, TrapaTYipw, et?. aor.
Yi«a. part. pass. , yip.=vo?.
Beware of, take care of, attend to,
cpuXa^cp.at. aor.^Gy;v. Trpoas'^a).
Know, -yvwpt^w. aor. aa. part. pass.
Imagine , ©avTa&fAai. aor. ff Qy]v ,
part. pass. , ^^05.
"Wish , eu^o^.au aor. euyjvifiviv. irr,
Hope , sXtuCo. aor. ffa .
Assure , p £ 3aio'vw. aor, wc-a- part
pass, cojasvo?.
Judge , xpi'vw. aor. V a-
Conclude, infer, cufATCepaiW aor
ava. part. pass. , a^lvo?.
Conjecture , efoeeCto. aor. ca- part.
pass, gjas'vo?.
Besolve , determine , airctpaai&a.
aor ca. part, pass , c^e'vo?.
#?eign, aau.cvou.ai. Trpoffrtiouaai; sccai-
To be irritable , irapawlpvepai.
— be quiet, to calm, or compose
oneself, ^u^afra. aor. ex.
— be deceived, mistaken , Xav9o*
vou.at. irr.
Embroil, su.irepiS'euto. aor. aa. £M,irsp-
<S'e6cu.ai. aor. Oyiv. part, pass., u,s'vo$.
Envy, to be jealous , SyiXeuw , and
^cryXsuw. aor.oa. cp9ov£>) ET-.aor.Yica,
part pass. vijiivos.
Hate, jxtcw, el?, aor. yxra. part. pass.
v)f&sv&€< whence , {mot/it^s , V) 3 c'v ,
hateful odious,
I am sorry , ^s aaxo^paiv&Tat.
J like it , to vogiu.£uoj/.at.' u. apsa-si;
I don't like it, <Hv jt'aps'aei.
To be angry , fio£&|», aor, w <xa.
part. pass. eufjuouivo?.
Pout, sulk , jxavi'Co). aor, w«. part,
pass. {j.avicr{j(.svGs»
Quarrel dispute , ^aXo'vw. aor. o<j«;
Offend , hurt , give pain, wucpaiVw.
aor. act. ava- aor. pass. aOnv.part,
pass. , atts've?.
It goes against me, I find it hard,
<5 , ucJtcX£uo^ai , aor. 8nv.
I lament, X'jircup.at, ETorat , or Sofa.
aor r.Qyjv. part, pass.", Xutcyiusvo? ?
afflicted , £ £v Xunrarai ra a'crrpa ,
he grieves not about , does not
regret the Money , Traparcovcij-
pat', eujat , aor. e9v)v.
Weary, tire, jtoupa^^ aor ffa . part.
pass, cmevog a7co<^aivo) > act. neut.
aor. irr. a5tt . part. pass. , d-nrcq-a-
p.s'vo? , act. and neut. , I have
tired my horse, arco'ca^* to aXcyo'v
p.00. My Horse is tired, to dXcr/oy
FINIS,
i83
The fdilowincf are errors that may mislead , and therefore
Gu«ht to he noted by a learner. Some few others have been
tin avoidable ; but they are such , or so circumstanced , that
they can hardly, it is hoped , lead to a mistake,
ERRATA.
Page. Line,
6 5 For U%k *ead Zx^k
to 17 — (i-CU ~ {ACU
tt 9 — Tf&S ' Tf sX l
ib. 13 — to leasee ~~ to '<SWs
ib. ib. — to e^oxe — ' to e^wtfs
ib. 14 — ' tcj to 'ira — ' tcj -0 wa
!2 22 — * toy to '77a ■— ~c\> to ira
i5 1 —> i — tj
3i 3o — tU — *U
42 22 — eppt^a — - eponpx SeeP. 77 , 1. 15-
54 23 — «Yp«<pcujjtacs — "ypawpoupx^e
69 12 — ' 5>[/.e8a — w(asOx
go 7 — sCcysvcia ca? — eu^evia <ra.;
109 1 5 — t! va xau.w — ' Tt va xat&c*
no 32 — ■ Figure 6 ought to be placed before « fVhen orav,»
line 22.
rr2 5 — ff/fcer say razt? « the latter »
i3i 24 — incipient Vowel read incipient long Vowel.
Chapter has, in references, been sometimes misnumbered, as at P. 4 2
and 58 j three should , in such cases, be added to the number,
g 441
% .
%-^V V^V V^>°
;S5R- : ** v % '-SHE*' s*\ s «5Wf ** v % 3H
^1
• i*^ "«^^P» A^f -
* «? ^. "VMS)?* AV "<>. •
." .►* ■*
jP-^
F* aV^ -
:• «*. a*
V
'. V^*'
• ^ ^
.*
»♦>' .•••.. <s>.
4 0-a
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process
^~ 4. V Ofl Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide
o ^£- ^ V f %k Treatment Date: July 2006
• £*W *°W PreservationTechnologies
'Wm\v? ♦^ : ll3lf" ^'V ^W PreservationTechnologies
V^N V ^ ^HflHKy^ 4 -V ^ "V^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESEBVATIOr
*• • * * **\ ^ A *<VC»* *G^ V? "« 111 Thomson Park Drive
' A> »e *t*6 -.^ Lit *^ Cranberry Township, PA 16066
%s '
*t** a"
A
4?
A w 9 ,l m
° <0 A
• ^V-fflBF.^
% ***** A <* *??7r % a g* ^ *••»• A
... ^
"fav* :
■»• 4.°-^ *:
To° .«o
%<*
..^.2i^.V ^>*»!k-i:..^ ^.ifife-V
\. ^W?- 5 ^ 1 ^ : -SK»' /\ s wR- \^
F* .4
• # ^
«,. A* *
*
w
v * '•3Bf'^* , \ ; «5R-'.^ v \ '•
%<?-
j***.
& %
•o. •.;
V<\.i^, %
■ B
.* *\
"^ ^